WIN-911 V7

WIN-911 V7
WIN-911 V7.14
Table of Contents
Introduction ................................................................................................................................ 1
Getting Started ....................................................................................................................... 1
What is WIN-911? ............................................................................................................... 1
What's New ......................................................................................................................... 2
Hardware Requirements ..................................................................................................... 3
Licensing Options ................................................................................................................... 6
Standard Products .............................................................................................................. 6
Feature Upgrades ............................................................................................................... 8
Installation .............................................................................................................................10
Installing WIN-911 V7 ........................................................................................................10
Installing WIN-911 Premium Voice .....................................................................................13
Installing WEB-911 Services ..............................................................................................14
Installing WEB-911 XTools Client ......................................................................................17
Installing Mobile-911 ..........................................................................................................20
Upgrading WIN-911 ...............................................................................................................24
Upgrading to a New Version ..............................................................................................24
Adding Feature Upgrades ..................................................................................................25
WIN-911 Licensing and CopyShield Administration ...............................................................26
Request a License .............................................................................................................26
Import a License ................................................................................................................30
CopyShield Overview ................................................................................................................33
CopyShield Overview ............................................................................................................33
CopyShield Administrator ......................................................................................................34
CopyShield Administrator...................................................................................................34
Request a License .............................................................................................................36
Install a License .................................................................................................................39
CopyShield License Type ..................................................................................................43
CopyShield License Start End Dates .................................................................................44
iii
WIN-911 V7.14
CopyShield License Options ..............................................................................................45
CopyShield License Machine ID ........................................................................................46
CopyShield License Expiration ..............................................................................................47
WIN-911 Overview ....................................................................................................................49
System Architecture ..............................................................................................................49
What is the Direct Connect?...............................................................................................49
System Components ..........................................................................................................50
Remote Alarm Notification .....................................................................................................61
The Sound Clips ................................................................................................................61
Sound Source ....................................................................................................................63
Hardware ...........................................................................................................................64
Notification Methods ..........................................................................................................67
Configurator Basics ...................................................................................................................77
The WIN-911 Configuration Window .....................................................................................77
Common Dialog Boxes ..........................................................................................................78
Definition Dialog Boxes .........................................................................................................79
Sound Button.........................................................................................................................80
Sound Button .....................................................................................................................80
Save Runtime Text String ..................................................................................................81
Convert Text to Wave File ..................................................................................................82
Edit Wave File Dialog .........................................................................................................84
Configurator Menu ....................................................................................................................85
File ........................................................................................................................................85
Mode .....................................................................................................................................89
Global ....................................................................................................................................92
Tools .....................................................................................................................................94
Help .......................................................................................................................................98
Global Menus ..........................................................................................................................101
Global Menu ........................................................................................................................101
iv
Table of Contents
Common Sounds .................................................................................................................102
Common Sounds .............................................................................................................102
Common ..........................................................................................................................104
911 Only ..........................................................................................................................106
411 Only ..........................................................................................................................108
411 Numbers ...................................................................................................................110
Conditions ........................................................................................................................111
Prefixes ............................................................................................................................113
States ..............................................................................................................................114
Controls ...........................................................................................................................115
Monitor Definition ................................................................................................................119
Monitor Definition .............................................................................................................119
Appearance .....................................................................................................................120
Acknowledge ...................................................................................................................122
Colors ..............................................................................................................................125
Format .............................................................................................................................126
Printer Definition ..................................................................................................................129
Printer Definition ..............................................................................................................129
Port ..................................................................................................................................130
Format .............................................................................................................................131
Pager Definition ...................................................................................................................134
Pager Definition ...............................................................................................................134
Ports ................................................................................................................................135
Commands ......................................................................................................................137
Connect ...........................................................................................................................139
Failed ...............................................................................................................................140
Format .............................................................................................................................141
Voice Card Definition ...........................................................................................................145
Voice Card Definition .......................................................................................................145
v
WIN-911 V7.14
Voice................................................................................................................................146
Timing ..............................................................................................................................147
Control .............................................................................................................................148
SMS Definition.....................................................................................................................149
SMS Definition .................................................................................................................149
Port ..................................................................................................................................150
Message Format ..............................................................................................................153
Ack Format ......................................................................................................................158
E-Mail Definition ..................................................................................................................163
E-Mail Definition ...............................................................................................................163
SMTP Account .................................................................................................................164
Authentication ..................................................................................................................166
Format .............................................................................................................................168
Logger Definition .................................................................................................................172
Logger Definition ..............................................................................................................172
Daily TXT .........................................................................................................................173
Monthly MDB ...................................................................................................................177
Data Poke Definition ............................................................................................................179
Data Poke Definition ........................................................................................................179
System Health .................................................................................................................180
Voice Health ....................................................................................................................181
Pager Health ....................................................................................................................183
Group...............................................................................................................................185
Format .............................................................................................................................186
IP Definition .........................................................................................................................189
IP Definition .....................................................................................................................189
Connection Settings .........................................................................................................190
Protocol ...........................................................................................................................193
Format .............................................................................................................................195
vi
Table of Contents
Options ................................................................................................................................200
Options ............................................................................................................................200
Paths ...............................................................................................................................201
Timing ..............................................................................................................................202
411...................................................................................................................................204
Initialization ......................................................................................................................206
Advanced .........................................................................................................................208
FIX ...................................................................................................................................211
RSView SE ......................................................................................................................213
Wonderware ....................................................................................................................215
Configuration Menus ...............................................................................................................217
Configure Menu ...................................................................................................................217
Schedule Definitions ............................................................................................................218
Phonebook ..........................................................................................................................219
Phonebook.......................................................................................................................219
Phonebook Entry to Edit ..................................................................................................220
Name Definition ...............................................................................................................221
Connection Definition .......................................................................................................223
Data Source Definitions .......................................................................................................226
Group Definitions .................................................................................................................228
Group Definitions .............................................................................................................228
Base Definition .................................................................................................................230
Contact List ......................................................................................................................232
Contact Delays ................................................................................................................233
Group Poke......................................................................................................................235
Sound ..............................................................................................................................238
Filter Definitions...................................................................................................................240
Filter Definition .................................................................................................................240
Base Definition .................................................................................................................242
vii
WIN-911 V7.14
Setup ...............................................................................................................................244
Tag Sound .......................................................................................................................246
Digital Sound ...................................................................................................................247
Analog Sound ..................................................................................................................248
Digital Definitions .................................................................................................................249
Digital Definition ...............................................................................................................249
Base Definition .................................................................................................................251
Alarm Conditions..............................................................................................................253
Sounds ............................................................................................................................255
Changeable .....................................................................................................................256
Analog Definitions ...............................................................................................................257
Analog Definition ..............................................................................................................257
Base Definition .................................................................................................................259
Conversion.......................................................................................................................261
Alarm Limits .....................................................................................................................264
Sounds ............................................................................................................................266
Changeable .....................................................................................................................268
Watchdog Timer Definitions.................................................................................................269
Watchdog Timer Definition ...............................................................................................269
Base Definition .................................................................................................................271
Alarm Conditions..............................................................................................................272
Sounds ............................................................................................................................274
WIN-411 Reports .................................................................................................................275
Overview ..........................................................................................................................275
Prerequisites ....................................................................................................................276
The Audio ........................................................................................................................278
411 Options .....................................................................................................................279
Voice Report Definitions...................................................................................................280
SMS Report Definitions ....................................................................................................285
viii
Table of Contents
WIN-911 Runtime ...................................................................................................................289
Scan & Alarm Operation ......................................................................................................289
Startup.................................................................................................................................291
Shutdown ............................................................................................................................292
Bypassing Alarms ................................................................................................................293
Dialout Override ..................................................................................................................295
The WIN-911 Alarm Monitor ................................................................................................297
Manual Messenger ..............................................................................................................302
Alarm Logger .......................................................................................................................304
Alarm Log Manager .............................................................................................................305
ArchestrA Direct Connect ........................................................................................................307
Introduction .........................................................................................................................307
ArchestrA Direct Connection ............................................................................................307
ArchestrA Data Source Definition ........................................................................................309
Data Source Definition .....................................................................................................309
Importing Alarms from ArchestrA .........................................................................................314
Importing Alarms from ArchestrA .....................................................................................314
ArchestrA Digital Definitions ................................................................................................318
ArchestrA Digital Definitions .............................................................................................318
ArchestrA Analog Definitions ...............................................................................................323
ArchestrA Analog Definitions............................................................................................323
ArchestrA Watchdog Timers ................................................................................................327
ArchestrA Watchdog Timers ............................................................................................327
FactoryTalk Alarms and Events ..............................................................................................331
Overview .............................................................................................................................331
Data Source Definition.........................................................................................................332
FactoryTalk Data Source Settings .......................................................................................333
Event Subscription ...........................................................................................................333
Connection Settings .........................................................................................................334
ix
WIN-911 V7.14
Alarm Filters ........................................................................................................................335
Filter Definitions ...............................................................................................................335
Filter Syntax .....................................................................................................................338
Watchdog Timer Definitions.................................................................................................339
Editing Watchdogs ...........................................................................................................339
Base Definition .................................................................................................................341
Alarm Conditions..............................................................................................................343
Sounds ............................................................................................................................345
RSView32 Direct Connect .......................................................................................................347
Overview .............................................................................................................................347
Data Source Definition.........................................................................................................349
Global Options.....................................................................................................................350
Import Source ......................................................................................................................352
Importing Alarms .................................................................................................................354
Alarm Filters ........................................................................................................................356
Base Definition .................................................................................................................356
Setup ...............................................................................................................................358
Tag Sound .......................................................................................................................360
Digital Sound ...................................................................................................................361
Analog Sound ..................................................................................................................362
Filter Definitions ...............................................................................................................363
Filter Syntax .....................................................................................................................364
Digital Definitions .................................................................................................................366
Digital Definition ...............................................................................................................366
Alarm Conditions..............................................................................................................368
Sounds ............................................................................................................................370
Changeable .....................................................................................................................371
Analog Definitions ...............................................................................................................372
Analog Definition ..............................................................................................................372
x
Table of Contents
Base Definition .................................................................................................................373
Conversion.......................................................................................................................374
Alarm Limits .....................................................................................................................375
Sounds ............................................................................................................................377
Changeable .....................................................................................................................378
Watchdog Definitions...........................................................................................................379
Watchdog Definition .........................................................................................................379
Base Definition .................................................................................................................381
Alarm Conditions..............................................................................................................382
Sounds ............................................................................................................................383
RSView SE Direct Connect .....................................................................................................385
Overview .............................................................................................................................385
WIN-911 Bridge Service ......................................................................................................387
Importing Alarms From RSView SE .....................................................................................388
Import Source ..................................................................................................................388
Importing Alarms ..............................................................................................................391
Global Options.....................................................................................................................393
Data Source Definition.........................................................................................................395
Digital Definitions .................................................................................................................397
Digital Definition ...............................................................................................................397
Base Definition .................................................................................................................398
Alarm Conditions..............................................................................................................399
Sounds ............................................................................................................................401
Changeable .....................................................................................................................402
Analog Definitions ...............................................................................................................403
Analog Definition ..............................................................................................................403
Base Definition .................................................................................................................405
Conversion.......................................................................................................................407
Alarm Limits .....................................................................................................................408
xi
WIN-911 V7.14
Sounds ............................................................................................................................410
Changeable .....................................................................................................................411
Watchdog Timer Definitions.................................................................................................412
Watchdog Timer Definition ...............................................................................................412
Base Definition .................................................................................................................414
Alarm Conditions..............................................................................................................415
Sounds ............................................................................................................................416
Troubleshooting ...................................................................................................................417
FIX Direct Connect ..................................................................................................................421
FIX Direct Connect Setup (Required) ..................................................................................421
FIX Direct Connect Demonstration ......................................................................................423
FIX Block Types ..................................................................................................................427
Import Source ......................................................................................................................429
Importing Tags ....................................................................................................................431
Global Options.....................................................................................................................433
Data Source Definition.........................................................................................................434
Digital Definitions .................................................................................................................435
Digital Definition ...............................................................................................................435
Base Definition .................................................................................................................436
Alarm Conditions..............................................................................................................437
Sounds ............................................................................................................................439
Changeable .....................................................................................................................440
Analog Definitions ...............................................................................................................441
Analog Definition ..............................................................................................................441
Base Definition .................................................................................................................442
Conversion.......................................................................................................................443
Alarm Limits .....................................................................................................................444
Sounds ............................................................................................................................446
Changeable .....................................................................................................................447
xii
Table of Contents
Watchdog Timer Definitions.................................................................................................448
Watchdog Timer Definition ...............................................................................................448
Base Definition .................................................................................................................450
Alarm Conditions..............................................................................................................451
Sounds ............................................................................................................................453
FIX Data Integrity Errors ......................................................................................................454
InTouch Direct Connect ..........................................................................................................455
Overview .............................................................................................................................455
InTouch Direct Connect Demonstration ...............................................................................456
Import Source ......................................................................................................................459
Import Database Tags .........................................................................................................460
Global Options.....................................................................................................................462
Data Source Definition.........................................................................................................463
Digital Definitions .................................................................................................................465
Digital Definition ...............................................................................................................465
Base Definition .................................................................................................................466
Alarm Conditions..............................................................................................................467
Sounds ............................................................................................................................469
Changeable .....................................................................................................................470
Analog Definitions ...............................................................................................................471
Analog Definition ..............................................................................................................471
Base Definition .................................................................................................................472
Conversion.......................................................................................................................473
Alarm Limits .....................................................................................................................475
Sounds ............................................................................................................................477
Changeable .....................................................................................................................478
Watchdog Timer Definitions.................................................................................................479
Watchdog Timer Definition ...............................................................................................479
Base Definition .................................................................................................................481
xiii
WIN-911 V7.14
Alarm Conditions..............................................................................................................482
Sounds ............................................................................................................................484
WIN-411 and the InTouch Direct Connect ...........................................................................485
OPC ........................................................................................................................................487
Overview .............................................................................................................................487
What is OPC?......................................................................................................................488
The OPC Conversation .......................................................................................................490
Preparing Your Computer and Network for OPC .................................................................491
Import Source ......................................................................................................................494
Importing Tags ....................................................................................................................496
Data Source Definition.........................................................................................................499
Demo of WIN-911 Capabilities ............................................................................................501
Creating a Demo OPC Server .............................................................................................502
Setting up the OPC Demo ...................................................................................................503
Exploring the WIN-911 Configurator ....................................................................................505
Running the OPC Demo ......................................................................................................507
Typical Example of WIN-911 Voice Dialout .........................................................................509
Typical Example of WIN-411 Inquiry....................................................................................511
For More Details ..................................................................................................................513
DDE ........................................................................................................................................515
Overview .............................................................................................................................515
What is DDE? ......................................................................................................................516
The DDE Conversation ........................................................................................................517
WIN-911 and Multiple DDE Servers ....................................................................................518
Quick Reference to SCADA DDE ........................................................................................519
DDE Connections with Wonderware's Drivers .....................................................................520
DDE Connections with GE's FIX Drivers..............................................................................522
Using NetDDE .....................................................................................................................527
Setting DDE Shares for NetDDE .........................................................................................528
xiv
Table of Contents
Data Source Definition.........................................................................................................529
Demo of WIN-911 Capabilities ............................................................................................531
Creating a Demo DDE Server .............................................................................................532
Exploring the WIN-911 Configurator ....................................................................................534
Running the DDE Demo ......................................................................................................535
Typical Example of WIN-911 Voice Dial-Out........................................................................537
Typical Example of WIN-411 Inquiry....................................................................................539
For More Details ..................................................................................................................541
viewLinc Direct Connect..........................................................................................................543
Getting Started with viewLinc ..............................................................................................543
Data Source ........................................................................................................................545
Data Source Definition .....................................................................................................545
Options ............................................................................................................................547
Alarm Filters ........................................................................................................................549
What is an Alarm Filter? ...................................................................................................549
Base Definition .................................................................................................................550
Filter Syntax .....................................................................................................................552
Setup ...............................................................................................................................554
Sounds ............................................................................................................................555
Watchdog Timers ................................................................................................................556
Editing Watchdogs ...........................................................................................................556
Base Definitions ...............................................................................................................557
Alarm Conditions..............................................................................................................558
Sounds ............................................................................................................................559
xv
Introduction
Getting Started
What is WIN-911?
WIN-911 is the most proven and advanced alarm notification software suite available for
the automation industry. Capable of using standard telephone lines, cellular networks and
Internet systems, WIN-911 can reach you wherever you are. After an alarm is detected
from your automated process, WIN-911 will notify a list of users about the alarm condition
with an SMS, e-mail, page or voice call. In addition to simple notification, WIN-911 allows
users to interact with your SCADA/HMI by accepting alarm acknowledgements and
requests for report data. WIN-911 interfaces with OPC DA, DDE servers as well as with
GE's iFIX, FactoryTalk View ME, FactoryTalk View A&E, RSView SE, RSView32,
Wonderware's InTouch or Archestra System Platform.
WIN-911 has three standard package offerings: Pro, Basic, and Lite. WIN-911 Lite allows
users to configure 24 digital alarms and notify users through a single notification method.
The Basic version allows users to send e-mails, pages and one-way text messages. It has
no limit on the number of configurable alarms and supports unlimited ME Direct Connect
alarms. WIN-911 Pro supports all of the features of the Basic version in addition to twoway text messages and voice calls. See the Standard Products section for details.
1
WIN-911 V7.14
What's New
Specter Instruments is pleased to introduce the following Additions to WIN-911:
2
•
FactoryTalk View ME Direct Connect
•
Mobile-911 View
•
911Heath
CopyShield Overview
Hardware Requirements
A system with at least a Pentium 4 processor running at 2.1 GHz and with 2 GB of
memory is recommended. A display resolution of 800x600 or greater is required. Your
system may require additional memory if other programs are to be run simultaneously.
One gigabyte of free disk space is required. Be aware that wave files require 11 to 44
kilobytes of storage per second of playtime.
The following operating systems are supported by our products.
Product
Windows
2003 SP1
Windows
2008
Windows
XP SP2
Windows
7
Windows
CE
WIN-911
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
WEB-911
Services
Yes
Yes
Yes*1
Yes
No
WEB-911
XTools
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Mobile911
Server
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
WIN-911
ME
Alarming
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
WIN-911
ME
Alarming
CE
No
No
No
No
Yes
1. XP Home is not supported.
Dial-out paging requires a dedicated data modem and phone line. Voice calls require
either a compatible TAPI modem or a Dialogic Telephonic Card and a dedicated analog
voice line. When doing paging and voice notifications on the same system, two dedicated
lines are strongly recommended. Failure to place each piece of hardware on a dedicated
line may delay or prevent notification.
SMS notification requires a compatible GSM or CDMA modem with a text messaging
plan.
If alarm history printing is desired, a dedicated printer port and printer are required. A
simple printer should suffice since no graphics are used. Specter Instruments
recommends that a dot matrix printer be used, or similar such device capable of printing a
"line-at-a-time" as opposed to one that requires an entire page be defined before it will
begin to print (such as lasers and ink-jets).
3
WIN-911 V7.14
Note: When the WIN-911 Alarm Printer owns a printer, no other task can access it. The
Alarm Printer does not use the Windows device drivers for printing; printing is done
through standard ASCII output. Other Printing tasks require a separate printer port and
printer.
WEB-911 XTools require Microsoft .NET 4.0 and Internet Information Services to be on
the WIN-911 server machine. Microsoft .NET 4.0 must be installed on all WEB-911
XTools client machines. See, “Installing WEB-911 Services.”
Mobile-911 Server requires Microsoft .NET 4.0 and may require Internet Information
Services if installing Mobile View. Mobile-911 Server is not required to be installed on the
same machine as WIN-911. Mobile-911 Server may also require an Internet connection.
4
CopyShield Overview
Software Maintenance and Support
Registered users are given a Software Maintenance and Support number when the
software is unlocked. This Software Maintenance number is required to receive
telephone and email support.
For telephone support call Specter Instruments at 512-326-1011 x3 or toll free in the US
and Canada at 1-800-331-8740 x3, and have your Software Maintenance number ready.
Support hours are Monday through Friday, 8:00 AM to 5:00 PM (GMT -06:00) Central
Time.
Telephone support, email support and relocks after the expiration of the support program
will require renewing your Software Maintenance agreement. Email support will be
directed through your Software Maintenance and Support page at:
www.specterinstruments.com menu option Support | Software Maintenance.
Installation guides, informational documentation, as well as solutions to common
problems can be found in the Knowledgebase under the Support menu option.
In addition to technical support, participants are entitled to software version upgrades as
they become available, relocks, as well as software newsletters with updates.
To renew your Software Maintenance and Support agreement call Specter Instruments
Sales at 512- 326-1011 x2 or toll free in the US and Canada at 1-800-331-8740 x2.
5
WIN-911 V7.14
Licensing Options
Standard Products
The WIN-911 software package can be licensed to any one of the three Standard
Products listed below. See the 'WIN-911 V7 Price Sheet' for details.
WIN-911/Basic
WIN-911 Alarm Software for 1-way alarm notification will allow you to:
•
Complement and enhance any Windows 7, Server 2008, XP, Server 2003, or 2000 compliant
application program by giving it alarm and reporting capabilities.
•
Notify personnel using e-mail, Paging and 1-way SMS.
•
Utilize the Windows multimedia capability to alert users of out-of-tolerance conditions.
•
Easily create both sound and visual messages and associate these with values found in your
HMI/SCADA package and/or Windows OPC and DDE.
•
Report alarms on screen with audio alert sounds (including speech) and through e-mail, pages,
and SMS messages.
•
Group and classify alarms (including priority levels), allowing different action responses as your
needs dictate.
•
Alert users if servers or source of data becomes disconnected or inoperable.
•
Sort and view alarm data by any field (date, priority, group, tag name, etc.) at runtime with the
Alarm Log Manager formatted alarm logger.
•
Alert HMI and/or other applications of WIN-911's operational status by serving a constantly
changing “heartbeat” via WIN-911's System Health Poke.
•
Alert HMI and/or other applications of WIN-911's paging modules operational status.
•
Supports the unlimited ME Direct Connect option.
WIN-911/PRO
WIN-911 Alarm Software for 1-way and 2-way alarm notification will also allow you to:
•
Notify and acknowledge alarms by telephone/voice dial-up.
•
Acknowledge alarms by replying with an SMS text message.
•
Modify existing WIN-911 configurations on the fly from a networked location.
•
Change the current state of WIN-911 from a networked location.
•
Offers professional sounding voices as an alternative to the standard Microsoft choices.
•
Inquire of other plant conditions using WIN-411 after WIN-911 has reported an out-of-tolerance
alarm.
•
Call the computer at any time from a touch-tone telephone to check on current operating
conditions.
•
Change any digital or analog value from a touch-tone telephone. (Changes are only possible if
the configuration allows.) The following security is available for selecting a point to change:
6
CopyShield Overview
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Special Access Code for changes per user.
Selection of a numeric password for each point to change.
High/Low limits for analog changes for individual points.
Confirmation of intended change of value prior to the actual change.
Watchdogs that can prevent access to reports on data source loss.
•
Supports state-of-the-art performance in voice technology for alarm and report annunciation.
Variable rate and pitch control allows fine-tuning of the audio to match exact user needs.
•
Supports the unlimited ME Direct Connect option.
WIN-911/L
WIN-911 Lite will allow you WIN-911 PRO functionality with the following restrictions:
•
Alarms can accommodate a total of 24 digital and unlimited watchdog alarms. Filter and Analog
alarms are not supported in Lite Mode.
•
User can select a single type of remote notification, such as: Voice Telephony, 2-way SMS,
Numeric or Alphanumeric pagers, Voice Pagers, or E-Mail.
•
Lite mode does not include WIN-411 reporting capability, but users can acknowledge alarms from
the voice telephony or the 2-way SMS connection.
•
The computer/voice telephony interface must be a TAPI Voice Modem.
•
Premium Voice is not included.
•
XTools are not supported.
7
WIN-911 V7.14
Feature Upgrades
The following Feature Upgrades may be purchased and licensed in addition to some of
the Standard Products. See the 'WIN-911 V7 Price Sheet' for details.
WIN-911/FT
WIN-911 FactoryTalk Alarm and Events Client offers a seamless connection to
FactoryTalk's Alarm & Event servers:
•
Subscribes to FactoryTalk Alarm and Events based on a user defined filter criteria.
•
Alarm properties and configuration are maintained at the PLC level, instead of in
WIN-911.
WIN-911/ME
WIN-911 ME Direct Connect offers a seamless connection to FactoryTalk View ME and
PanelView Plus CE.
•
Subscribes WIN-911 to WIN-911 ME Alarming Control ActiveX Object.
•
WIN=911 can be deployed on a local ME platform or on a remotely located
platform with network access to the ME platform.
•
Alarm properties are maintained at within ME Station level, instead of in WIN-911.
WIN-911/PV
WIN-911 Premium Voice offers both male and female professional sounding voices as an
alternative to the standard Microsoft choices:
•
The Premium Voice package includes three new text-to-speech engines: Cepstral
Diane, Cepstral David, and Cepstral Callie.
•
The Premium Voice package also allows the user to adjust the Rate and Pitch of
the premium voice.
•
SAPI 5.0 or SAPI 5.1 speech engine can be used with WIN-911's Text-to-Speech.
WEB-911 XTools
WEB-911 XTools is a suite of ActiveX controls that allow you to modify existing WIN-911
configurations on the fly including:
8
•
A networked solution to edit Contacts, Schedules, and Notification Methods by
leveraging Microsoft .NET and Internet Information Services.
•
A networked solution for switching WIN-911 between an Active and Standby state.
CopyShield Overview
•
The capability to install the XTools client in any ActiveX container, including most
SCADA nodes. The XTools client also supports Windows Vista and Windows
Server 2008.
Mobile-911 V2
Mobile-911v2 is a smart phone application that allows for powerful organization of multiple
alarm messages and provides a convenient way to acknowledge each alarm back to
WIN-911.
•
Mobile-911v2 is compatible with Apple iOS, Google Android and a version is
planned for Blackberry devices.
•
Mobile-911v2 pushes alarms to your mobile device over Apple’s Push Notification
service or Google’s Cloud to Device Messaging Service.
•
An Internet connection is required on both your Mobile-911 Server machine and
your mobile device.
•
MobileView displays alarms in an alarm summary accessed through a web
browser using a secure log in. This allows the user to access and acknowledge
alarms from anywhere that has an Internet connection.
9
WIN-911 V7.14
Installation
Installing WIN-911 V7
Insert the WIN-911 V7 Alarm Notification Software CD.
Select WIN-911.
Click, Next. If prompted to install .NET 4.0 follow the on screen instructions. Then
continue through the License Agreement and Customer Information.
10
CopyShield Overview
Select Typical to run the default installation. This will install to the default location
C:\Program Files\Specter Instruments\WIN-911 V7. The following program features will
be installed: WIN-911 V7, Tools, and Application Demos.
11
WIN-911 V7.14
Select *LITE* Mode to run the default installation with LITE mode limitations.
Select Custom to change any of the default installation settings, such as the WIN-911
install path.
Select Next, click Install, then Finish.
Note: WIN-911 V7 is fully functional for a 30-day DEMO period from the time of
installation. After the DEMO period expires WIN-911 must be licensed. See, 'WIN-911
Licensing and CopyShield Administration' for details.
12
CopyShield Overview
Installing WIN-911 Premium Voice
Insert the Cepstral Version 4.1.4 Premium Voice Install CD. This disk should be included
with your WIN-911 V7 package.
To install the voice for Callie, browse the CD and run the install named:
\Callie\Cepstral_Callie_windows_4.1.4.msi
To install the voice for David, browse the CD and run the install named:
\David\Cepstral_David_windows_4.1.4.msi
To install the voice for Diane, browse the CD and run the install named:
\Diane\Cepstral_Diane_windows_4.1.4.msi
Note: WIN-911 Premium Voices are operational during the DEMO period. After the WIN911 DEMO period expires the WIN-911 Premium Voices must be licensed. See, 'WIN-911
Feature Upgrade' for details.
13
WIN-911 V7.14
Installing WEB-911 Services
WEB-911 Services requires WIN-911 Version 7.13.00 to be installed first. It also requires
Internet Information Services (IIS) and Microsoft Framework .NET 4.0.
IIS must be installed prior to installing WEB-911 Services. IIS can be found in
Administrative Tools. If IIS is not installed, run the IIS install from Add or Remove
Programs -> Add/Remove Windows Components. The operating system install disk is
required to complete the IIS installation.
Microsoft Framework .NET 4.0, if installed, can be found in Add or Remove Programs. If
.NET 4.0 is not installed, WEB-911 Services will install it for you.
Insert the WIN-911 V7 Alarm Notification Software CD.
Select WEB-911 Services. If prompted to install .NET 4.0 follow the on screen
instructions.
14
CopyShield Overview
Click, Next. Continue through the License Agreement.
15
WIN-911 V7.14
Click Next to continue with the default path. Select Change… if you would like to use a
custom path, and then click Next.
Click Install, then Finish.
Note: WEB-911 Services will run in a 30-day DEMO period from the time it is installed.
After the WEB-911 Service DEMO period expires WEB-911 Services must be licensed.
See, 'WIN-911 Feature Upgrade' for details.
16
CopyShield Overview
Installing WEB-911 XTools Client
The WEB-911 XTools Client requires Microsoft Framework .NET 4.0. If installed, it can
be found in Add or Remove Programs. If .NET 4.0 Framework is not installed, WEB-911
XTools Client will direct you to the install
The WEB-911 XTools Client can be installed on any machine on the network. The
XTools controls can be inserted into any ActiveX container.
Insert the WIN-911 V7 Alarm Notification Software CD.
Select XTools Client. If prompted to install .NET 4.0 click Yes.
17
WIN-911 V7.14
Click Next. Continue through the License Agreement.
18
CopyShield Overview
Click Next to continue with the default path. Select Change… if you would like to use a
custom path, and then click Next.
Click Install.
The WEB-911 XTools Options window allows the user to configure the location of the
server. Click Save Changes and Exit to apply your changes. Then click Finish
Note: WEB-911 Services will run in a 30-day DEMO period from the time it is installed.
After the WEB-911 Service DEMO period expires WEB-911 Services must be licensed.
See, 'WIN-911 Feature Upgrade' for details.
19
WIN-911 V7.14
Installing Mobile-911
Mobile-911 requires Microsoft Framework .NET 4.0. If installed, it can be found in Add or
Remove Programs. If .NET 4.0 Framework is not installed, Mobile-911 will direct you to
the install. The Mobile-911 server also requires Internet Information Systems if the
MobileView option is selected to be installed.
The Mobile-911 Server can be installed either on the same machine as WIN-911 or
another machine with a networked connection to the WIN-911 computer. The Mobile-911
Server machine must have access to the internet. Setup instructions can be accessed
electronically after the Mobile-911 installation is complete.
Server setup instructions can also be found on our website: www.specterinstruments.com
under Support | Knowledgebase.
Select Mobile-911. If prompted to install .NET 4.0 follow the on screen instructions.
20
CopyShield Overview
Click, Next. Continue through the License Agreement.
21
WIN-911 V7.14
Click Next to continue with the Complete install. Select Custom if you would like to use
a custom path and or would like to disable the MobileView Server install. Then click Next.
The Mobile-911 View Server requires IIS. If you only plan to use the Mobile-911 smart
phone applications and do not want to install IIS, you must disable the Mobile-911 View
Server feature.
Click Next to continue with the selected features and custom path.
Click Install, then Finish.
Installing Mobile-911v2 on Apple iOS
Mobile-911 is available in Apple’s App Store for any iOS 4. and iOS 6 device. Download
and install the application directly from your Apple device. Future updates will be available
from the App Store as well.
Once installed, important setup information is included in the application’s help section
Installing Mobile-911v2 for Android
22
CopyShield Overview
Mobile-911 for Android is available for Android 2.2 and up. At the time of this writing, the
latest version of Android is 4.1. Because we cannot anticipate future changes in the OS,
we cannot guarantee that all future versions will be supported.
Mobile-911v2 requires Google Play and a touch screen.
Mobile-911v2 is available on Google Play. Future versions will be released through Play
as well.
Once installed, important setup information is included in the application’s help section.
23
WIN-911 V7.14
Upgrading WIN-911
Upgrading to a New Version
Any version upgrade from a previous version to the latest version of WIN-911 will require
a Software Maintenance Number to install. If you cannot locate your Software
Maintenance information, it is available online at www.specterinstruments.com or by
phone, fax, or e-mail. If you do not have a Software Maintenance Number contact Specter
Instruments at 512-326-1011 x2 or toll free in the US and Canada at 1-800-331-8740 x2.
Enter the Software Maintenance Number and click the Next button to upgrade the WIN911 version. Then the install will proceed.
Note: A version upgrade to 7.14.00 PRO from a 7.09 or older PRO or TEP version will
include new features such as Premium Voice and WEB-911 XTools. You will need to
obtain a new license file to actually enable those features during runtime. Email a new
license request file to [email protected] or call at 512-326-1011 or toll free
in the US and Canada at 1-800-331-8740 to obtain a new license file.
24
CopyShield Overview
Adding Feature Upgrades
Once your system has been licensed it can be upgraded to support more features
(perhaps by adding Telephony,Mobile-911 v2, FactoryTalk Alarm & Event, Premium
Voice, 2-way SMS Messaging, or even WEB-911 XTools) with a newer license. Start
Scan & Alarm with the Shift or Ctrl key depressed. This will cause the CopyShield
Administrator to appear. Contact Specter Instruments Sales Department at 512-326-1011
x2 or toll free in the US and Canada at 1-800-331-8740 x2, with the original CD Tracking
Number (and Purchase Order number or Credit Card) to retrieve a subsequent license to
enable more features for your WIN-911 system. The CD Tracking Number is viewable in
the WIN-911 Configurator | Help | About.
Note: A version upgrade to 7.14.00 PRO from a 7.09 or older PRO or TEP version will
include new features such as Premium Voice and WEB-911 XTools. Both the PRO and
BASIC license support unlimited ME Direct Connect but you will need to obtain a new
license file to actually enable this and the previously mentioned features during runtime.
Email a new license request file to [email protected] or call at 512-3261011 or toll free in the US and Canada at 1-800-331-8740 to obtain a new license file.
25
WIN-911 V7.14
WIN-911 Licensing and CopyShield Administration
Request a License
In order to receive your permanent license, WIN-911 must be registered with Specter
Instruments. Unlicensed installations will run under a 30 day demo period.
Requesting a License
The first time Scan & Alarm is started and until it is licensed the CopyShield Administrator
dialog appears. Click Request a License and complete the following form that will provide
Specter Instruments with the data necessary to generate a license file for your computer.
Click Request a License.
26
CopyShield Overview
Fill out the appropriate fields including the CD Tracking Number located on the install CD.
Click Next.
From the pull-down menu select the type of license you wish to request. A Permanent
license will remove restriction on running Scan & Alarm on this machine. Evaluation will
extend the demo to some point beyond the normal 30-day limit. Click Next.
27
WIN-911 V7.14
Enter the CD tracking number found on the CD in this text entry box. If you don’t have an
install CD, contact Specter Instruments for a CD tracking number. Note that a CD
Tracking Number is not required for an Evaluation extension, only a Permanent license.
Click Next.
From the pull-down menu, select the Machine ID for your license. Specter recommends
selecting the Hard Disk Drive since Windows creates virtual Network Adapters whose ID's
can change on a reboot. Click Next.
28
CopyShield Overview
The license file location is printed at the top of the window. Be sure to make note of it.
Click OK and email the *.CSR file to [email protected]
29
WIN-911 V7.14
Import a License
After receiving your license file via e-mail from Specter Instruments, copy the *.CSL file
into the C:\Program Files\Specter Instruments\WIN-911 V7\License folder.
Start WIN-911 Scan & Alarm so that the CopyShield Administrator splash screen
appears.
From the CopyShield Administrator click Install a License.
Click Import a License File.
30
CopyShield Overview
Select the license file and click Open.
Confirm that the license was properly installed, as indicated by the status field.
31
WIN-911 V7.14
32
CopyShield Overview
CopyShield Overview
The copyright on this software product is enforced by CopyShield, a node-locked software
licensing scheme. There are two types of licenses: Evaluation licenses and Permanent
licenses.
Evaluation Licenses
An evaluation license is valid on any machine for a specific range of dates. Before the
start date and after the end date, the license is expired. At the discretion of the software
publisher, an evaluation license can be automatically installed the first time the application
is launched. The set of product options enabled by an evaluation license is also at the
discretion of the software publisher. When an application is launched with an evaluation
license, the CopyShield Administrator dialog will be displayed as a reminder that you have
an evaluation license and to allow you to Request a License or Install a License. In
addition, once a day at midnight a CopyShield License Expiration dialog will be displayed
as a reminder of the number of days left before the evaluation license expires. If you allow
the evaluation license to expire, the application will be shut down and you will not be able
to launch it again until you have installed a new license.
Permanent Licenses
A permanent license is valid for a given set of product options on a specific machine. If
you install this product on another machine or require a different set of product options,
then you must obtain a new license. There is one exception to this rule: if an Ethernet
adapter is used to identify your machine, then this product, along with the license and
Ethernet adapter, can be installed on another machine. A permanent license never
expires.
33
WIN-911 V7.14
CopyShield Administrator
CopyShield Administrator
The CopyShield Administrator dialog displays and facilitates administration of your
software license. In addition to viewing your current license, you may Request a License,
Install a License, and launch the application.
Note: Once a permanent license has been installed, the Administrator dialog will not be
displayed automatically. Display of the Administrator dialog can be forced by holding the
Ctrl key down while launching the application. This procedure is required for making
modifications to an existing license, such as adding additional product options.
Fields and Controls
•
Product
The name of the licensed product. A product specifies the software application
and may include information which limits the versions of the application that are
licensed.
•
Publisher
The name of the company that publishes the software application.
•
Type
The type of license, either 'Evaluation' or 'Permanent'.
•
Status
The current status of your license. A permanent license will show a status of
'Permanent'. An active evaluation license will show a status of 'nn days left',
indicating the number of days until the license expires. An expired evaluation
license will show a status of 'Expired'. A corrupt or missing license will show a
status of 'Invalid'.
•
Start Date / End Date
For evaluation licenses, the range of dates for which the license is valid. Before
the start date and after the end date, an evaluation license is expired.
•
Unlock Code
This code is generated by the software publisher and is used to determine the
validity of the license.
•
Request a License
Used to Request a License.
•
34
Install a License
WIN-911 Overview
Used to Install a License.
•
Help
Displays this help screen.
•
Exit
Exits the license dialog without launching the application.
•
Launch Application
Exits the license dialog and (if the license is valid) launches the application.
35
WIN-911 V7.14
Request a License
Request a License
You must request a license in order to:
•
Extend an evaluation license
•
Obtain a permanent license
•
Move your application to a different machine (except when using an Ethernet
adapter as the machine identifier)
•
Upgrade to enable additional product options
Step by Step Instructions
36
•
From the CopyShield Administrator dialog, click the Request a License button.
•
The CopyShield Registration dialog will be displayed. It is important that the
registration information be as complete and accurate as possible to avoid delay in
issuing your new license. When you have entered and/or reviewed the registration
information, click the OK button.
•
A series of dialogs will be presented starting with the CopyShield License Type
dialog. These dialogs are presented in a wizard style that provides on screen
instructions. The exact sequence of dialogs is dependent on the type of license
selected. Use the Next and Previous buttons to navigate through the dialogs. Click
the Finish button to complete the license information.
•
The CopyShield License Request dialog will be presented giving instructions for
submitting a license request.
WIN-911 Overview
CopyShield Registration
The registration dialog displays and facilitates administration of your software registration.
This information will be included when you Request a License. The process of obtaining a
license will go more smoothly if this information is accurate and complete.
Fields and Controls
•
CD Tracking Number
Enter this number from your original software installation CD. If you have an
evaluation CD, either obtain a tracking number from the software publisher or
leave this field blank. For permanent licenses, this field determines which
application options are enabled.
•
End User Contact Name
The name of a person working for the company which owns the software. This is
the person who will be contacted with any license or application issues that may
arise.
•
End User Company Name
The name of the company which owns the software.
•
Street Address Line 1
Street Address Line 2
City
State/Province/Region
Zip/Postal Code
Country
The mailing address of the contact at the company which owns the software.
•
Phone Number
The phone number of the contact at the company which owns the software.
•
Cell Number
The cell number of the contact at the company which owns the software.
•
Email Address
The email address of the contact at the company which owns the software.
•
Preferred SCADA
Please select the SCADA system that WIN-911 will be receiving alarms from.
37
WIN-911 V7.14
CopyShield License Request
The License Request dialog provides instructions for submitting a license request. These
instructions are specified by the software publisher. Click the OK button to dismiss the
dialog.
Fields and Controls
•
OK
Dismiss the dialog.
38
WIN-911 Overview
Install a License
Install a License
Install a new software license. A license can be imported from a CopyShield License
(.CSL) file or installed manually. If you have a CSL file, you should import it. If you do not
have a CSL file, you must install manually. Note that attempting to install an invalid
license will cause the CopyShield Invalid License dialog to be presented and the current
license will remain in effect.
Installing from a CSL file
•
Put your CSL file in an accessible location. By default, the browser will search for CSL files in the
License folder of the application directory. This file must be obtained from the software publisher.
•
From the CopyShield Administrator dialog, click the Install a License button.
•
The CopyShield License Install dialog will be presented. Click the Import a License File button.
•
A file Open dialog will be presented. Browse to and select the new license file. When you have
finished your selection, click the Open button.
Installing Manually
•
Have your license information handy. This information must be obtained from the software
publisher.
•
From the CopyShield Administrator dialog, click the Install a License button.
•
The CopyShield License Install dialog will be presented. Click the Manually Install a License
button.
•
A series of dialogs will be presented starting with the CopyShield License Type dialog. These
dialogs will guide you through the installation process. The exact sequence of dialogs is
dependent on the type of license selected. Use the Next and Previous buttons to navigate
through the dialogs. Enter the license information provided by the software publisher. Click the
Finish button to complete the license specification.
•
The CopyShield License Unlock Code dialog will be presented. Enter the unlock code provided
by the software publisher and then click the OK button.
39
WIN-911 V7.14
CopyShield License Install
The License Install dialog facilitates importing a CSL license file or manually installing a
license. If you have a CSL file, click the Import a License File button, otherwise click the
Manually Install a License button.
Fields and Controls
•
Import a License File
Launches a file browser for selection of the CSL license file to import.
•
Manually Install a License
Launches a series of dialogs which guide you through the installation process.
40
WIN-911 Overview
CopyShield Invalid License
Displayed when attempting to install an invalid license. The current license will remain in
effect.
Fields and Controls
•
OK
Dismiss the dialog.
41
WIN-911 V7.14
CopyShield License Unlock Code
Enter a license unlock code when installing a license. This code can only be provided by
the software publisher and is used to validate your software license.
Fields and Controls
•
Unlock Code
Enter the 8 digit hexidecimal unlock code provided by the software publisher.
•
OK
Install the new license.
•
Cancel
Abort the license install and return to the CopyShield Administrator dialog.
42
WIN-911 Overview
CopyShield License Type
Select a license type when requesting or installing a license.
Fields and Controls
•
License Type
The default selection is Permanent.
Select Permanent if you own or intend to own the software and are installing the
license on the machine where it will be permanently located. A permanent license
is valid for a given set of product options and never expires.
Select Evaluation if you wish to obtain or extend an evaluation license. An
evaluation license is valid for a specific range of dates. Before the start date and
after the end date, the license is expired. The set of application options enabled by
an evaluation license is also at the discretion of the software publisher.
•
Cancel
Abort the license request/install and return to the CopyShield Administrator dialog.
•
Next
Advance to the next dialog in the request/install sequence.
Permanent licenses continue with the CopyShield License Options dialog.
Evaluation licenses continue with the CopyShield License Start End Dates dialog.
43
WIN-911 V7.14
CopyShield License Start End Dates
Select starting and ending dates when requesting or installing an evaluation license. An
evaluation license is valid for a specific range of dates.
Fields and Controls
•
Start Date
The default selection is the current date.
This is the first day that the evaluation license will be valid. Before this date the
evaluation license will be expired.
•
End Date
The default selection is 30 days from the current date.
This is the last day that the evaluation license will be valid. After this date the
evaluation license will be expired.
•
Previous
Return to the CopyShield License Type dialog.
•
Cancel
Abort the license request/install and return to the CopyShield Administrator dialog.
•
Finish
When requesting a license, advance to the CopyShield License Request dialog.
When installing a license, advance to the CopyShield License Unlock Code dialog.
44
WIN-911 Overview
CopyShield License Options
Enter product options when requesting or installing a permanent license. A permanent
license is valid for a specific set of product options. The software publisher defines the set
of valid option strings. The options are represented by the last 2 or 3 digits or characters
of the CD Tracking #.
Fields and Controls
•
CD Tracking Number
The default selection is the CD Tracking Number entered in the CopyShield
Registration dialog.
The CD Tracking Number can be found on your original software installation CD
and determines the product options that will be enabled.
If you have a demo CD or you are requesting additional product options, you must
obtain a CD Tracking Number from the software publisher.
•
Previous
Return to the CopyShield License Type dialog.
•
Cancel
Abort the license request/install and return to the CopyShield Administrator dialog.
•
Next
Advance to the CopyShield License Machine ID dialog.
45
WIN-911 V7.14
CopyShield License Machine ID
Select machine ID when requesting or installing a permanent license. The machine
identifier is either the MAC address of an installed Ethernet adapter or the serial number
of your hard disk drive. A permanent license is locked to a single machine based on this
value.
Fields and Controls
•
Machine ID
The default selection is the first Ethernet controller's MAC address, or the volume
ID of the hard disk drive if no Ethernet controllers are found.
It is highly recommended that you install and select the Hard Disk Drive prior to
requesting a permanent license. Note: Selecting the Hard Disk Drive will require a
new unlock code if you should have to reformat or replace your disk drive.
By selecting an Ethernet adapter, your license will be independent of the disk drive
from which the application is launched. This option is not recommended.
•
Previous
•
Return to the CopyShield License Options dialog.
•
Cancel
Abort the license request/install and return to the CopyShield Administrator dialog.
•
Finish
When requesting a license, advance to the CopyShield License Request dialog.
When installing a license, advance to the CopyShield License Unlock Code dialog.
46
WIN-911 Overview
CopyShield License Expiration
The license expiration dialog provides a daily reminder that the application is running
under an evaluation license and will soon expire.
Fields and Controls
Continue
Dismiss the dialog.
47
WIN-911 Overview
System Architecture
What is the Direct Connect?
The Direct Connect option provides a means of bypassing Windows DDE/OPC and
connecting directly to FIX®, Wonderware®, FactoryTalk View®, and RSView32®. Unlike
the DDE/OPC option (which is a generic data exchange medium), the Direct Connect is a
custom data source developed with the use of toolkits provided by the perspective HMI
developers. FIX/Wonderware InTouch/Wonderware Archestra//RSView32/RSView
SE//FactoryTalk View Alarm & Event/FactoryTalk ME/viewLinc users will find this option
time saving during configuration because WIN-911 does not require the re-entry of
redundant information. Instead, WIN-911 references much of the information required for
a configuration directly from the HMI. More importantly, the user will find this mode of
operation delivers superior performance in the following areas: 1) Speed of connection
and data point updates; 2) Data security and integrity; 3) Setpoints and alarm limits can
be changed dynamically at the source.
A configuration can be run in the Direct Connect mode exclusively or simultaneously with
DDE/OPC connections. It is important to note, however, that some of the terms
(Application, Topic, and Item name) are components of Microsoft's DDE or OPC
Foundation's OPC address nomenclature. In a Direct Connect Data Source, Application
and Topic Names are replaced with an invocation string that sets the mode of operation.
When a Direct Connect mode is selected, the appropriate strings are automatically
appended.
49
WIN-911 V7.14
System Components
Applications
WIN-911 is comprised of three applications used to configure, view history, and run Scan
& Alarm.
WIN-911 Configurator
The WIN-911 Configurator is a comprehensive, yet easy to use tool which will allow the
user to develop his WIN-91 application with confidence and efficiency. The result of the
configuration process is a configuration Microsoft database (*.MDB) and initialization file:
WIN-911.ini.
Scan & Alarm
The Scan & Alarm (TeleDAC.exe) module is the engine that connects the WIN-911
functions with the outside world. It is the OPC/DDE/Direct Connect Client connection that
performs logical functions such as: comparing current values with alarm limits or
conditions, keeping track of acknowledgments, and updating the alarm history log files. It
will read the *.MDB and WIN-911.ini file and automatically start or stop the associated
modules which are required for the application. In summary, Scan & Alarm:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Selects the modules required for the run-time application
Automatically starts each module selected in the proper sequence
Attaches to all OPC, DDE, and Direct Connect Servers
Bypasses and restores data points from the active callout list
Overrides and restores names from the contact lists
Shows and hides the Status Display for startup summary information
Monitors data points for alarm conditions
Automatically shuts down each module
The Scan & Alarm system can be started by the Run program, double clicking on the
TeleDAC.exe, Restart.exe, or using the Windows Startup program or a third party's
startup program. To shutdown Scan & Alarm, right-click on the thumbnail icon and leftclick Exit WIN-911 or run the Shutdown.exe applet. A confirmation-of-intent will appear
requiring the operator to select Exit before the program will shutdown.
Alarm Log Manager
50
Configurator Basics
The Alarm Log Manager can display archived alarming data, sort the data by any column
and append comments to individual events. To use this application, WIN-911 must be
configured with the Monthly MDB log file format.
51
WIN-911 V7.14
Service
WIN-911 as a Service
WIN-911 can run as a service under the local system account when launched by the
service wrapper. The service wrapper, or 911SRV, will launch WIN-911 automatically
when configured to do so in the Global Options\Initialization tab of the WIN-911
Configurator.
A few limitations include the following:
1. DDE data sources are not supported.
2. Network OPC is not supported (only local).
3. RSView SE Direct Connect data sources are not supported.
4. RSView32 Direct Connect data sources are not supported.
5. WIN-911 must be shutdown by the service control manager, shutdown.exe or
restart.exe
6. Bypass and override must be accessed through bypass.exe and override.exe
7. The Alarm Monitor Window and TeleDAC screen will not be displayed on
Windows Vista and above.
8. Desktop interaction must be enabled on 911SRV for the Alarm Monitor Window
and TeleDAC to be displayed.
52
Configurator Basics
Modules
WIN-911 is composed of a combination of the following modules which run independently
while working seamlessly together:
WIN911 Alarm Monitor
The WIN911 Alarm Monitor is optional and is only used when the user wishes to see a
visual display of either the entire history of alarms and errors, or just a summary of current
alarms. It is also required if the user needs the capability to acknowledge alarms by an
operator at the computer and send manual e-mail, SMS (via e-mail) and pages.
WIN911 Dialout Pager & WIN911 Local Dialout Pager
Two modules, WIN911 Dialout Pager and WIN911 Local Pager, are optional and started
when the user configures pager connections. They communicate with the Scan & Alarm
module and manage all paging activity. This includes managing pager connections and
their schedules.
WIN911 Dialout Pager processes alphanumeric and/or numeric paging that requires a
commercial paging service.
WIN911 Local Pager processes alphanumeric and/or numeric paging that connects
directly to a paging transmitter via a serial COM port and does not require a paging
service interface.
WIN911 Voice & WIN911 TAPI
Two modules, WIN911 Voice and WIN911 TAPI are optional and are only used when
voice connections (Voice, Voice Pager, and Dialout Announcer or 411 Reports) are
configured. Both communicate with the Scan & Alarm module and manage all voice dialout, dial-in, and call progress duties such as assembling the voice messages and
recognizing touch-tone security codes.
WIN911 Announcer
The WIN911 Announcer is optional and is only used when the user has selected the local
sound option. A computer sound card is required for this option and should not be
confused with the telephony card that is required for the voice functions.
53
WIN-911 V7.14
WIN911 Alarm Printer
The WIN911 Alarm Printer is optional and is only required when the user has selected the
alarm printer option. A local LPT port and dedicated printer are required.
WIN911 IP
The WIN911 IP is optional and is only required when the user has selected the IP option.
Either a RAS connection or IP Address must be defined.
WIN911 SMS
The WIN911 SMS is optional and only required when SMS connections have been
assigned to phonebook entries that have group assignments. It communicates with the
Scan & Alarm module and manages communications to cell devices via GSM modem.
WIN911 Alarm Logger
The WIN911 Alarm Logger is optional and only required when the user wishes to archive
an alarm group's events on a daily/monthly log of any alarm activity, error messages,
phone and pager activity, and diagnostic logging.
WIN911 E Mail
The WIN911 E Mail is optional and is only required when e-mail connections have been
assigned to phonebook entries that have group assignments. It communicates with the
Scan & Alarm module and manages communications to the SMTP/POP3 server.
Mobile-911
Mobile-911 is optional and is only required when Mobile-911 connections have been
assigned to phonebook entries. It communicates with the Mobile-911 Server to send
54
Configurator Basics
messages to applications running on smart devices such as cell phones or tablets. The
Mobile-911 Server also sends and receives messages to and from Mobile View.
55
WIN-911 V7.14
Applets
WIN-911 Version 7 includes six small application programs (applets) that interact with the
main Scan & Alarm executable to modify the program on the fly or shut it down altogether.
These can be used with scripting to better control WIN-911 from a SCADA application.
Standby
The Standby applet (yellow icon) acts in a global manner to disable all WIN-911
monitored data points from active callout consideration. This modifies the program
operation without having to shutdown Scan & Alarm to modify the configuration. Hence,
no loss of alarm coverage.
Warning: This applet can be configured not to require a user Ack code for execution. If
you do not wish to use this function please delete it to avoid unauthorized manipulation of
the alarm system.
Warning: If 911SRV.exe Service wrapper is controlling TeleDAC.exe, “Interact with
Desktop” must be enabled for the Standby applet to function.
Activate
The Activate applet (green icon) restores WIN-911 from Standby mode. Notifications for
unacknowledged alarms will be triggered when WIN-911 goes into active mode.
Warning: This applet can be configured not to require a user Ack code for execution. If
you do not wish to use this function please delete it to avoid unauthorized manipulation of
the alarm system.
Warning: If 911SRV.exe Service wrapper is controlling TeleDAC.exe, “Interact with
Desktop” must be enabled for the Activate applet to function.
Bypass
The Bypass applet (green and yellow icon) suppresses selected alarms from being
notified. This modifies the program operation without having to shutdown Scan & Alarm to
modify the configuration. Hence, no loss of alarm coverage.
Warning: This applet can be configured not to require a user Ack code for execution. If
you do not wish to use this function please delete it to avoid unauthorized manipulation of
the alarm system.
Warning: If 911SRV.exe Service wrapper is controlling TeleDAC.exe, “Interact with
Desktop” must be enabled for the Bypass applet to function.
56
Configurator Basics
Override
The Override applet (blue and yellow icon) suppresses selected individuals in a group
phone list from being called in the event of an alarm. This modifies the program operation
without having to shutdown Scan & Alarm to modify the configuration. Hence, no loss of
alarm coverage.
Warning: This applet can be configured not to require a user Ack code for execution. If
you do not wish to use this function please delete it to avoid unauthorized manipulation of
the alarm system.
Warning: If 911SRV.exe Service wrapper is controlling TeleDAC.exe, “Interact with
Desktop” must be enabled for the Override applet to function.
Shutdown
The Shutdown applet (red icon) allows other applications to shutdown Scan & Alarm so
that start/stop operations can be completely automated. By default, Scan & Alarm
requires confirmation before it will perform a shutdown, but this applet shuts down Scan &
Alarm in a single step.
Warning: This applet can be configured not to require a user Ack code for execution. If
you do not wish to use this function please delete it to avoid unauthorized manipulation of
the alarm system.
Warning: If 911SRV.exe Service wrapper is controlling TeleDAC.exe, “Interact with
Desktop” must be enabled for the Shutdown applet to function.
Restart
The Restart applet (red and green icon) allows the user to silently shutdown and restart
WIN-911 Scan & Alarm through the execution of a single applet. The shutdown and
restart (or start if Scan & Alarm is not running during execution) is "silent," meaning that it
occurs with minimal GUI activity. The only events that will be visible will occur as a result
of errors during the restart phase. Otherwise, the shutdown and restart cycle will be
invisible to the user.
Restart also has the ability to start Scan & Alarm with a particular configuration file. This
can be done by running a command line for Restart.exe. For example, /OPC Demo.mdb.
Note: The Restart applet will function even when Scan & Alarm is controlled by the
911SRV Service Wrapper.
57
WIN-911 V7.14
Warning: This applet can be configured not to require a user Ack code for execution. If
you do not wish to use this function please delete it to avoid unauthorized manipulation of
the alarm system.
58
Configurator Basics
Tools
WIN-911 Version 7 includes four applications that make managing the WIN-911 system
easy and intuitive
Product Component Versions
The Product Components Version is a valuable trouble-shooting device for determining
the version of every Specter software component and support software on the system.
This program is particularly useful when updating a system from a previous version. If
different versions of the components are co-mingled WIN-911 may not run properly.
DDE Client
The DDE Client is a tool for trouble shooting DDE servers. It can connect to a server, read
and write a DDE value. This tool can verify syntax, display current values, and determine
value format.
WIN-911 User File Backup/Restore
Backing up or restoring your WIN-911 system has never been easier with the WIN-911
User File Backup/Restore tool. With a click of the mouse all of the files needed to
preserve your configuration for backing up and/or reinstalling your WIN-911 software are
stored in the default location. The same program can both backup and restore usergenerated files with the two icons provided.
XP & Server 2003
C:\Documents and Settings\User Name\Local Settings\Temp\911
Windows 7 & Server 2008
C:\Users\User name\AppData\Local\Temp\911
The same program can both backup and restore user-generated files with the two icons
provided.
911Health
59
WIN-911 V7.14
The functionality of several WIN911 components is made verifiable through the use of the
911Heath program. The modules TeleDAC (Scan & Alarm), Mobile-911, WIN911 SMS,
and WIN911 IP each write a status message to the registry. 911Health reads the registry
message and serves it to an OPC Server that the user configures. These status
messages can be used to alert users and other programs of problems WIN-911 may
experiencing. Such problems include the operation and successful processing of
configured tasks for TeleDAC, Mobile-911, WIN911 SMS, and WIN911 IP.
60
Configurator Basics
Remote Alarm Notification
The Sound Clips
Note: WIN-911 provides two options for voice sources, Wave files pre-generated with
Text-to-Speech and/or human voice recording, or 2) Runtime Voice Synthesis. Those
using the Runtime Voice Synthesis do not need to manage sound files because there are
none. With this option all speech is generated during runtime as it is needed.
WIN-911 uses Microsoft's multimedia feature to offer sound to enhance your alarm
reporting needs. If you are not familiar with this capability, a review of the Windows
documentation is advisable. In Windows the Sound Recorder icon is generally found
under the "Accessories" folder. The "Help" information found here is usually all that is
needed for review. Text-to-Speech may also be used with the WIN-911 Configurator to
generate the "*.wav" files. Third party sound software tools are available which will allow
even more editing features.
In using voice to alert users of an alarm condition, WIN-911 has strived to conserve as
much disk space as possible, considering the large memory appetite of sound clips (*.wav
files.) The typical example of a verbal alarm message might be: "AREA 3," "The Oven
Temperature," "Is," "Above the High Limit." Each message within quotations is a
separately recorded sound clip.
The "Is" and "Was" sounds are used in most common alarm messages, although they can
be turned off. Continuing the above example: If the temperature decreased into the
normal range and the alarm was unacknowledged, the verbal message would be: "AREA
3," "The Oven Temperature," "Was," "Above the High Limit." Upon the operator
acknowledging the alarm via a telephone, the message would be: "AREA 3," "The Oven
Temperature," "Is," "Normal." If the alarm is acknowledged via the personal computer
keyboard, then the acknowledgment is silent. Using "Is" and "Was" as global sound clips
greatly reduces the need for additional custom messages.
The sound clips (*.wav files) furnished with this package are a sampling of miscellaneous
industrial sounds such as Bells, Sirens, Alert Horns, and Whistles. These sounds are
recorded in an 8-bit format. These .wav files are located on the install CD in
\Support\Sound Effects and must be manually copied into the C:\Program
Files\Specter Instruments\WIN-911 V7\Sound Files for use. It may be helpful at this
time to play back a sampling of these clips, to verify your sound card is operational and
the WIN-911/411 sound files are installed properly.
Note: Users of the Dialogic card and TAPI voice telephony can only play uniformly
formatted "*.WAV" files that conform to the following parameters: PCM, 11 kHz or 8 kHz
sample rate (one or the other but NOT both), 8 bit, and Mono. Check each of the existing
files with Sound Check and convert them as needed.
Note: Runtime Voice Synthesis does not play pre-recorded sound files that require format
management.
One of the strong benefits of the WIN-911/411 offering is the ability for you to customize
the alarm sounds to fit your exact application. Use of a microphone and the sound card
recording options are all that is necessary.
61
WIN-911 V7.14
Helpful Hints:
1. Don't try to record sound clips for your application until you are familiar with the
WIN-911/411 requirements. Use the demo clips furnished to learn.
2. Typically, you will have a "pause" or "dead space" at the beginning and at the
end of each sound clip. WIN-911/411 patches several clips together to form a
message, and the dead spaces will not allow a smooth speech pattern. To cure
this, use the sound recorder's edit features to cut out the dead space found at
both ends of the sound clip.
3. Using higher sample rates will use more disk space and use more system
resources, but it will offer better quality. The recommended setting is to use
"Telephone Quality" in Windows XP, Server 2003, and 2000.
4. Just as with the sound card, a higher quality microphone produces better sound
clips.
62
Configurator Basics
Sound Source
WIN-911 Version 7 infuses Text-to-Speech (TTS) technology for generating sound files
quickly and concisely. The TTS engine reads ASCII text strings and generates voice
messages to verbalize the contents of the string. Scan & Alarm gives the option to use
one of three sound sources to best fit his/her needs: Wave Files Only, Text To Speech
Wave Files, and Runtime Voice Synthesis.
Wave Files Only
When this option is selected, WIN-911's original and default mode of playing voice
announcements and telephony, Scan & Alarm uses only pre-recorded wave files. Wave
Files Only allows the user to use wave files created outside of WIN-911.
Text To Speech Wave Files
When this option is selected, TTS technology is invoked. It will be used by the
configurator to generate sound files for use by Scan & Alarm. This option provides the
developer with two ways to generate wave files. One way is automated and can be done
with the “Sound Build” button or is part of the Configurator shutdown. The other is
manually, using the “Convert Text to Wave” dialog.
Runtime Voice Synthesis
When this option is selected TTS technology is invoked at runtime. It can be used directly
by Scan & Alarm to generate the speech as it is needed without the requirement of sound
files.
63
WIN-911 V7.14
Hardware
Pager Modem Selection
A data modem is necessary to use the pager option of WIN-911. Due to the current state
of typical pager services, most modem connections are still at 1200 or 2400 baud. Any
Hayes compatible modem capable of operating at the baud rate of your pager service will
be sufficient. If a higher speed modem is used, an appropriate setup may be needed to
facilitate communications at lower baud rates.
Note: As a general rule, the more complex the modem, the more difficult the modem
setup may become!
Note: The data modem used for paging is separate hardware from either the TAPI
modem or Dialogic card that will perform your voice calls. Paging and voice functions are
independent of each other and require separate phone lines and hardware.
64
Configurator Basics
Voice Dialout Card Selection
A special Microsoft compatible card capable of playing voice messages over the
telephone line is needed for the voice dial-out and dial-in options to function. There are
two hardware options for conducting telephony calls: 1) any TAPI compliant modem
capable of passing the TAPI Compatibility Tester (Windows XP, Server 2003, and 2000)
or, 2) a Dialogic Telephonic card (Windows XP, Server 2003, and 2000). Refer to
www.specterinstruments.com -> Support -> Knowledgebase -> Dialogic Card Installation 060001, for details about the Dialogic voice board.
Voice Telephony Option One: TAPI
This option requires a TAPI voice modem and driver. To ensure the modem in the target
system is TAPI compliant, please run the TAPI Compatibility Tester located in the WIN911 Tools startup. For a list of recommended modems see, www.specterinstruments.com
-> Support -> Knowledgebase -> Recommended Voice Modem List - 060014.
Note: Some TAPI modems may require a sound device.
Voice Telephony Option Two: Dialogic
This option requires a Dialogic card and Dialogic software. For information on the Dialogic
cards, see www.specterinstruments.com -> Support -> Knowledgebase -> Dialogic Card
Information Sheet - 080002.
65
WIN-911 V7.14
Sound Card Selection
WIN-911 is designed to support standard, commercially available sound cards, which are
made to support Microsoft Windows XP, Server 2003, and 2000 multimedia functionality.
All Sound Blaster® compatible sound cards are provided with Windows drivers. Higher
quality cards will produce better quality sounds and tend to give you better performance in
harsh industrial environments.
Note: If you are using the Telephone Dial-Out option, you must adhere to specific sound
file formats. See, 'Playing with Sound' for details.
WIN-911 uses a sound card/chipset to perform "Local Audio" annunciation as well as
previewing speech during development. If local sounds are not required, the sound card is
not needed in the runtime mode.
66
Configurator Basics
Notification Methods
Voice
Voice
This option requires a voice card. Alarms will be dialed out to a telephone number. When
the line is answered, WIN-911 will ask for the contact's Access Code. Once a valid
Access Code has been entered, WIN-911 will announce the current alarms with the
option to repeat if necessary. When the contact continues, WIN-911 will then ask for an
Acknowledgement Code. Finally, when the correct Acknowledgment Code is received, the
current alarms will be acknowledged and the line will be placed on hook.
Voice Pager
This option requires a voice card. Alarms will be dialed out to a telephone number. When
the line is answered, WIN-911 will announce the current alarms and hang up.
Dialout Announcer
This option requires a voice card. Alarms will be dialed out to a telephone number or
intercom extension, then the alarms will be announced and the line placed back on hook.
This connection type differs from the Voice Pager in that it does not require a dial tone or
answer indication before alarms will be announced. It is designed for use with internal
phone systems' public address extensions that do not provide a standard answer
indication like a ring cadence break or voice menu.
67
WIN-911 V7.14
Pager
Dial-out Alphanumeric
The pager option is designed to work with all alphanumeric pager units such as the units
manufactured by NEC and Motorola. These units are typically capable of displaying 2 to 4
lines of 20 characters each. WIN-911's maximum message size is 199 characters.
A pager service is required that supports the TAP protocol, or private pager hardware that
will allow messages to be sent via a personal computer. Examples of such service
providers are Metrocall Corporation, Arch Wireless, or Motorola's People Finder. WIN-911
supports alphanumeric pager services through Motorola's TAP protocol (Telocator
Alphanumeric Protocol). The standard TAP protocol, as implemented in the United States
specifies communication parameters of seven bit ASCII with even parity. If the pager
service or paging equipment does not support the TAP protocol, the WIN-911
alphanumeric paging option may require special setup.
Dial-out Numeric
Any standard numeric pager, which requires a phone number to be called, and then a
numeric message keyed on any touch-tone telephone, will work.
Local Alpha and Numeric
WIN-911 supports local alphanumeric and numeric pagers via serial port connection to a
transmitter. Pages are processed using the TAP or COMP2 protocols.
WIN-911 supports alphanumeric pager hardware through Motorola's TAP (Telocator
Alphanumeric Protocol) and COMP2 protocol. Only one protocol can be selected for use.
If the default TAP protocol is selected, the communication parameters are specified by
default to be 7 data bits, even parity, and one stop bit. If COMP2 is selected the
parameters are specified to be 8 data bits, even parity, and one stop bit.
Note: Numeric pagers are a class of pager manufactured by various vendors and capable
of displaying up to 20 digits. This type of pager will not support alpha characters in its
message stream.
68
Configurator Basics
SMS
The SMS option requires a GSM modem with an active cellular account. The user is
responsible for activating the modem with a GSM wireless service provider. An unlimited
SMS messaging plan is recommended. Some SMS messaging features will need to be
licensed. The WIN-911/Basic package will support 1-way SMS alarm messages as well
as status checks sent via SMS. The WIN-911/Pro package supports everything the WIN911/Basic package does and also includes 2-way messaging. The 2-way messaging
feature gives the user the ability to acknowledge an alarm with a specifically formatted
SMS message. The acknowledgement criteria, health status criteria, and the alarm
request criteria are discussed below. For information explaining SMS message
configuration and formatting see the SMS Definition section under WIN-911 Global
Menus.
Note: The SMS option is only compatible with GSM and CDMA modems and their
networks. For a list of recommended modems see, www.specterinstruments.com ->
Support -> Knowledgebase -> Recommended GSM Modem List - 080007.
Acknowledgement Message
WIN-911 can be licensed to accept incoming acknowledgement message. This allows
users to singularly ack alarm message via SMS. In order for WIN-911 to understand and
accept the alarm acknowledgement, the sender and the message must meet a few
requirements:
•
The sender's phone number must be configured in the 'Phone Book' with an 'SMS'
connection.
•
The sender's name must be in the 'Selected Name List' in the Group for that
particular alarm.
•
The first 6 characters of the acknowledgement message MUST be the 'ticket
number' associated with that alarm. The 'ticket number' is the 6-digit number found
at the beginning of the SMS alarm message.
•
The numeric 'Ack' code must be the last characters in the message. An 'Ack" code
can be anywhere from 1-15 digits.
•
The 'Ack' code and the phone number configured in WIN-911 must match the 'Ack'
code sent in the SMS acknowledgement message and the phone number it was
sent from must match the 'Ack' code and phone number configured in the 'Phone
Book' in WIN-911.
Note: Some users may be able to use the Reply or Forward function to automatically
enter the 6-digit ticket number. This would then only require the user to enter in their
acknowledgement code at the end of the message. Make sure when using Reply or
Forward that no extra characters are placed in front of the alarm message (e.g. RE: or
FW:). Once the acknowledgement is received and accepted by WIN-911 all contacts in
the Group's 'Selected Name List' for that alarm should receive a confirmation that the
alarm has been acknowledged. If WIN-911 rejects the acknowledgement, the user who
sent the acknowledgement should receive a failed acknowledgement message back.
69
WIN-911 V7.14
Health Status Message
The 'Health Status' message feature allows all configured SMS users to check the health
of WIN-911 by simply sending the required message. This feature is supported by both 1way and 2-way SMS licenses. In order for WIN-911 to understand and accept the 'Health
Status' message, the sender and the message must meet a few requirements:
•
The sender's phone number must be configured in the 'Phone Book' with an 'SMS'
connection.
•
The sender's name must be in a 'Selected Name List' for at least one Group.
•
The SMS message needs to have the text STATUS and only the text STATUS in
the message. This string is not case sensitive.
Once the status message is received WIN-911 will reply back to the sender with the
message OK if WIN-911 is running or STANDBY if WIN-911 is in Standby mode. WIN911 will reply with the message INVALID/MANUAL SMS RECEIVED if the sender did not
send the proper message. No response, may be a result of one or more of the following:
•
The sender did not meet the required criteria listed above.
•
The computer is not running or is non-responsive.
•
GSM modem is not functioning properly.
•
The GSM cellular network is not functioning properly.
•
WIN-911 is not running.
•
The SMS DLL is not functioning properly.
Alarm Request Message
The 'Alarm Request' message allows all configured SMS users to request alarm
information at any given time. This feature is ONLY supported with a 2-way SMS license.
In order for WIN-911 to understand and accept the 'Alarm Request', the sender and the
message must meet a few requirements:
70
•
The sender's phone number must be configured in the 'Phone Book' with an 'SMS'
connection.
•
The sender's name must be in a 'Selected Name List' for at least one Group.
•
The SMS message needs to only contain one of the following text strings:
•
REQUEST ACTIVE ACKED
•
REQUEST ACTIVE UNACKED
•
REQUEST INACTIVE UNACKED
•
REQUEST UNACKED
•
REQUESTACTIVE
Configurator Basics
•
REQUEST ALL
Once the request message is received and all three criteria are met, WIN-911 will reply
back to the sender with one SMS message per alarm that meets the request.
If no response is received, there may not be alarm messages that meet the request. To
confirm WIN-911 is still healthy send a Health Status message (described in the previous
section).
If WIN-911 replies with the message INVALID/MANUAL SMS RECEIVED then the sender
did not send one of the six messages described above. Double check the sent text for
errors.
If WIN-911 replies with the message EVENT REQUEST REJECTED PER LICENSE then
the sender met all the criteria described above, but the sender is not licensed for 2-way
SMS messaging.
71
WIN-911 V7.14
E-Mail
The e-mail option requires an e-mail account and connection via a LAN (or WAN)
connection. Messages can be sent directly to the account of a recipient or to a paging
company that will in turn send a page or fax.
Note: In an effort to reduce the number of phone lines WIN-911 needs to accomplish its
alarm notification, users who wish to implement both dialout paging and e-mail should use
their e-mail account to deliver messages to the page provider or be sure the e-mail
connection is via LAN/WAN.
72
Configurator Basics
IP
The WIN-911 IP connection is designed to send alarm messages over a network through
a TCP socket. It is compatible with RAS and Ethernet connections. In order to utilize this
feature, users must develop their own application to accept alarm messages and handle
them accordingly. The user's application can also monitor health status information that
WIN-911 stores in the registry. The WIN-911 IP connection adds a tremendous amount of
extensibility to WIN-911.
Alarm Messages
Alarm messages are sent through the IP connection on a per group basis. To enable IP
for a group, open a group definition and select Send alarms to IP. With this option
selected, all alarms in the selected group will be sent through the IP feature to a remote
computer.
When an alarm is received, it is sent as an ASCII string through the TCP port specified in
your WIN-911 IP settings. This connection can be made through RAS, LAN or WAN. If
utilizing a RAS connection, you must specify the name of the RAS connection you have
set up in Windows. If you are using a LAN or WAN, then you must configure WIN-911
with the remote computer's IP address. For reliability, configure all remote computers as
well as the local computer with static IP addresses. If you must use DHCP, reserve an IP
address for each machine. WIN-911 cannot resolve hostnames with WINS or DNS.
The beauty of the WIN-911 IP connection is that it is highly configurable. When an alarm
is received it is formatted and then sent over the network as ASCII text. Each message
starts with a configurable message prefix and ends with a configurable suffix. The
contents of the message can contain any number of fields. These fields may be labeled
with their field names and are also delimited by a user defined delimiter. When developing
your application, determine which fields are required and use the message format settings
to properly parse alarms.
73
WIN-911 V7.14
Acknowledgements/Expected Responses
Once an alarm message is sent, WIN-911 can be configured to await a response from the
remote computer to confirm that the message was delivered. WIN-911 can also
acknowledge alarms based on whether or not the Expected Response was received.
Primary/Secondary Remote Computers
The WIN-911 IP connection has redundancy features built into it. In addition to a primary
remote machine, you may configure a secondary remote machine. When a configurable
amount of failures has been reached, WIN-911 will attempt to use the secondary
connection. A failure constitutes a failure to establish a TCP socket connection or other
type of failure associated with TCP. Also, if you've enabled WIN-911 to wait for an
Expected Response, then a failure occurs when that response is not received for an
alarm. Once WIN-911 fails over to the secondary connection, it will send alarms to that
secondary connection until the connection is closed. When a new connection is
attempted, WIN-911 will first attempt the primary remote computer.
Health Status
Health status information can be monitored by the user's application to monitor the health
of both WIN-911 and the hardware being used to send alarm messages via IP. Two
values need to be monitored and compared in the registry to understand the current
health of WIN-911:
•
HKLM\SOFTWARE\Specter Instruments\WIN911 IP\Health
•
HKLM\SOFTWARE\Specter Instruments\WIN911 IP\Time
Health stores the most current state of WIN-911. Time stores the time stamp of the most
current state stored in the Health. The Health value should be updated approximately
once a second. If the Time value is more than a few seconds old, the application should
assume the Health value is bad. The three possible Health values and the format for the
Time value are described below:
Health:
•
OK - Healthy. WIN-911 and its hardware is functioning properly.
•
FAIL - All message attempts have failed for a particular alarm. This included
attempts made to the secondary remote machine if configured.
•
STOP - The WIN911 IP DLL has been stopped by the shutdown of WIN-911.
•
YEAR:DAYOFYEAR:HOUR:MINUTE:SECOND - For example:,
2009:033:14:30:25 (Feb 2, 2009 2:30:25 PM GMT)
Time:
74
Configurator Basics
Data Poke
The ASCII OPC/DDE Poke feature is an easy to use function enabling the WIN-911
software modules to be integrated into other Microsoft Windows application programs.
This standard option will allow the TEXT Alarm Messages to be displayed within other
programs, and it will allow these programs to "Acknowledge" the WIN-911 alarms. Pager
and voice operational status can be monitored by other programs through the use of the
Pager, Voice, and System Health. An example of the Pager Health poke might include a
situation where a digital OPC/DDE tag belonging to an HMI package is poked a zero (0)
when the pager applet is functional. If the modem stops responding, a failure is generated
and a digital one (1) is poked, replacing the zero and indicating the loss of functionality.
75
Configurator Basics
The WIN-911 Configuration Window
In the WIN-911 folder, or in the Start Menu, click the WIN-911 Configurator icon. The
WIN-911 Configurator window now appears, ready for you to begin work. This is the
configuration utility for both WIN-911 and WIN-411 options. Note the WIN-911
Configurator saves the position when the program is exited and will return to the last
saved position when it is re-selected.
Note: Double quotes (“) are illegal characters and are not to be used in any WIN-911
configuration.
The WIN-911 Configurator Window consists of several distinct areas: Title Bar, Menu Bar,
Toolbars, and the Status area.
The Title Bar displays the configuration name, Min/Max, and exit controls only.
The Menu Bar provides access to the various configuration menus from the mouse or
keyboard. The Mode menu provides toggling between special modes of operation. The
Global menu provides configuration options for items that are global to the system. The
Configure menu provides configuration options that are specific to a single configuration.
The Tools menu provides miscellaneous development and security aids. The Help menu
provides help access.
The Tool Bars present the menu options as graphic buttons for easy access. Buttons are
grouped in the same order as the menu commands for intuitive use. Note: Some controls
are not supported with all data sources. This will be depicted by a control being disabled
or a message box when clicked.
A text description of the button will appear as the mouse cursor is parked over the button
of interest.
The WIN-911 configuration utility is a true Windows based application. It follows the
Microsoft Windows conventions for getting around the screen and working with windows,
menus, dialog boxes, and the Windows Clipboard. Refer to your Microsoft Windows
documentation for an explanation of Windows basics.
77
WIN-911 V7.14
Common Dialog Boxes
During configuration, you will be using some custom WIN-911 dialog boxes. The dialog
boxes are designed to be consistent in entries and formats. Many of these dialog boxes
will appear to be almost identical other than the content. Generally, the first dialog box is
the summary listing of the subject button selected. The title bar identifies the dialog
summary with a numeric indication of the total number of listings and the specific listing
highlighted. If more items are listed than can be shown in the space selected, a vertical
slider bar will appear to the right of the dialog box
.
At the bottom of the above form, you will notice several selection buttons:
OK
The OK button is the only way to exit WIN-911 dialog list forms. It returns you to the last
WIN-911 dialog form or main Window.
New
Clicking the New button will bring up a blank configuration dialog form for a fresh entry.
Copy
The use of the Copy button is a great time saver if you are configuring several similar
users, groups, or alarms/points. Select (highlight) the item with the cursor, and then select
Copy. An exact copy is made of the selected configuration item. Make just the changes
necessary to the copy, and save by selecting the OK button.
Delete
Highlight an item in the list and click Delete to remove it from the list.
Edit
Highlight an item in the list an click Edit to make changes. Alternatively, you may also
double click an item to modify it.
78
Configurator Menu
Definition Dialog Boxes
Once you have selected from the summary list box (either to edit an existing definition or
to create a new definition), the definition dialog box will appear. The following example is
a common definition dialog box. The box shows all currently defined entries and a variety
of tabs.
Selection Tabs
If the definition dialog box has multiple options, or configuration steps, they may be
accessed by selection tabs located across the top of the dialog box.
Check Boxes or List Boxes
Configuring a WIN-911 application is a combination of selecting options and entering text
messages for each alarm. Most of the choices are made with simple check boxes, radio
buttons, or pull down list boxes.
79
WIN-911 V7.14
Sound Button
Sound Button
The sounds used throughout the system are selected through a common sound dialog
box. The only way to get to the “Select Sound File” or the "Save Runtime Text String" is to
select the sound buttons found throughout the WIN-911 Configurator. Such a button is
shown below:
The Green arrow at the right of the sound button is a "preview speech" play-button that
will play the sound that will be used for that section of the audio message.
80
Configurator Menu
Save Runtime Text String
Runtime Voice Synthesis users need to specify the text that will be read to synthesize the
speech used during a telephony call or local annunciation. Clicking the sound button will
present the Save Runtime Text String dialog
.
Disable
The “Disable Sound”button is used to select silence instead of a sound. It will return a
blank to the sound selection button.
Preview
If a sound card is installed the “Preview”button will cause the system to output the text-tospeech sound. This can be useful when you are uncertain which annunciation is
appropriate.
OK
The "OK" button return you to the previous configuration step and the Sound Selection
button will show the text that will be verbalized
.
Cancel
The “Cancel”button will exit from the dialog box without saving any of the changes.
81
WIN-911 V7.14
Convert Text to Wave File
If you are not using Runtime Voice Synthesis then the voice messages are pieced
together from a selection of pre-existing sound files which are maintained in the Sound
Files sub-folder of your WIN-911 V7 folder. Clicking on one of these buttons will bring you
to the “Select Sound File”list box.
From the Select Sound File list box highlight the desired sound file or click New to create
the desired sound file.
File List Box
This box shows all of the “*.WAV” files in the defined sound directory. The selection of the
WIN-911 sound directory is found in the Global selections. If there are more files than the
display area can show, a scroll bar will appear. The dialog box is exited by either: Double
clicking on the desired sound file, or Selecting the “Disable Sound” or the “OK” Button.
Disable
The “Disable Sound” button is used to select silence instead of a sound. It will return a
blank to the sound selection button.
New
The “New” will create a new sound file and associate that sound with this segment of the
message string. The dialog box listed below will allow you to name the file, enter the text
of the file to be converted and select the voice with which the file is to be created.
Note: Text to Speech must be both installed and enabled to use this feature.
Test
If “Wave Files Only” or "Text To Speech Wave Files" within Common Sounds, Controls is
enabled, this button allows the selected “*.wav” file to be tested for compatibility with WIN911.
Preview
82
Configurator Menu
If a sound card is installed the “Preview” button will cause the system to output the
selected sound. This can be useful when you are uncertain which file is appropriate when
two or more filenames are similar.
OK
The “OK” button will select the highlighted sound file for the selected sound button which
is being defined. This action will return you to the previous configuration step and the
sound selection button will show the name of the sound file just selected.
Cancel
The “Cancel” button will exit from the dialog box without saving any of the changes.
83
WIN-911 V7.14
Edit Wave File Dialog
The Convert Text To Wave File dialog is accessed by clicking the New button on the
Select Sound File dialog.
Disable
The “Disable Sound” button is used to select silence instead of a sound. It will return a
blank to the sound selection button.
Preview
If a sound card is installed the “Preview” button will cause the system to output the
selected sound. This can be useful when you are uncertain which file is appropriate when
two or more filenames are similar.
OK
The “OK” button will close the text box, ending the text string edit. This action will return
you to the previous configuration step and the Sound Selection button will show you the
name of the sound file created.
Cancel
The “Cancel”button will exit from the dialog box without saving any of the changes.
84
Configurator Menu
File
The File menu contains a set of commands that are used for creating, opening, and
saving configurations. Access to the configuration file is made through filenames that
have an extension of "*.MDB". The global configuration information is saved in unique
".MDB" files and the "WIN-911.ini" file which will be used by all WIN-911 programs.
This pull-down menu also contains the WIN-911 Printer Configuration which is used to
specify a local or shared network printer and its properties. This printer is to be used by
the configurator to print out the users configuration (*.MDB) file as well as the global
settings from the "WIN-911.ini" file. This is not to be confused with the alarm printer,
which is not shared with a network or Windows, but slaved to the local system on which
WIN-911 is installed.
New
Use this command to create a new WIN-911 configuration for alarming and reporting. No
dialog box is brought up when this is selected.
Note: If the current changes have not been saved when you attempt to create a new
configuration or attempt to exit the Configurator, a dialog box will pop up and ask if you
want to save the changes.
Open
Use this command to open an existing configuration for editing. This uses the common
open file dialog box as shown below.
Note: If the current changes have not been saved when you attempt to open another
configuration, a dialog box will pop up and ask if you want to save the changes.
85
WIN-911 V7.14
Select the directory in the "Look In:" pull down. Select the desired .MDB file by clicking on
it. The selected file should be indicated in the "File Name" list box. Clicking on "Open" will
start up the Configuration Utility with the selected "*.MDB" database.
Import
WIN-911 Import function makes the configuration process fast and easy. FIX, OPC,
RSView SE, RSView32, Wonderware InTouch, and ME Direct Connect users can use this
tool to browse large databases, custom select data or alarms to monitor and import it into
a WIN-911 configuration.
Note: If you do not want to import more data sources and tags into your currently open
configuration, be sure to select "File" and "New" from the menu to create a configuration
that only contains data from the import.
Special Note for Lite Mode Users: Block import is disabled. The Lite Mode User may only
select one tag at a time during import.
86
Global Menus
Save
Use this command to save the currently loaded configuration under the existing file name.
No dialog box will pop up when this option is selected. Note: To see the name of the
current "*.MDB" file configuration, look at the title bar of the window or go to "Options"
button and the "Paths" tab.
Save As
Use this command to save the currently loaded configuration under a new name.
Print
Use this command to invoke a dialog box which provides the user with the option of
printing the current configuration ("*.MDB") file and the global settings contained in the
"WIN-911.ini" file.
Use the Print Item Selection dialog to select the fields of interest then click OK.
Note: In Lite mode Analogs and Reports will not be selectable.
87
WIN-911 V7.14
This dialog box allows the user to select the appropriate network printer, Properties, Print
Range, and number of copies.
Note: This printer should be a local or shared network printer and not be confused with
the optional alarm printer which is not shared on a network or the operating system.
Exit
Use this command to exit from the WIN-911 Configurator.
Note: If the current changes have not been saved when you attempt to exit, a dialog box
will pop up and ask if you want to save the changes.
88
Global Menus
Mode
The "Mode " menu contains a set of options - Lite and Audit Modifications.
Validate Lite Mode
This button verifies that the current configuration is valid for Lite mode and returns a list of
issues that must be modified if it is not.
WIN-911 Lite is a mode of operation which allows you the standard WIN-911 functionality
with the following restrictions:
•
Alarms can accommodate a total of 24 digital and unlimited watchdog alarms. Analog and Filter
alarms are not supported in Lite Mode.
•
User can select a single type of dial-out connection, such as: Voice Telephony, Numeric or
Alphanumeric Pagers, Voice Pagers, E-Mail, or SMS.
•
Lite mode does not include WIN-411 reporting capability, but users can acknowledge alarms from
the voice telephony connection.
•
The computer/voice telephony interface must be a TAPI Voice Modem.
Audit Modifications
All modifications made to the WIN-911 Configuration and WIN-911.ini files are archived in
text files located in the same folder as the log files. These files are in a daily text file
format and are titled CYYDAY, where YY is the last two digits of the year and DAY is the
three digit Julian day of the year. For example May 9, 2005 would be C05129.txt.
89
WIN-911 V7.14
The Configure menu defines the specific configuration information for a single application
(either WIN-911 or WIN-411). This configuration information is stored in the "*.MDB" file.
For details on each one of the Configure settings see, WIN-911 Configuration. For details
on Report Definitions settings see, WIN-411 Configuration.
Schedule Definitions
The Schedule Definition allows the user to view and configure duty schedules.
Phone Book Definitions
The Phone Book Definition allows the user to view and configure contacts. It also allows
the user to assign access and acknowledge codes, connections, and duty schedules.
Data Source Definitions
The Data Source Definition allows the user to view and configure a data source
connection.
Group Definitions
Group Definitions allows the user to build Groups. Groups are used to associate
information with a specific set of contacts.
Filter Definitions
Filter Definitions allows the user to configure all filter points. Filter tags are different from
statically configured tags in that no import is necessary. Filter tags subscribe to alarms on
the fly, depending on the criteria configured. Not all data sources support Filter
Definitions.
Digital Definitions
Digital Definitions allows the user to configure all digital points. Not all data sources
support Digital Definitions.
Analog Definitions
Analog Definitions allows the user to configure all analog points. Not all data sources
support Analog Definitions.
Watchdog Timer Definitions
90
Global Menus
Watchdog Timer Definitions allows the user to configure all watchdog timers.
Report Definitions
Report Definitions allows the user to configure WIN-411 reports. Not all data sources
support Report Definitions.
91
WIN-911 V7.14
Global
The Global menu provides commands that are used to define the global configuration
information such as common sounds, alarm message formats, and hardware
assignments. For details on each one of the Global settings see, WIN-911 Global Menus.
Common Sounds
The Common Sounds defines all global sounds. It also allows the user to select the sound
source, wave format, default voice, and toggle the local announcer options.
Monitor Display
The Monitor Display defines the message format for the Monitor (both the alarm history
and alarm summary.) It also allows the user to select the acknowledgement options,
security display options, and the alarm message color choices.
Printer
The Printer Definition defines specific hardware and alignment definitions used by the
alarm printer. The definitions are for printer parallel port assignment and alarm text
formatting.
Pager
The Pager defines the alphanumeric and numeric pager settings, as well as the message
format.
Voice Card
The Voice Card defines the parameters associated with voice telephony. It allows the
user to define the type of telephony hardware, timing parameters, and volume.
SMS
92
Global Menus
SMS defines the parameters associated with SMS messaging. It allows the user to define
SMS device settings, message formats and acknowledgement formats.
E-mail
E-mail defines the e-mail parameters. It allows the user to configure SMTP settings,
including authentication. It also allows the user to define the e-mail format.
Mobile-911
Mobile-911 defines the parameters associated with Mobile-911 messaging. It allows the
user to configure WIN-911 settings for communicating with the Mobile-911 Server, and
alarm and acknowledgment message formatting.
Logger
The Logger defines the types of historical logging and their format for archiving.
Data Pokes
Data Pokes define group acknowledgement messages for OPC/DDE and heartbeat
pokes. The hearbeat monitors system health, pager health and voice health.
WIN-911 IP
WIN-911 IP defines the parameters associated with an IP message/acknowledgement
connection. It allows the user to define the IP connection settings, protocol, and message
formats.
Options
Options allows the user to customize and tune WIN-911and WIN-411 to meet various
application or performance needs.
93
WIN-911 V7.14
Tools
The Tools pull-down menu provides the user with extensive trouble shooting resources as
well as password protection for the Configurator and Scan & Alarm shutdown.
Diagnostic Logging
When any of the following options are checked, extensive diagnostic information is logged
to the Scan & Alarm status window and History view of the Alarm Monitor during runtime.
The log files are also populated with extensive information. Since this can put a strain on
the PC, Specter recommends only enabling Diagnostic Logging to help troubleshoot
known issues.
System
Turns on all Diagnostic logging.
Data Source
Logs data source messages to Scan & Alarm and displays them in Status display, the
Monitor display and the log files. This tool is very useful in trouble shooting
communication problems between WIN-911 and the data server or SCADA. Specter
recommends that you make a single tag test configuration that focuses on a tag at a time
for diagnosis due to the amount of information that this tool will generate.
Announcer
94
Global Menus
Logs announcer module messages to Scan & Alarm. Intercepts Announcer module
shutdowns.
Monitor
Logs monitor module messages to Scan & Alarm. Intercepts Monitor module shutdowns.
Printer
Logs printer module messages to Scan & Alarm. Intercepts Printer module shutdowns.
Dialout Pager
Logs Dialout Pager module messages to Scan & Alarm and displays them in the Monitor.
This tool is very useful in trouble shooting communication problems with the pager service
provider. With this you can monitor the conversation between the WIN-911 modem and
the pager service modem. Intercepts Dialout Pager module shutdowns.
Local Pager
Logs local pager messages to Scan & Alarm and displays them in the Monitor. Intercepts
Local Pager module shutdowns.
Voice Connections
Logs voice module messages to Scan & Alarm and displays them in the Monitor. Will also
show failed attempts to play audio. Intercepts Voice module shutdowns.
SMS
Logs SMS module messages to Scan & Alarm and displays them in the Monitor.
Intercepts SMS module shutdowns.
E-Mail
Logs e-mail module communications between itself and the e-mail service provider to
Scan & Alarm. Diagnostic messages from the e-mail server that are usually transparent to
the user can be extracted using this tool. Intercepts E-Mail module shutdowns.
Mobile-911
Logs Mobile-911 messages between WIN-911 and the Mobile-911 server and displays
them in the Alarm Monitor (History view) and Logger. Intercepts Mobile-911 module
shutdown.
Logger
Logs logger module messages to Scan & Alarm. Intercepts Logger module shutdowns.
WIN-911 IP
Logs WIN-911 IP module messages to Scan & Alarm. Intercepts IP module shutdowns.
95
WIN-911 V7.14
Password
WIN-911 security can be enhanced with the use of a user/administrator defined password
that will be required to start the WIN-911 Configurator or shutdown Scan & Alarm. If the
user wishes to require a Password to shutdown WIN-911 they must enable this option in
the Monitor Definition.
To set and remove a password the user/administrator must enter and confirm the
password from within the Configurator's Tools menu.
Sound Check
Voice telephony requires a standard sound file ("*.wav") format to ensure smooth
operation if Runtime Voice Synthesis is not enabled. The formats that are acceptable are
PCM format, 11025 Hz or 8000 Hz sample rate, 8 bit, and mono for Dialogic or any format
for TAPI. Because the sound files can be developed independently and with different
voices, both sample rates can end up in the Sound Files folder. Such a mixing of sample
rates can degrade the WIN-911 voice module so Specter requires that you standardize on
one sample rate.
To help in this portion of the development if Runtime Voice Synthesis is disabled, the
Sound Check tool can be invoked for a global sound file scan or a single file-at-a-time
spot check.
The global sound check is performed during WIN-911 Configurator shutdown or via the
'Sound Check' button in Sound Controls. This tool will check the format of each sound file
and produce a comprehensive list of offending "*.wav" files. This list is placed in the WIN911 V7 folder in the form of a text file titled "TeleDAC Sound Check.txt". This can be
viewed and printed out using Notepad.
A single file spot check is available in any Select Sound File dialog. If Sound Check is
turned on, the Test button is enabled, and when depressed will scan the highlighted
sound file.
Any incorrectly formatted or unlicensed premium voice file will be detected.
Note: Runtime Voice Synthesis does not play pre-recorded sound file that require format
management.
Sound Purge
96
Global Menus
WARNING! The Sound Purge option on the tools menu or the Sound Purge button in
Sound Controls deletes all .wav files in the current sound file directory. This can be used
to fix corrupted wave files by deleting them, and then allowing WIN-911 to rebuild the
.wav files with the correct format automatically, during shut down or with the Sound Build
button. Sound Purge may also be used to modify properly working wave files with, for
instance, a different voice.
97
WIN-911 V7.14
Help
The Help menu contains a set of options - Help Topics and Help About
Help Topics
Help Topics will bring up the Configurator's help file, WIN911 Configurator.CHM. This is
the main help file containing all WIN-911's generic help. Any help files specific to a
particular data source are accessed through the Data Source Definition help button.
Help Library
The help library contains all support documentation for WIN-911.
Help About
Help | About will bring up the Configurator's Help About window. Here the user can view
the WIN-911 Program and Configurator version number and the type of license installed.
Below describes how the license can be interpreted:
The fourth line in Help About represents the license installed. The first part will always
read 'WIN-911/'. What follows the WIN-911/..... reveals the license installed. Multiple
licenses can be installed on one WIN-911 machine.
98
•
DEMO: Thirty day, fully functional demo
•
*LITE*: Lite Mode
•
Basic: E-mail & Paging
•
Pro: Telephony, E-mail & Paging
Global Menus
•
V: Premium Voice
•
X: X-Tools
•
R: FactoryTalk
•
M(10-100): Mobile-911, the number specified indicates the number of authorized
Mobile-911 clients.
•
ME(1-xx): ME Direct Connect
The software release version, as well as the version number of each component, may be
found by clicking the "Versions" button.
99
WIN-911 V7.14
100
Global Menus
Global Menu
The "Global" menu provides settings that are used to define the global configuration
information such as common sounds, alarm message formats, and hardware
assignments. The Options selection allows customizing such things as: Initialization
Adjustments, Path Selections, and Timing Adjustments. All changes made to Global
configuration information is stored in the WIN-911.INI file.
101
WIN-911 V7.14
Common Sounds
Common Sounds
This button is used to select all global sounds. The "Is" and "Was" sounds are used on
most alarm announcements. The other sounds are used for verbal phone dial-ups and for
the verbalization of analog values. At the end of each selection process, you may select
from the following action buttons:
Help
The "Help" button will bring up help information for the currently active tab.
OK
The "OK" button is used to accept and store the changes.
Cancel
The "Cancel" button is used to ignore all changes made in this dialog box.
Sequence of a Typical WIN-911 Alarm Dial-Out
Alarm detected, dial first phone number:
Sequence of sounds:
1. "Hello,......", from Common Sounds
2. "Phone Book Name Sound", from Phone Definition (if defined)
3. "Please enter your access code followed by the pound key", from Common
Sounds
User enters access code.
Sequence of sounds:
1. The Alarm Sounds, from Group and Alarm Definition and/or Data Source
Definition.
2. "Press star to repeat message,....", from Common Sounds
3. "Enter your Alarm Acknowledgment Code", from "911 Only" Sounds tab
User enters acknowledgment code.
102
Configuration Menus
1. "Alarms acknowledged", from "911 Only" Sounds
2. "Thank You, Good-bye", from Common Sounds
103
WIN-911 V7.14
Common
"Hello, this is (Company Name)"
The "Hello, this is (Company Name)" sound should identify the monitoring system to the
person receiving or making the call. A typical message is "This is the Acme Water District
Monitoring System". This message will be followed by the Phone Book Name sound (if
defined) for a dial-out alarm announcement. A typical Name message might say "A
message for Mr. Jones."
"Please enter your access code followed by the pound key"
The "Please enter your access code followed by the pound key" sound asks the user to
enter his/her unique access code. A typical message is "Please enter your access code
followed by the pound key...". Note: For Voice Page or Dialout Announcer applications,
this sound does not apply.
"Invalid Entry"
The "Invalid Entry" sound is used to inform the caller that he has entered an invalid code
or out-of-range data entry. This message is normally "Invalid Entry...".
Note: For Voice Page or Dialout Announcer applications, this sound does not apply.
"Thank You, Goodbye"
104
Configuration Menus
The "Thank You, Goodbye" sound is given right before the system disconnects. A typical
message is "...thank you...goodbye". Note: For Voice Page or Dialout Announcer
applications, this sound is ignored.
"...Is..."
The Is sound is used when reporting an active alarm. It is placed between the Tagname
and the alarm condition.
"Press star to repeat message, any other key to continue"
The "Press star to repeat message, any other key to continue" sound is used to offer the
user the ability to repeat the verbalized message or skip ahead to the next user entry.
This message is normally "Press star to repeat message, any other key to continue........
".
"In the" [Group]
The "In the" sound is the prepositional phrase relating the Group name with the rest of the
message. This sound is undefined by default.
"the" [Tag]
The sound "the" is the article pointing to the tag which follows in the verbalization of the
message. This sound is undefined by default.
105
WIN-911 V7.14
911 Only
"...was..."
The Was sound is used when an alarm has returned to a normal state, and is not
acknowledged. It is placed between the Tagname and the alarm condition.
"There are no unacknowledged alarms to report at this time"
The "There are no unacknowledged alarms to report at this time" sound is used to inform
the caller that there are no reported alarms that have not been acknowledged for the
group(s) which he is authorized to hear. This message is normally, "There are no
unacknowledged alarms to report at this time."
"Enter your alarm acknowledgment code followed by the pound key"
The "Enter your alarm acknowledgment code followed by the pound key" sound is used to
request the alarm acknowledgment code. This message is normally "Enter your alarm
acknowledgment code followed by the pound key..."
"Alarms acknowledged"
106
Configuration Menus
The "Alarms acknowledged" sound is used to inform the user that a successful
acknowledgment code was entered and that all alarms heard in their entirety were
acknowledged. This message is normally "Alarms acknowledged..."
107
WIN-911 V7.14
411 Only
Note: WIN-411 Reports are not available in Lite mode or with the RSView SE Direct
Connect, Factory Talk Alarms and Events, RSView32 Direct Connect, or the ArchestrA
Direct Connect.
"Select the desired report number followed by the pound key"
The "Select the desired report number followed by the pound key" sound is used to
request the user to select a pre-configured report number. This message is normally
"Select the desired report number followed by the pound key..."
"Select the point to change"
The "Select the point to change" sound is used to request the user to select a numerical
password to enable a point to be changed. This message is normally "Select the point to
change....."
"You have selected"
The "You have selected" sound is used to verbally confirm a user selection of a report
number. This message is normally "You have selected...."
"Enter new value"
108
Configuration Menus
The "Enter new value" sound is used to advise the user to key in the new value to be
changed. This message is normally "Enter new value".
"The new value will be set to"
The "The new value will be set to" sound is used to verbally confirm the new value, prior
to actually making the change. This message is normally "The new value will be set to...."
"Press the pound key to accept"
The "Press the pound key to accept" sound is used to confirm a selection or entered
value at various stages of the WIN-411 processing sequence. This message is normally
"Press the pound key to accept....."
"...and..."
The "and" sound is used to add two messages together. An example would be: "The level
is 45 feet, and is above the high level".
"Please enter your authorization code followed by the pound key"
The "Please enter your authorization code followed by the pound key" sound is used to
request the operators' authorization code before changing any values in the WIN-411
system. This is a security feature used to protect the process. This message is normally
"Please enter your authorization code followed by the pound key."
109
WIN-911 V7.14
411 Numbers
Note: WIN-411 Reports are not available in Lite mode, RSView SE Direct Connect,
Factory Talk Alarms and Events, or RSView32 Direct Connect.
In reporting an analog value, WIN-411 must be able to verbalize a numeric value. This is
done by recording a sound clip of each digit. A value of "-2.33" would be reported as
"Minus two point three three".
110
Configuration Menus
Conditions
"I/O failure"
The "I/O failure" sound is used to warn the user that the particular I/O point is in failure.
This message is normally "I O failure..."
"Communication failure"
The "Communication failure" sound is used to warn the user that the communication with
the I/O hardware is in failure. This message is normally "Communication failure..."
"Without current data"
The "Without current data" sound is used to inform the user that the data is not current for
a particular I/O point. This message is normally "Without current data..."
"Exceeded the deviation setpoint"
The "Exceeded the deviation setpoint" sound is used in deviation alarm annunciations to
explain that an alarm has occurred by way of the value increasing above the deviation
setpoint. This message is normally, "Exceeded the deviation setpoint".
"Exceeded the rate of change setpoint"
111
WIN-911 V7.14
The "Exceeded the rate of change setpoint" sound is used in rate of change alarm
annunciations to explain that an alarm has occurred by way of the value changing from
one value to another. This message is normally, "Exceeded the rate of change setpoint".
112
Configuration Menus
Prefixes
"Above"
The "Above" sound is used in analog alarm annunciations to explain that an alarm
threshold has been exceeded by way of the value increasing above a specified limit. This
message is normally, "Above".
"Below"
The "Below" sound is used in analog alarm annunciations to explain that an alarm
threshold has been exceeded by way of the value decreasing below a specified limit. This
message is normally, "Below".
"...in Alarm Condition..."
The "...in Alarm Condition..." sound is used in digital alarm annunciations, as a prefix, to
help describe the alarm condition message defined in the data source. This sound is
undefined by default.
113
WIN-911 V7.14
States
"...is in alarm"
The "...is in alarm" sound is used to inform the user that the alarm is in the active state.
This message is normally, "...is in alarm".
"...is no longer in alarm"
The "is no longer in alarm" sound is used to inform the user that the alarm is now in the
inactive state. This message is normally, "...Is no longer in Alarm".
"And is acknowledged"
The "And is acknowledged" sound is used to inform the user that the alarm has been
acknowledged. This message is normally, "...And is acknowledged".
"But is not yet acknowledged"
The "But is not yet acknowledged" sound is used to inform the user that the alarm is still
unacknowledged. This message is normally, "...But is not yet acknowledged".
114
Configuration Menus
Controls
Sound Order
The Sound Order stack determines the sequence in which segments of the alarm
message are to be verbalized. The top segment is the first to be verbalized. To change
the order of the message, highlight the segment to be moved and click the Move Up or
Move Down button.
The Group Sound is configured in the Group Definition. The Tag Sound is defined in the
Analog, Digital, Watchdog, or Filter Definition. The Is/Was Sound, Condition Sound,
Active State Sound, and the Acknowledge State Sound are all defined in Common
Sounds.
Sound Purge
WARNING! The Sound Purge button deletes all wave files in the current sound file
directory. This can be used to fix corrupted wave files by deleting them, and then allowing
WIN-911 to rebuild the wave files with the correct format automatically, during shut down
or with the Sound Build button. Sound Purge may also be used to modify properly working
wave files with for instance a different voice. The Sound Purge option can also be found
in the Tools menu at the top of the WIN-911 Configurator.
Sound Build
115
WIN-911 V7.14
The Sound Build button rebuilds all missing wave files with the selected format and voice.
If using Premium Voice, Sound Build rebuilds the wave files with the rate and pitch as well
as the selected format and voice. This button functions the same as when the
Configurator is shutdown.
Sound Check
Voice telephony requires a standard sound file ("*.WAV") format to ensure smooth
operation. The formats that are acceptable are PCM format, 11025 Hz or 8000 Hz sample
rate, 8 bit, and mono for both Dialogic and TAPI. Because the sound files can be
developed independently and with different voices, both sample rates can end up in the
Sound Files folder. Such a mixing of sample rates or wave formats can cause the voice
module and hardware to malfunction. Specter requires that you standardize on one
sample rate.
To help in this portion of the development if Runtime Voice Synthesis is disabled, the
Sound Check tool can be invoked for a global sound file scan on the spot. This button will
check the format of each sound file and produce a comprehensive list of offending
"*.WAV" files. This list is placed in the WIN-911 V7 folder in the form of a text file titled
"TeleDAC Sound Check.txt". This can be viewed and printed out using Notepad.
The sound check button works very similarly to the Sound Check option in the Tools
menu, except the global sound file scan happens on the spot instead of at shutdown.
More can be read about the Sound Check options in the Tools menu in Chapter 14.
Wave Format
The wave file format can be specified with this pull-down, giving the user the ability to
directly control the sample rate, number of bits, and audio quality.
Note: Users of the Dialogic card or TAPI modem can only play uniformly formatted
"*.WAV" files that conform to the following parameters: PCM, 11 kHz or 8 kHz sample rate
(one or the other but NOT both), 8 bit, and Mono. Check each of the existing files with
Sound Check and convert them as needed.
Note: Runtime Voice Synthesis generates audio streams using the selected Wave
Format.
Wave Files Only
WIN-911 will use only pre-generated wave files when "Wave Files Only" is selected. This
selection is what you would use if you created your wave files externally and put them
onto your system. For users using earlier versions or upgrading, this will be the selection
you would probably prefer.
Text To Speech Wave Files
WIN-911 can use Text To Speech technology to generate audio announcements for use
by the WIN-911 Announcer and Voice/TAPI modules. To do this you must select "Text To
Speech Wave Files". When this radio button is selected TTS technology is invoked. It can
be used by the Configurator to develop sound files for use by Scan & Alarm.
116
Configuration Menus
The sound file option (WIN-911's original and default mode of playing voice
announcements and telephony) provides the developer with two ways to generate wave
files. One way which is automated and part of the WIN-911 Configurator shutdown
routine. The other is manual, using a "Convert Text to Wave" dialog or the "Sound Build"
button.
The automated shutdown routine generates sound files based on available text located in
the associated sound buttons. This is a time saving function that can generate large
numbers of wave files quickly. The drawback to this feature is that the text located in the
associated text box may be insufficient for human consumption. A Tagname may be
"Lift22_em_gen" and require a sound file with some more elaborate speech like "Lift
Station Number 22, Emergency Generator". When this situation arises, simply click on the
Tagname sound button and click "New" and then the "Convert Text to Wave File" dialog
will allow you to specify the exact text you want WIN-911 to annunciate for that field.
Runtime Voice Synthesis
WIN-911 Voice, TAPI, and Announcer modules will play speech that is generated during
runtime by reading appropriate text fields as opposed to playing wave files. This is a
space saving feature for the hard drive because it doesn't need to save any sound files in
the Sound Files folder. This also guarantees that all of the audio will be uniformed, since it
uses the Wave Format configured above.
When using Runtime Voice Synthesis the sound buttons become text boxes that contain
the text that will be "read" by Scan & Alarm during voice annunciations of the WIN-911
Announcer, Voice, and TAPI modules. When one of these buttons is selected the dialog
that will appear is titled "Save Runtime Text String." Rather than associating a sound file
from the Sound Files folder, the Configurator saves the defined text string. The "Convert
Text to Wave File" dialog does not appear in this mode.
Default Voice
This pull down menu selects the default voice to be used by the Text-To-Speech engine
during the generation of speech. Both Text To Speech wave files and Runtime Voice
Synthesis are effected by the default voice.
Rate
The Rate slider bar varies the pace at which the premium voice engine annunciates the
messages (premium voices only).
Note: The Rate slider is only active when a Premium Voice is selected.
Pitch
The Pitch slider bar varies the pitch that the premium voice engine annunciates the
messages (premium voices only).
Note: The Pitch slider is only active when a Premium Voice is selected.
Announce Active Unacknowledged Alarms
117
WIN-911 V7.14
This checkbox determines whether local audio will include/exclude announcements for
"active" alarms that are "unacknowledged".
Announce Inactive Acknowledged Alarms
This checkbox determines whether local audio will include/exclude announcements for
"inactive" alarms that are "acknowledged".
Announce Inactive Unacknowledged Alarms
This checkbox determines whether local audio will include/exclude announcements for
"inactive" alarms that are "unacknowledged".
Announce Active Acknowledged Alarms
This checkbox determines whether local audio will include/exclude announcements for
"active" alarms that are "acknowledged".
118
Configuration Menus
Monitor Definition
Monitor Definition
This button defines the message format for the Monitor window (both the alarm history
and alarm summary). It also selects the acknowledgment options, the security display
options, and the alarm message color choices.
119
WIN-911 V7.14
Appearance
These options allow the developer to customize the attributes and the contents of the
alarm monitor window.
Show title bar
Selecting this check box will make the title bar visible on the alarm monitor window.
Leaving the check box blank will hide the title bar. With the title bar hidden the user
cannot modify (drag) the location of the window nor can the user minimize/maximize the
window. The user still has the ability to resize the window.
Note: Selection of this option will override Show systems menu and Show
Minimize/Maximize selections.
Show systems menu
Selecting this check box will make the Minimize/Maximize controls and the Windows Exit
control visible. Leaving the check box blank will hide all three system menu controls.
Note: Selection of this option will override Show Minimize/Maximize selections.
Show Minimize/Maximize
Selecting this check box will make the Windows Minimize/Maximize controls visible.
Leaving the check box blank will hide the controls.
120
Configuration Menus
Show manual button
Selecting this check box will make the Manual Message button visible on the alarm
monitor. This control can be used to manually send e-mails and pages. Leaving this
check box blank will hide the button.
Note: There must be at least one e-mail, SMS, or Pager notification configured for the
Manual Message button to be visible.
Enable Resizing
Selecting this check box will allow the window to be re-sized by dragging the edges
vertically, horizontally, or diagonally. Leaving the box unchecked will put the window in a
state that cannot be re-sized.
Present history upon critical system events
Selecting this check box will cause the Alarm Monitor to switch its presentation mode from
Summary to History in the event of any critical system events.
Note: The Display Lock button will override this behavior anytime it is engaged.
Present history upon operator change of value
Selecting this check box will cause the Alarm Monitor to switch its presentation mode from
Summary to History in the event of an operator change of value via WIN-411.
Note: The Display Lock button will override this behavior anytime it is engaged.
Maximum History Display
Use this spinner-box to limit the number of lines (records) that will appear when the Alarm
Monitor is running in history mode (maximum is 10,000).
121
WIN-911 V7.14
Acknowledge
These options select different acknowledgment choices available in the runtime Alarm
Monitor. These options affect local system acknowledgments only. It does not affect dialin acknowledgments or acknowledgments made from the HMI/SCADA software. The
selections may be used in any combination.
Enable Total Acknowledge
The user may acknowledge all current alarms at one time by using the "Acknowledge"
button on the monitor dialog. Selecting this check box will make the "Acknowledge" button
visible, leaving this box unchecked will hide the button.
Enable Single Acknowledge
Some applications require individual acknowledgments on an alarm by alarm basis.
Selecting this check box will allow this option. An alarm is acknowledged by double
clicking the displayed alarm message in the monitor's summary view. Leaving this box
unchecked will disable single acknowledgments.
Require Ack Code to Acknowledge
If security and/or enhanced historical alarm record keeping are needed, the user may use
this option to require an operator to enter his/her name and acknowledgment code in
order to have access to local alarm acknowledgments. Selecting this box will activate this
feature. The user also may acknowledge more than one alarm at a time by extending the
122
Configuration Menus
"Relock Time". "Relock Acknowledge in" is used to control how long access is allowed in
minutes before the Ack Code is required to be entered again. If the user selects this
option and selects two minutes for relock, the user may acknowledge as many alarms as
he wishes, without re-entering his code, for up to 2 minutes. In this example, if two
minutes elapses after his last acknowledgment, the system will relock and require his/her
user information to be re-entered to acknowledge the next alarm. A selection of "0"
minutes for relock would require re-entering the code for each alarm. Leaving this box
unchecked will disable password protection.
If the check box is selected, you will notice a button entitled "Lock" which becomes visible
during the relock time described above. Clicking on the button will abort the timer and
automatically relock the acknowledgment sequence, thus requiring re-entry of the
acknowledgment code to acknowledge the next alarm.
Require Ack Code to Exit WIN-911 System
This security feature is provided to restrict unauthorized personnel from shutting down
WIN-911 Scan & Alarm. When selected, a valid "User Name" or "Access Code" and the
matching "Ack Code" is required before WIN-911 will shutdown.
Note: The "Shutdown.exe" and "Restart.exe" command applet ignores this setting and will
shutdown Scan & Alarm automatically. You must enable "Require Ack Code to Shutdown
WIN-911 System" and "Require Ack Code to Restart System" for WIN-911 to require an
ack code for both applets.
Require Global Password to Exit WIN-911 System
This security feature is provided to restrict unauthorized personnel from shutting down
WIN-911 Scan & Alarm. When selected, the global password is required to shutdown
Scan & Alarm.
A Password must be configured in order to have this option enabled. The password is
configured in the Tools menu of the Configurator. See, "WIN911 Configurator.CHM ->
WIN-911 Configurator Menu -> Tools -> Password" for further details.
Require Ack Code to Bypass Alarms
This security feature is provided to restrict unauthorized personnel from bypassing
alarms. When selected, a valid "User Name" or "Access Code" and the matching "Ack
Code" is required before the user can bypass alarms.
Require Ack Code to Override Schedules
This security feature is provided to restrict unauthorized personnel from overriding dialout
schedules. When selected, a valid "User Name" or "Access Code" and the matching "Ack
Code" is required before the user can override dialout schedules.
Require Ack Code for WIN-911 System Standby
This security feature is provided to restrict unauthorized personnel placing WIN-911 in
Standby mode using the Standby applet. When selected, a valid "User Name" or "Access
123
WIN-911 V7.14
Code" and the matching "Ack Code" is required before the user can change the WIN-911
system from Active to Standby.
Require Ack Code to Activate WIN-911 System
This security feature is provided to restrict unauthorized personnel placing WIN-911 in
Active mode using the Activate applet. When selected, a valid "User Name" or "Access
Code" and the matching "Ack Code" is required before the user can change the WIN-911
system from Standby to Active.
Require Ack Code to Shutdown WIN-911 System
This security feature is provided to restrict unauthorized personnel from shutting down
WIN-911 using the Shutdown applet. When selected, a valid "User Name" or "Access
Code" and the matching "Ack Code" is required before the user can shut down the WIN911 system.
Require Ack Code to Restart WIN-911 System
This security feature is provided to restrict unauthorized personnel from restarting WIN911 using the Restart applet. When selected, a valid "User Name" or "Access Code" and
the matching "Ack Code" is required before the user can restart the WIN-911 system.
Note: If WEB-911 is installed alongside your WIN-911 installation, the XStandby,
XActivate, and XApply XTools will allow standby, activate, and restart (respectively)
without an Ack Code. WEB-911 provides its own security.
124
Configuration Menus
Colors
Both the Font Size selection and the Color selection are only applicable for the Alarm
Monitor and the Alarm Log Manager.
Notice that the user has complete selection of foreground and background colors for both
"Unacknowledged" and "Acknowledged" alarms for each of the WIN-911 alarm types.
BG
The BG column is used to select the background color. The selection will then be
displayed to the right of the control.
FG
The FG column is used to select the foreground color. The selection will then be
displayed to the left of the control.
Change Font
The Change Font button brings up the default Windows font selection window. The user
has the ability to select Font, Font Style and Size.
125
WIN-911 V7.14
Format
Each of the items listed on this page is automatically saved as an individual column
listing. You may change or move the appearance (or order) of each column as it is
displayed on the monitor. If, for example, you are not interested in displaying the Priority
(as you have configured all alarms with the same priority), you may move its column
position to the last, and modify the width of the column to a width of zero. To do this,
highlight "Priority" in the list box and "Move Down" to the bottom. You must wait until
runtime to adjust the width of the column.
Date
This field is used to select the desired date format in the alarm messages. The options
provided through a pull down list box are:
None
MM/DD
MMM DD
MM/DD/YY
MMM DD YYYY
DD/MM
126
Configuration Menus
DD MMM
DD/MM/YY
DD MMM YYYY
Time
This field is used to select the desired time format in the alarm messages. The options
provided through a pull down list box are:
None
HH:MM (24 Hour)
HH:MM AM
HH:MM:SS (24 hour)
HH:MM:SS AM
Event
Is the item in an alarm condition, or has it returned to normal? For a Digital Alarm, the
"Event" conditions are:
*ALM* = unacknowledged active alarm.
ALM = acknowledged active alarm.
>ALM = unacknowledged return-to-normal alarm (inactive alarm).
OK = acknowledged return -to-normal alarm (inactive alarm).
For an Analog Alarm, the conditions are: *High* (first level high alarm), *HiHi* (the second
or highest alarm), *Low* (the first low alarm), *LoLo* (the second or lowest alarm). When
an analog alarm returns to normal without first being acknowledged the event field reports
<High or <<HiHi.
Priority
Each alarm may be given one of three "Priorities": High, Medium, or Low. A discussion on
alarm priorities is found in the alarm configuration section of this manual, (WIN911
Configurator.CHM -> WIN-911 Configuration -> Digital Definitions, Analog Definitions and
Watchdog Timer Definitions).
Group
The name given to a group of alarms, such as: "Reactor Three" or "Section 5 Lift
Stations".
Tagname
The name given to a unique alarm.
127
WIN-911 V7.14
Description
A text field used to describe the "Tagname", or the alarm description. Example: "Water
level".
Value
The numeric value of the alarm at the exact time it was reported.
Units
The Engineering Unit description of the analog value: DEG.F, or GPM.
Limit
The value of the alarm limit.
Acked By
If the proper "Acknowledgment Option" was chosen, this would list the name of the
individual who acknowledged the alarm. For system events (e.g. shutdown of WIN-911),
this field will contain the actor responsible for the event (e.g. the windows login, "XTools
Client", etc.).
Column Order
The alarm message is composed of up to eleven text fields that can be arranged in any
order. The user can rearrange the order to suit his/her needs by highlighting the item and
clicking the Move Up/Move Down buttons.
128
Configuration Menus
Printer Definition
Printer Definition
This button is used to define specific hardware and alignment definitions used by the
alarm printer. The definitions are for alarm printer parallel port assignment and the alarm
text formatting.
Note: Specter recommends a dot matrix or any other type of printer that is capable of
printing one line at a time. Page at a time printers will not be able to provide real-time
information because data is buffered until a page worth of alarm information has been
received.
129
WIN-911 V7.14
Port
The printer can be assigned to None, LPT1, LPT2, or LPT3.
Note that if a printer port is assigned for alarm printing, no other tasks can access the
printer. Do not configure an operating system printer on the LPT port. Alarm printing is
sent to the printer as normal text rather than through standard Windows drivers. The
alarm reporter will not use any special features of the printer.
Note: It is possible to redirect the Alarm Printer Port to a network printer located on a
remote node using a batch file. Refer to our knowledgebase at specterinstruments.com
130
Configuration Menus
Format
Upon a pre-selected condition, an alarm message will be assembled by WIN-911 and
displayed on the output device to bring attention to the condition. The message is
composed of up to ten concatenated text fields. These fields can be arranged in any
order, rigorously formatted, or omitted altogether. Date and Time styles are configured by
pull-down menus while the other fields are formatted by a combination of a text box entry
along with pad and truncate field check boxes.
The user may wish to view the alarm message in a columnar form for presentation effect.
To do this the user should specify each field's character count by adjusting the number in
the associated text box. To omit the field simply enter zero. Checking the Pad Fields
option will ensure that each field contains at least the specified number of characters.
Checking the Truncate Fields option will shorten the field to the specified size, should it
exceed the specified length.
The user may wish to view the entire text of each field. To do so, uncheck the pad and
truncate fields and ensure that the number one (1) is entered for the character count. This
free-form format will take only the number of characters needed to complete each of the
desired fields.
Date
This field is used to select the desired date format in the alarm messages. The options
provided through a pull down list box are:
None
MM/DD
MM/DD/YY
131
WIN-911 V7.14
MMM DD YYYY
DD/MM
DD/MM/YY
DD MMM YYYY
Time
This field is used to select the desired time format in the alarm messages. The options
provided through a pull down list box are:
None
HH:MM (24 Hour)
HH:MM AM
HH:MM:SS (24 hour)
HH:MM:SS AM
Event
Is the item in an alarm condition, or has it returned to normal? For a Digital Alarm, the
"Event" conditions are:
*ALM* = unacknowledged active alarm.
ALM = acknowledged active alarm.
>ALM = unacknowledged return-to-normal alarm (inactive alarm).
OK = acknowledged return-to-normal alarm (inactive alarm).
For an Analog Alarm, the conditions are: *High* (first level high alarm), *HiHi* (the second
or highest alarm), *Low* (the first low alarm), *LoLo* (the second or lowest alarm). When
an analog alarm returns to normal without first being acknowledged the event field reports
<High or <<HiHi.
Select "1" if you want the Event to be visible, "0" will ignore it. (See below for padding or
truncating message lengths.)
Priority
Each alarm may be given one of three "Priorities": High, Medium, or Low. A discussion on
alarm priorities is found in the alarm configuration section of this manual, (WIN911
Configurator.CHM -> WIN-911 Configuration -> Digital Definitions, Analog Definitions and
Watchdog Timer Definitions).
Group
132
Configuration Menus
The name given to a group of alarms, such as: "Reactor Three". Select "1" if you want the
Alarm Group description to be visible, "0" will ignore it. (See below for padding or
truncating message lengths.)
Tagname
The name given to a unique alarm. Select "1" if you want the "Tagname" to be visible, "0"
will ignore it. (See below for padding or truncating message lengths.)
Description
A text field used to describe the "Tagname", or the alarm description. Example: "Water
level". Select "1" if you want the comment field to be visible, "0" will ignore it. (See below
for padding or truncating message lengths.)
Value
The numeric value of the alarm at the exact time it was reported. Select "1" if you want
the value to be visible, "0" will ignore it. (See below for padding or truncating message
lengths.)
Units
The Engineering Unit designation for the analog value. Select "1" if you want the
Engineering Units to be visible, "0" will ignore it. (See below for padding or truncating
message lengths.)
Limit
The value of the alarm limit. Select "1" if you want the "Limit" to be visible, "0" will ignore
it. (See below for padding or truncating message lengths.)
Pad Fields to Fixed Length
If you select the "Pad Fields" check-box, the number in the text box (character count) that
is associated with each item becomes the fixed length of that item, padded with spaces
out to the specified length.
Truncate Fields to Fixed Length
If you select the "Truncate Fields" check-box, the number in the text box (character count)
that is associated with each item becomes the maximum length of that item. (In the
examples above, the selection of "1" would be nonsensical as only one character of each
selection would be visible.)
Column Order
The alarm message is composed of up to eleven text fields that can be arranged in any
order. The user can rearrange the order to suit his/her needs by highlighting the item and
clicking the Move Up/Move Down buttons.
133
WIN-911 V7.14
Pager Definition
Pager Definition
This button defines the hardware settings and message format for numeric and
alphanumeric pagers.
WIN-911 can send the alarm messages to alphanumeric pagers such as the pagers
manufactured by NEC and Motorola. These pagers have different display sizes, although
the most common size is 4 lines of 20 characters. The overall message size is usually
limited to 199 characters, with the pager handling the scrolling through the message
parts. In addition, many pagers include a received message date and time stamp so that
date and time do not need to be sent.
The pagers typically have 6K to 8K of memory for messages so that the message
capability exceeds the needs of even a shutdown situation. The user must manually clear
the messages when they are no longer needed.
134
Configuration Menus
Ports
The "Ports" tab consists of serial port selection for the modem, and baud rate settings.
Numeric and local pager information is also set-up here.
Note: An important point to keep in mind when configuring applications to process e-mail,
SMS, and pager messages is that their respective modules operate independently. If not
properly implemented they may interfere with each other. Dial-out paging requires a
dedicated modem and phone line. e-mail uses whichever server connection has been
established, including but not limited to dialup networking. Ensure there is no sharing of
hardware (serial port) resources.
Dial-out Paging Port
The pager modem can be set to use None, COM1, COM2, COM3, up to COM256 for
sending paging information.
Note: Although Windows does allow the use of COM3 and COM4 for communications,
COM1 cannot be used simultaneously with COM3, or COM2 cannot be used
simultaneously with COM4, unless different IRQs are used. This effectively means that
COM3 and COM4 should not be used in industrial applications unless special hardware is
used, or software adjustments are made.
Dial-out Alphanumeric Password
The TAP protocol offers an optional security password. If implemented, enter the sixcharacter password in this text-box. If no password is required leave the text-box blank.
135
WIN-911 V7.14
Global Numeric Page Message
The purpose of the Global Numeric Page Message is to identify WIN-911 as the originator
or the numeric page. The numbers entered here are prefixed to the actual alarm numbers.
For example: A Base Number of "411" and an alarm message number of "66" will be
received at the numeric pager as "41166".Numeric messages must be enclosed in square
brackets "[ ]".
Baud Rate
Both the dial-out and local pager connection can be set to a baud rate of 110, 300, 600,
1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 14400, 19200, 38400, 57600, 115200, or 128000. The word size
and parity are handled automatically. This selection controls the speed at which WIN-911
will "talk" to the local modem and/or transmitter, not the external baud rate between the
local modem and the pager company's modem.
Data Bits
Both the dialout and local pager connection data bits can be selected using the provided
pull-down menus. The default setting is 7 data bits which is the setting specified by the
TAP protocol.
Parity
Both the dialout and local pager connection parity can be selected using the provided pulldown menus. The default setting is Even parity which is the setting specified by the TAP
protocol.
Local Port
The local pager transmitter can be set to use None, COM1, COM2, COM3, up to
COM256 for sending paging information.
Note: Although Windows does allow the use of COM3 and COM4 for communications,
COM1 cannot be used simultaneously with COM3, or COM2 cannot be used
simultaneously with COM4, unless different IRQs are used. This effectively means that
COM3 and COM4 should not be used in industrial applications unless special hardware is
used, or software adjustments are made.
TAP or COMP 2 Protocol Radio Button
The WIN911 Local Pager.dll can process numeric and alphanumeric pages with either the
TAP or COMP-2 protocols. Make the selection by clicking on the appropriate selection.
Numeric Delay Between
The delay between the numeric pager dial-string and the entry of the message string is
set in this text-box. The default setting is five seconds.
136
Configuration Menus
Commands
The modem control commands are modem-specific commands that are used for putting
the modem in the proper mode. The default commands should work with most "Hayes"
compatible modems.
Modem Initialization
This command is sent to the modem at program start up. The string sent includes
commands needed for proper operation with WIN-911. In the case of modems with nonvolatile RAM, this string will most likely be 'ATZ^M'. Note that '^M' is equivalent to a
carriage return. This string may be customized, depending on the pager company modem
setup.
Please note that only a "Z" is required in the modem initialization list box because WIN911 automatically attaches an "AT" prefix and a carriage return "^M" suffix to the entry.
Note: Modems with non-volatile memory should be properly configured, and then the
configuration should be saved in the modem's memory.
Dialing Prefix
This command instructs the modem to dial using either tone or pulse dialing. "Hayes"
compatible modems use the command 'ATDT' for tone dialing and 'ATDP' for pulse
dialing.
If your phone system requires a dialing prefix (such as 9 to get an outside line on a PBX
system), you may specify this prefix after the dialing command. To specify a delay time of
137
WIN-911 V7.14
two seconds, place a comma after the prefix (2 seconds is the default for a comma; see
your modem manual for the proper register set). For example, the dialing command to get
an outside line (on most PBX systems) and pause for 4 seconds might be 'ATDT9,,'.
Note: Only the "DT" is required in this list box because WIN-911 automatically appends
an "AT" to the beginning of this entry.
Dialing Suffix
The dialing suffix is appended to the end of the dialing command.
Modem Hang-Up
The modem hang-up instructs the modem to go "on hook" and return to command mode.
Modem Response Timeout
During WIN-911 Scan & Alarm startup, WIN-911 initializes the pager modem by sending it
ATZ commands and awaiting an OK response from the modem. This parameter varies
the amount of time WIN-911 will wait for the OK response. The default time is one
second.
138
Configuration Menus
Connect
The connect result codes are messages sent by the local WIN-911 modem to the Pager
Applet to indicate the state of the connection. The messages defined in this section are
case sensitive and must exactly match the result messages returned by the local modem.
The listings above indicate successful connections.
Note: If none of the "Connect Result Codes" in the left column match the modem's
response, the modem configuration will fail. Any of the "Connect Codes" in the left column
may be altered to reflect the actual response of the modem. Example: Change the
"Connect" to "Connect 300".
139
WIN-911 V7.14
Failed
If the connection was not successful, one of these failure codes will be logged.
140
Configuration Menus
Format
When an unacknowledged alarm event is received, an alarm message will be assembled
by WIN-911 and displayed on the output device to bring attention to the condition. The
message is composed of up to ten concatenated text fields. These fields can be arranged
in any order, rigorously formatted, or omitted altogether. Date and Time styles are
configured by pull-down menus while the other fields are formatted by a combination of a
text box entry along with pad and truncate field check boxes.
The user may wish to view the alarm message in a columnar form for presentation effect.
To do this the user should specify each field's character count by adjusting the number in
the associated text box. To omit the field simply enter zero. Checking the Pad Fields
option will ensure that each field contains at least the specified number of characters.
Check the Truncate Fields option to shorten the field to the specified size, should it
exceed it.
The user may wish to view the entire text of each field. To do so uncheck the pad and
truncate fields and ensure that a number one (1) is entered for the character count. This
free-form format will take only the number of characters needed to complete each of the
desired fields.
Date
This field is used to select the desired date format in the alarm messages. The options
provided through a pull down list box are:
None
141
WIN-911 V7.14
MM/DD
MM/DD/YY
MMM DD YYYY
DD/MM
DD/MM/YY
DD MMM YYYY
Time
This field is used to select the desired time format in the alarm messages. The options
provided through a pull down list box are:
None
HH:MM (24 Hour)
HH:MM AM
HH:MM:SS (24 hour)
HH:MM:SS AM
Event
Is the item in an alarm condition, or has it returned to normal? For a Digital Alarm, the
"Event" conditions are:
*ALM* = unacknowledged active alarm.
ALM = acknowledged active alarm.
>ALM = unacknowledged return-to-normal alarm (inactive alarm).
OK = acknowledged return-to-normal alarm (inactive alarm).
For an Analog Alarm, the conditions are: *High* (first level high alarm), *HiHi* (the second
or highest alarm), *Low* (the first low alarm), *LoLo* (the second or lowest alarm). When
an analog alarm returns to normal without first being acknowledged the event field reports
<High or <<HiHi.
Select "1" if you want the Event to be visible, "0" will ignore it. (See below for padding or
truncating message lengths.)
Priority
Each alarm may be given one of three "Priorities": High, Medium, or Low. A discussion on
alarm priorities is found in the alarm configuration section of this manual, (WIN911
Configurator.CHM -> WIN-911 Configuration -> Digital Definitions, Analog Definitions and
Watchdog Timer Definitions).
142
Configuration Menus
Group
The name given to a group of alarms, such as: "Reactor Three". Select "1" if you want the
Alarm Group description to be visible, "0" will ignore it. (See below for padding or
truncating message lengths.)
Tagname
The name given to a unique alarm. Select "1" if you want the "Tagname" to be visible, "0"
will ignore it. (See below for padding or truncating message lengths.)
Description
A text field used to describe the "Tagname", or the alarm description. Example: "Water
level". Select "1" if you want the comment field to be visible, "0" will ignore it. (See below
for padding or truncating message lengths.)
Value
The numeric value of the alarm at the exact time it was reported. Select "1" if you want
the value to be visible, "0" will ignore it. (See below for padding or truncating message
lengths.)
Units
The Engineering Unit designation for the analog value. Select "1" if you want the
Engineering Units to be visible, "0" will ignore it. (See below for padding or truncating
message lengths.)
Limit
The value of the alarm limit. Select "1" if you want the "Limit" to be visible, "0" will ignore
it. (See below for padding or truncating message lengths.)
Pad Fields to Fixed Length
If you select the Pad Fields check box, the number in the text box (character count) that is
associated with each item becomes the fixed length of that item, padded with spaces out
to the specified length.
Truncate Fields to Fixed Length
If you select the Truncate Fields check box, the number in the text box (character count)
that is associated with each item becomes the maximum length of that item. (In the
examples above, the selection of "1" would be nonsensical as only one character of each
selection would be visible.)
Label Fields
If you select the Label Fields check-box, the message will be formatted with column
headers and line breaks for each columns results. If the check box is left unchecked, the
message will concatenate all the columns results into a single line of text.
143
WIN-911 V7.14
Column Order
The alarm message is composed of up to eleven text fields that can be arranged in any
order. The user can rearrange the order to suit his/her needs by highlighting the item and
clicking the Move Up/Move Down buttons.
144
Configuration Menus
Voice Card Definition
Voice Card Definition
This button defines the parameters associated with voice telephony. From this dialog you
can define the type of telephony, the timing parameters such as number of rings before
answering an inbound call, and volume. This section is optional and only used if you are
conducting voice telephony call-outs and/or call-ins.
Special Note: When running in Lite Mode Dialogic cards are not supported. All Voice
connections must use a TAPI modem.
145
WIN-911 V7.14
Voice
WIN-911 may use either a TAPI voice modem or Dialogic voice card to handle voice
notification. Use the radio button to select the hardware you will be using.
The drop down menu for compatible devices will list all TAPI compliant modems on your
system. Use it to select your TAPI modem. WIN-911 will be unable to use a TAPI modem
if more than one modem appears in this list. If more than one TAPI compliant modem is
installed, one must be removed.
Special Note: Do not share the TAPI Voice Modem COM port with Local Pager port, SMS
port, or Dialout Pager port selection. WIN-911 will not share COM ports. TAPI Voice
alarming module will not run when a shared COM port is defined.
146
Configuration Menus
Timing
Before aborting dial-out
Enter the number of rings that WIN-911 will allow before it aborts a voice dial-out attempt.
Before pickup in active mode
Enter the number of rings that WIN-911 will allow before it answers an inbound voice call
in active mode.
Before pickup in standby mode
Enter the number of rings that WIN-911 will allow before it answers an inbound voice call
in standby mode.
Before aborting first digit & Before aborting next digit
The default time between a computer requested input and the beginning of a user
response (touch-tone button) is 15 seconds and five seconds before next digit entered. If
the first tone is not entered during the first 15 seconds or the next digit within 5 seconds,
WIN-911 will abort the requested task and hang-up. If you wish to change the default
value, you must edit to increase or decrease the values. If a user input is received prior to
the timeout, the task is completed.
147
WIN-911 V7.14
Control
Volume setting in decibels (+10dB to -10dB)
This setting offsets the default volume of the telephony card up to plus or minus 10
decibels. This parameter is valuable in applications where there is a lot of ambient
industrial noise. The default setting is zero.
Outbound Line Selection
The dialogic card has four phone ports and can receive calls on any of those ports. The
board may only place calls on a single line. Select the line you wish to place your
outgoing calls on with this radio button.
148
Configuration Menus
SMS Definition
SMS Definition
This button defines settings and message formats for the SMS notifier.
WIN-911 can send alarm messages in the form of SMS messages to cell phones using a
wireless GSM modem. The WIN-911/PRO license allows the user to remotely
acknowledge alarms by sending a text message back to the GSM modem. The specifics
of the Ack message are explained in the "Ack Format" section below. WIN-911/PRO
licensed users can also send a health status request to monitor the health of WIN-911. A
list of recommended GSM modems can be found on our website at
www.specterinstruments.com -> Support -> 24/7 Online-> AppNotes -> WIN-911->
Recommended GSM Modem List - 080007.
The overall message size for an SMS message is limited to 160 characters. WIN-911
uses some number of characters to format alarm messages and acknowledgments. As a
result, the character limit is slightly less than 160 for both. These limits are discussed in
the "Message Format" and "Ack Format" sections below.
149
WIN-911 V7.14
Port
The "Port" tab is used to configure the necessary settings for WIN-911 to communicate
with the installed GSM modem.
Port
The GSM modem will be installed on one of the computer's 256 COM ports. Phone and
Modem Options in the Control Panel will tell you to which COM port the modem is
installed. The correct COM port should be configured here.
Special Note: Do not share the SMS COM port with Local Pager port, TAPI Voice Modem
port, or Dialout Pager port selection. WIN-911 will not share COM ports. The SMS
alarming module will not run when a shared COM port is defined.
Data Bits
The GSM modem data bits can be selected using the provided pull-down menu. The
default setting is 8 data bits. Refer to the modem's documentation or contact the modem
manufacturer for the recommended Data Bits.
Baud
150
Configuration Menus
The GSM modem's baud rate may be set from 110 to 921,600. This selection controls the
speed at which WIN-911 will "talk" to the GSM modem. Refer to the modem's
documentation or contact the modem manufacturer for the specified recommended Baud.
Stop Bits
The GSM modem's Stop Bits may be set with 1, 1.5, or 2 stop bits using the provided pulldown menu. Refer to the modem's documentation or contact the modem manufacturer for
the recommended Stop Bits.
Parity
The GSM modem's connection parity may be set to Even, Odd, None, Mark, or Space,
using the provided pull-down menu. The default setting is None. Refer to the modem's
documentation or contact the modem manufacturer for the recommended Parity.
Flow Control
The GSM modem's Flow Control may be set to CtsDtr, CtsRts, DsrDtr, DsrDts, None, or
XonXoff, using the provided pull-down menu. The default setting is None. Refer to the
modem's documentation or contact the modem manufacturer for the recommended Flow
Control.
Modem Response Timeout
This is the total time WIN-911 will always wait for an expected response from the modem.
Setting this value too low may cause the initialization and/or modem commands to fail.
The default value is 10 seconds.
Use "+" character prefix for Country Codes
Some cellular networks require a "+" be prefixed to the beginning of phone numbers.
Should yours require this, check this option.
Network Type
Select the type of network you will be using: either GSM, CDMA, or HSPA. Changing this
selection will also change the Modem Initialization string to match the string that is
required for either network.
Modem Initialization
This string represents the AT command sent to initialize and test the GSM modem. The
default value for GSM networks is: "e0;+CMGS=?;+CMGR=?;+CMGD=1,4," which turns
echo of commands off, tests that sending SMS is supported, tests that reading SMS
messages is supported, and deletes ALL received SMS messages currently on the
modem (also testing that deletion of SMS messages is supported). The default string for
CDMA networks is: "e0," which turns echo off. These default strings are suitable for most
modems, however additional AT commands may be needed to initialize the modem (e.g.
unlocking a locked SIM card, or switching a quad-band modem's country code). Refer to
your modem's documentation or contact its manufacturer for the necessary AT
initialization strings.
151
WIN-911 V7.14
Reset Defaults
Click this button to restore your SMS Device Settings to the default settings. The Network
Type setting will not be affected.
Send Inactive Unacknowledged Messages
Check this box and WIN-911 will send messages for inactive alarms that are not
acknowledged. Leaving this box unchecked means that will not send a message when an
alarm returns to a normal state.
Send Inactive Acknowledged Messages
Check this box and WIN-911 will send messages for inactive alarms that are
acknowledged.
Send Active Acknowledged Messages
Check this box and WIN-911 will send messages for active alarms that are
acknowledged.
152
Configuration Menus
Message Format
Upon a pre-selected condition, an alarm message will be assembled by WIN-911 and
displayed on the output device to bring attention to the condition. The message is
composed of up to eleven text fields. These fields can be concatenated or delimited,
arranged in any order, rigorously formatted, or omitted altogether. Date and Time styles
are configured by textboxes and pull-down menus while the other fields are formatted by
a combination of a text box entry along with minimum/maximum field size lengths.
The user may wish to view the alarm message in a labeled columnar form for
presentation effect. To do this the user should enable "Label Fields" and maybe specify
each field's character count by adjusting the number in the associated text box. To omit
the field simply uncheck the box next to the field in the Field Selection.
The user may wish to view the entire text of each field. To do so uncheck the minimum
and maximum length and place checks in everything under Field Selection. This free-form
format will take only the number of characters needed to complete each of the desired
fields.
Note: SMS alarm messages sent by WIN-911 can contain up to 134 characters, meaning
anything over this number will be concatenated after the 134th character. You can
enable/disable alarm fields as well as adjust the maximum field length for each individual
field to insure the contact receives the entire intended alarm message.
Note: Every SMS alarm message will contain a 6-digit ticket number at the beginning of
each message. This ticket number is used by WIN-911 to keep track of the active alarm.
Also the end of every message will contain the string "Ack:". If the recipient wants to
acknowledge the alarm they will need to send a reply back to the modem. The first 6
digits of the acknowledgement must be the ticket number, and the recipient's Ack code
must be at the end of the message. More details about acknowledging alarms via SMS
are discussed under 'SMS' in the 'Overview' section at the beginning of the help file.
153
WIN-911 V7.14
Tagname
The name given to a unique alarm. This check box is used to enable/disable the
Tagname field. (See Minimum/Maximum Length below for configuring a desired character
length.)
Description
A text field used to describe the Tagname, or the alarm description. Example: "Water
level". This check box is used to enable/disable the Description field. (See
Minimum/Maximum Length below for configuring a desired character length.)
Value
The numeric value of the alarm at the exact time it was reported. This check box is used
to enable/disable the Value field. (See Minimum/Maximum Length below for configuring a
desired character length.)
Acked By
154
Configuration Menus
The user who acked the alarm. If an Ack Code was required to acknowledge the
configured WIN-911 user will be logged. If no Ack Code was required the logged in
Windows user will be logged. This check box is used to enable/disable the Acked By field.
(See Minimum/Maximum Length below for configuring a desired character length.)
Priority
Each alarm may be given one of three "Priorities": High, Medium, or Low. A discussion on
alarm priorities is found in the alarm configuration section of this manual, (WIN911
Configurator.CHM -> WIN-911 Configuration -> Digital Definitions, Analog Definitions and
Watchdog Timer Definitions). This check box is used to enable/disable the Priority field.
(See 'Minimum/Maximum Length' below for configuring a desired character length.)
Event
Is the item in an alarm condition, or has it returned to normal? For a Digital Alarm, the
"Event" conditions are:
*ALM* = unacknowledged active alarm.
ALM = acknowledged active alarm.
>ALM = unacknowledged return-to-normal alarm (inactive alarm.)
OK = acknowledged return -to-normal alarm (inactive alarm.)
For an Analog Alarm, the conditions are: *High* (first level high alarm), *HiHi* (the second
or highest alarm), *Low* (the first low alarm), *LoLo* (the second or lowest alarm). When
an analog alarm returns to normal without first being acknowledged the event field reports
<High or <<HiHi.
This checkbox is used to enable/disable the Event field. (See 'Minimum/Maximum Length'
below for configuring a desired character length.)
Limit
The value of the alarm limit. This check box is used to enable/disable the Limit field. (See
Minimum/Maximum Length below for configuring a desired character length.)
Units
The Engineering Unit designation for the analog value. This check box is used to
enable/disable the Unit field. (See Minimum/Maximum Length below for configuring a
desired character length.)
Group
The name given to a group of alarms, such as: "Reactor Three". This check box is used to
enable/disable the Group field. (See Minimum/Maximum Length below for configuring a
desired character length.)
Label Fields
155
WIN-911 V7.14
If you select the "Label Fields" check box, each field of the message will be prepended
with a field label (e.g. "Limit: " will appear before the value of the alarm limit). If the check
box is left unchecked, only the contents of the fields will be in the message. Note that
enabling Label Fields will reduce the amount of characters available in the SMS message,
but will make the message more readable.
Abbreviate Labels
If you select the Abbreviate Labels check box, the longer field labels will be abbreviated
(e.g. "Desc.:" instead of "Description"). This will leave more characters for the alarm
message.
Field Suffix (Delimiter)
The "Field Suffix (Delimiter) is used to seperate the enabled fields in the message. By
default NEWLINE (\n) is selected. The user has the option to select one of the fourteen
predefined delimiters or can type in a custom delimiter by typing in the drop down menu.
Only one custom delimiter can be configured at a time. All custom delimiters will appear in
the message exactly as it appears in the Field Suffix (Delimiter) dropdown box. Some
delimiters in the list format the message such as NEWLINE (\n). This delimiter makes
each field appear on a new line. Below explains what will appear in the message when
selected.
LINERETURN (\r\n) = This will separate each selected field with a carriage return - line
feed resulting in each selected field being on a new line.
NEWLINE (\n) = This will separate each selected field with a line feed resulting in each
selected field being on a new line.
NONE () = This will result in nothing separating each selected field. The alarm message
will be concatenated without spaces.
PERIOD (.) = A "." will be used to separate selected fields.
RETURN (\r) = This will separate each selected field with a carriage return resulting in
each selected field being on a new line.
SPACE ( ) = A space will be used to separate selected fields.
TAB (\t) = Five spaces will be used to separate selected fields.
Minimum Length
If you select the Minimum Length check box, the number in the Field Size text box
(character count) that is associated with each item becomes the minimum length of that
item. This can be configured for each selected field.
Maximum Length
If you select the Maximum Length check box, the number in the Field Size text box
(character count) that is associated with each item becomes the maximum length of that
item. This can be configured for each selected field
156
Configuration Menus
Field Size
The number of characters selected allowed for the Minimum, Maximum or both field
lengths. This can be configured for each selected field.
Column Order
The alarm message is composed of up to eleven text fields that can be arranged in any
order. The user can rearrange the order to suit his/her needs by highlighting the item
clicking the Move Up/Move Down buttons. Once the order is set, all selected fields will
group at the top of the list .
157
WIN-911 V7.14
Ack Format
Upon an alarm acknowledgement, an ack message will be assembled by WIN-911 and
displayed on the output device. The message is composed of up to eleven text fields.
These fields can be concatenated or delimited, arranged in any order, rigorously
formatted, or omitted altogether. Date and Time styles are configured by textboxes and
pull-down menus while the other fields are formatted by a combination of a text box entry
along with minimum/maximum field size lengths.
The user may wish to view the ack message in a labeled columnar form for presentation
effect. To do this the user should enable "Label Fields" and maybe specify each field's
character count by adjusting the number in the associated text box. To omit the field
simply uncheck the box next to the field in the Field Selection.
The user may wish to view the entire text of each field. To do so uncheck the minimum
and maximum length and place checks in everything under Field Selection. This free-form
format will take only the number of characters needed to complete each of the desired
fields.
Note: SMS acknowledgement messages in WIN-911 can contain up to 140 characters,
meaning anything over this number will be concatenated after the 140th character. You
can enable/disable alarm fields as well as adjust the maximum field length for each
individual field to insure the contact receives the entire intended alarm message.
Note: The beginning of every SMS acknowledgement message will contain the string
"Alarm Acked" followed by the 6-digit ticket number. This ticket number is used by WIN911 to keep track of all active alarms.
158
Configuration Menus
Tagname
The name given to a unique alarm. This checkbox is used to enable/disable the Tagname
field. (See Minimum/Maximum Length below for configuring a desired character length.)
Description
A text field used to describe the Tagname, or the alarm description. Example: "Water
level." This check box is used to enable/disable the Description field. (See
'Minimum/Maximum Length' below for configuring a desired character length.)
Value
The numeric value of the alarm at the exact time it was reported. This check box is used
to enable/disable the Value field. (See Minimum/Maximum Length below for configuring a
desired character length.)
Acked By
The user who acked the alarm. If an Ack Code was required to acknowledge the
configured WIN-911 user will be logged. If no Ack Code was required the logged in
159
WIN-911 V7.14
Windows user will be logged. This checkbox is used to enable/disable the Acked By field.
(See Minimum/Maximum Length below for configuring a desired character length.)
Priority
Each alarm may be given one of three Priorities: High, Medium, or Low. A discussion on
alarm priorities is found in the alarm configuration section of this manual, (WIN911
Configurator.CHM -> WIN-911 Configuration -> Digital Definitions, Analog Definitions and
Watchdog Timer Definitions). This check box is used to enable/disable the Priority field.
(See 'Minimum/Maximum Length' below for configuring a desired character length.)
Event
Is the item in an alarm condition, or has it returned to normal? For a Digital Alarm, the
"Event" conditions are:
*ALM* = unacknowledged active alarm.
ALM = acknowledged active alarm.
>ALM = unacknowledged return-to-normal alarm (inactive alarm).
OK = acknowledged return-to-normal alarm (inactive alarm).
For an Analog Alarm, the conditions are: *High* (first level high alarm), *HiHi* (the second
or highest alarm), *Low* (the first low alarm), *LoLo* (the second or lowest alarm). When
an analog alarm returns to normal without first being acknowledged the event field reports
<High or <<HiHi.
This checkbox is used to enable/disable the Event field. (See 'Minimum/Maximum Length'
below for configuring a desired character length.)
Limit
The value of the alarm limit. This check box is used to enable/disable the Limit field. (See
'Minimum/Maximum Length' below for configuring a desired character length.)
Units
The "Engineering Unit" designation for the analog value. This check box is used to
enable/disable the Unit field. (See Minimum/Maximum Length below for configuring a
desired character length.)
Group
The name given to a group of alarms, such as: "Reactor Three". This check box is used to
enable/disable the Group field. (See 'Minimum/Maximum Length' below for configuring a
desired character length.)
Label Fields
If you select the "Label Fields" check box, each field of the message will be prepended
with a field label (e.g. "Limit: " will appear before the value of the alarm limit). If the
160
Configuration Menus
checkbox is left unchecked, only the contents of the fields will be in the message. Note
that enabling Label Fields will reduce the amount of characters available in the SMS
message, but will make the message more readable.
Abbreviate Labels
If you select the "Abbreviate Labels" check box, the longer field labels will be abbreviated
(e.g. "Desc.:" instead of "Description"). This will leave more characters for the alarm
message.
Field Suffix (Delimiter)
The "Field Suffix (Delimiter) is used to separate the enabled fields in the message. By
default NEWLINE (\n) is selected. The user has the option to select one of the fourteen
predefined delimiters or can type in a custom delimiter by typing in the drop down menu.
Only one custom delimiter can be configured at a time. All custom delimiters will appear in
the message exactly as it appears in the Field Suffix (Delimiter) dropdown box. Some
delimiters in the list format the message such as NEWLINE (\n). This delimiter makes
each field appear on a new line. Below explains what will appear in the message when
selected.
LINERETURN (\r\n) = This will separate each selected field with a carriage return - line
feed resulting in each selected field being on a new line.
NEWLINE (\n) = This will separate each selected field with a line feed resulting in each
selected field being on a new line.
NONE () = This will result in nothing separating each selected field. The alarm message
will be concatenated without spaces.
PERIOD (.) = A "." will be used to separate selected fields.
RETURN (\r) = This will separate each selected field with a carriage return resulting in
each selected field being on a new line.
SPACE ( ) = A space will be used to separate selected fields.
TAB (\t) = Five spaces will be used to separate selected fields.
Minimum Length
If you select the Minimum Length check box, the number in the Field Size text box
(character count) that is associated with each item becomes the minimum length of that
item. This can be configured for each selected field.
Maximum Length
If you select the Maximum Length check box, the number in the Field Size text box
(character count) that is associated with each item becomes the maximum length of that
item. This can be configured for each selected field
Field Size
161
WIN-911 V7.14
The number of characters selected allowed for the Minimum, Maximum or both field
lengths. This can be configured for each selected field.
Column Order
The alarm message is composed of up to eleven text fields that can be arranged in any
order. The user can rearrange the order to suit his needs by highlighting the item and
clicking the Move Up/Move Down buttons. Once the order is set, all selected fields will
group at the top of the list .
162
Configuration Menus
E-Mail Definition
E-Mail Definition
WIN-911 can send alarm messages via the Internet as a standard e-mail client. WIN-911
will use the systems established Internet connection to e-mail alarm information. The
connection must be a WAN/LAN connection such as DSL. This is a very powerful tool that
can result in remote alarm notification being received by a variety of output devices.
Depending on the user's service providers, this module can send messages to other
computers, paging services that convert e-mail messages to pages, SMS, fax's, etc.
Note: Specter Instruments does not support the use of Dial-up Networking to connect to
an ISP for e-mail service access. No customer support will be extended to users
attempting this kind of connection setup.
163
WIN-911 V7.14
SMTP Account
The SMTP Account page sets up the e-mail account from which the alarm messages
originate. This requires an e-mail account with an SMTP server and Internet connection.
SMTP Server Name
Enter the SMTP server name in this text box.
Source E-Mail Address
Enter the e-mail address of the account the alarm messages will originate from. The
source e-mail must be a valid e-mail account on the SMTP server.
Subject Source
Define the subject of your alarm messages here. You may specify a literal text string for
all message subjects by selecting User Defined and then entering that string in the field
below. Additionally, the message subject may contain the Group, Tagname or Description
of the alarm that triggered the e-mail.
Keep in mind that some mail servers require a subject message. Also, some mail clients
will mark messages that do not contain subjects as spam.
Fail connect attempt
Enter the amount of time to allow the E-Mail client/server connection to occur before
aborting the attempt. The default setting is 10 seconds and the upper limit is 300.
164
Configuration Menus
SMTP Port
The default port for SMTP servers is 25. If your server listens on another port, enter that
port number here.
165
WIN-911 V7.14
Authentication
Authentication is available using the POP3 standard. The requirement of this option
depends on the e-mail service provider. SMTP account settings must be completed first
before POP3 may be enabled. All possible combinations of SMTP and POP3
authentication are selected via the radio buttons.
POP3 Server Name
Specifies the service provider for incoming messages.
POP3 User Login Name
Specifies the account name assigned by the POP3 service provider.
POP3 User Login Password
Enter the service provider assigned password here.
POP3 Port
The default port for POP servers is 110. If your server listens on another port, enter that
port number here.
Share POP3 User Login Name and Password?
This check box enables SMTP authentication using POP3.
166
Configuration Menus
SMTP User Login Name
Specifies the authentication account name assigned by the SMTP service provider if
different than POP3.
SMTP User Login Password
Enter the service provider assigned authentication password here.
167
WIN-911 V7.14
Format
Upon a pre-selected condition, an alarm message will be assembled by WIN-911 and
displayed on the output device to bring attention to the condition. The message is
composed of up to eleven concatenated text fields. These fields can be arranged in any
order, rigorously formatted, or omitted altogether. Date and Time styles are configured by
pull-down menus while the other fields are formatted by a combination of a text box entry
along with pad and truncate field checkboxes.
The user may wish to view the alarm message in a columnar form for presentation effect.
To do this the user should specify each field's character count by adjusting the number in
the associated text box. To omit the field simply enter zero. Checking the Pad Fields
option will ensure that each field contains at least the specified number of characters. The
Truncate Fields option make the character count the maximum size.
The user may wish to view the entire text of each field. To do so uncheck the pad and
truncate fields and ensure that a number one (1) is entered for the character count. This
free-form format will take only the number of characters needed to complete each of the
desired fields.
Date
This field is used to select the desired date format in the alarm messages. The options
provided through a pull down list box are:
None
MM/DD
168
Configuration Menus
MM/DD/YY
MMM DD YYYY
DD/MM
DD/MM/YY
DD MMM YYYY
Time
This field is used to select the desired time format in the alarm messages. The options
provided through a pull down list box are:
None
HH:MM (24 Hour)
HH:MM AM
HH:MM:SS (24 hour)
HH:MM:SS AM
Event
Is the item in an alarm condition, or has it returned to normal? For a Digital Alarm, the
"Event" conditions are:
*ALM* = unacknowledged active alarm.
ALM = acknowledged active alarm.
>ALM = unacknowledged return-to-normal alarm (inactive alarm).
OK = acknowledged return -to-normal alarm (inactive alarm).
For an Analog Alarm, the conditions are: *High* (first level high alarm), *HiHi* (the second
or highest alarm), *Low* (the first low alarm), *LoLo* (the second or lowest alarm). When
an analog alarm returns to normal without first being acknowledged the event field reports
<High or <<HiHi.
Select "1" if you want the Event to be visible, "0" will ignore it. (See below for padding or
truncating message lengths.)
Priority
Each alarm may be given one of three Priorities: High, Medium, or Low. A discussion on
alarm priorities is found in the alarm configuration section of this manual, (WIN911
Configurator.CHM -> WIN-911 Configuration -> Digital Definitions, Analog Definitions and
Watchdog Timer Definitions.)
Alarm Group
169
WIN-911 V7.14
The name given to a group of alarms, such as: "Reactor Three". Select "1" if you want the
Alarm Group description to be visible, "0" will ignore it. (See below for padding or
truncating message lengths.)
Tagname
The name given to a unique alarm. Select "1" if you want the Tagname to be visible, "0"
will ignore it. (See below for padding or truncating message lengths.)
Description
A text field used to describe the "Tagname", or the alarm description. Example: "Water
level." Select "1" if you want the comment field to be visible, "0" will ignore it. (See below
for padding or truncating message lengths.)
Value
The numeric value of the alarm at the exact time it was reported. Select "1" if you want
the value to be visible, "0" will ignore it. (See below for padding or truncating message
lengths.)
Units
The Engineering Unit designation for the analog value. Select "1" if you want the
Engineering Units to be visible, "0" will ignore it. (See below for padding or truncating
message lengths.)
Limit
The value of the alarm limit. Select "1" if you want the "Limit" to be visible, "0" will ignore
it. (See below for padding or truncating message lengths.)
Pad Fields to Fixed Length
If you select the Pad Fields check box, the number in the text box (character count) that is
associated with each item becomes the fixed length of that item, padded with spaces out
to the specified length.
Truncate Fields to Fixed Length
If you select the Truncate Fields check box, the number in the text box (character count)
that is associated with each item becomes the maximum length of that item. (In the
examples above, the selection of "1" would be nonsensical as only one character of each
selection would be visible.)
Label Fields
If you select the Label Fields check box, the E-Mail will be formatted with column headers
and line breaks for each columns results. If the checkbox is left unchecked, the e-mail will
concatenate all the columns results into a single line of text.
Column Order
170
Configuration Menus
The alarm message is composed of up to eleven text fields that can be arranged in any
order. The user can rearrange the order to suit his/her needs by highlighting the item and
clicking the Move Up/Move Down buttons.
171
WIN-911 V7.14
Logger Definition
Logger Definition
This button defines the types of historical logging and their format for archiving. Alarm
information, non-alarm events, and diagnostic information are among the things WIN-911 can
record for later analysis. This is an excellent tool for reconstructing events and verifying
accountability. Any one or both of the following log types can be used simultaneously.
172
Configuration Menus
Daily TXT
Daily Text file option will archive alarm activity in a 24 hour based "*.TXT" file. The files
are titled by Julian date such as "A00285.txt", where A is always the first character,
followed by two digits for the year and then three digits for the Julian day of the year.
Hence, the text file A07285.txt is the text file for 11 October, 2007, as it is the 285th day of
the year.
Upon a pre-selected condition, an alarm message will be assembled by WIN-911 and
written to the log file storing a record of the condition. The message is composed of up to
eleven concatenated text fields. These fields can be arranged in any order, rigorously
formatted, or omitted altogether. Date and Time styles are configured by pull-down menus
while the other fields are formatted by a combination of a text box entry along with pad
and truncate field check boxes.
The user may wish to view the alarm message in a columnar form for presentation effect.
To do this the user should specify each field's character count by adjusting the number in
the associated text box. To omit the field simply enter zero. Checking the Pad Field option
will ensure that each field contains at least the specified number of characters. The
Truncate Field option make the character count the maximum size.
The user may wish to view the entire text of each field. To do so uncheck the pad and
truncate fields and ensure that a number one (1) is entered for the character count. This
free-form format will take only the number of characters needed to complete each of the
desired fields.
Date
173
WIN-911 V7.14
This field is used to select the desired date format in the alarm messages. The options
provided through a pull down list box are:
None
MM/DD
MM/DD/YY
MMM DD YYYY
DD/MM
DD/MM/YY
DD MMM YYYY
Time
This field is used to select the desired time format in the alarm messages. The options
provided through a pull down list box are:
None
HH:MM (24 Hour)
HH:MM AM
HH:MM:SS (24 hour)
HH:MM:SS AM
Event
Is the item in an alarm condition, or has it returned to normal? For a Digital Alarm, the
"Event" conditions are:
*ALM* = unacknowledged active alarm.
ALM = acknowledged active alarm.
>ALM = unacknowledged return-to-normal alarm (inactive alarm).
OK = acknowledged return-to-normal alarm (inactive alarm).
For an Analog Alarm, the conditions are: *High* (first level high alarm), *HiHi* (the second
or highest alarm), *Low* (the first low alarm), *LoLo* (the second or lowest alarm). When
an analog alarm returns to normal without first being acknowledged the event field reports
<High or <<HiHi.
Select "1" if you want the Event to be visible, "0" will ignore it. (See below for padding or
truncating message lengths.)
Priority
174
Configuration Menus
Each alarm may be given one of three "Priorities": High, Medium, or Low. A discussion on
alarm priorities is found in the alarm configuration section of this manual, (WIN911
Configurator.CHM -> WIN-911 Configuration -> Digital Definitions, Analog Definitions and
Watchdog Timer Definitions.)
Group
The name given to a group of alarms, such as: "Reactor Three". Select "1" if you want the
Alarm Group description to be visible, "0" will ignore it. (See below for padding or
truncating message lengths.)
Tagname
The name given to a unique alarm. Select "1" if you want the Tagname to be visible, "0"
will ignore it. (See below for padding or truncating message lengths.)
Description
A text field used to describe the Tagname, or the alarm description. Example: "Water
level". Select "1" if you want the comment field to be visible, "0" will ignore it. (See below
for padding or truncating message lengths.)
Value
The numeric value of the alarm at the exact time it was reported. Select "1" if you want
the value to be visible, "0" will ignore it. (See below for padding or truncating message
lengths.)
Units
The Engineering Unit designation for the analog value. Select "1" if you want the
Engineering Units to be visible, "0" will ignore it. (See below for padding or truncating
message lengths.)
Limit
The value of the alarm limit. Select "1" if you want the "Limit" to be visible, "0" will ignore
it. (See below for padding or truncating message lengths.)
Pad Fields to Fixed Length
If you select the Pad Fields check box, the number in the text box (character count) that is
associated with each item becomes the fixed length of that item, padded with spaces out
to the specified length.
Truncate Fields to Fixed Length
If you select the Truncate Fields check box, the number in the text box (character count)
that is associated with each item becomes the maximum length of that item. (In the
examples above, the selection of "1" would be nonsensical as only one character of each
selection would be visible.)
175
WIN-911 V7.14
Column Order
The alarm message is composed of up to eleven text fields that can be arranged in any
order. The user can rearrange the order to suit his/her needs by highlighting the item and
clicking the Move Up/Move Down buttons.
Days Before Deleting Daily Text Log File
When daily text files are selected as the log file type, the number of days can be specified
that the files are to be kept and then automatically deleted. This is an optional house
keeping function. The default selection is zero, which means the log files will NOT be
automatically deleted.
176
Configuration Menus
Monthly MDB
The Monthly MDB option archives data in a monthly based Microsoft Access database
file. This format allows the user to sort data and append notes to events using the Alarm
Log Manager. This Alarm Log Manager can be found in the WIN-911 Tools folder. The
files are titled with the word History followed by the month and year. An example would be
History 102007.mdb for October 2007.
Upon a pre-selected condition, an alarm message will be assembled by WIN-911 and
displayed on the output device to bring attention to the condition. The message is
composed of up to eleven concatenated text fields. These fields can be arranged in any
order. Date and Time styles are configured by pull-down menus. Unlike the Daily Text File
all other fields are included in their entirety because the database is not restricted in the
number of characters each field can contain or an overall character count for an event.
Date
This field is used to select the desired date format in the alarm messages. The options
provided through a pull down list box are:
None
MM/DD
MM/DD/YY
MMM DD YYYY
DD/MM
177
WIN-911 V7.14
DD/MM/YY
DD MMM YYYY
Time
This field is used to select the desired time format in the alarm messages. The options
provided through a pull down list box are:
None
HH:MM (24 Hour)
HH:MM AM
HH:MM:SS (24 hour)
HH:MM:SS AM
Column Order
The alarm message is composed of up to eleven text fields that can be arranged in any
order. The user can rearrange the order to suit his/her needs by highlighting the item and
clicking the Move Up/Move Down buttons.
178
Configuration Menus
Data Poke Definition
Data Poke Definition
A Data Poke is basically a write operation performed on your SCADA/HMI. This has
several uses, which are discussed in the following sections.
Note: Do not configure WIN-911 to use the same tag for multiple Data Pokes.
179
WIN-911 V7.14
System Health
The System Health Poke sends a heartbeat signal to your HMI/SCADA server. When
provided with a valid item name, WIN-911 will regularly increment a number on your
server to demonstrate the fact that WIN-911 is still running. Should your server detect that
the tag is no longer being incremented, you can take corrective action.
Access Name
Select the data source that should be written to here.
Item Name
This is the address of the tag you wish to write to. Consult your server's documentation
for the proper syntax.
Increment value interval
This is the amount of time between writes.
Special Note: This tag must not be read only and should not be part of the Digital, Analog,
or Watchdog addressing.
180
Configuration Menus
Voice Health
This selection provides clients/servers with an indication of the voice applet's status by
poking a digital (discrete) message. Conditions that represent a failure will be either the
failure of the voice board or a user defined number of unsuccessful call-out attempts. The
voice board and drivers must be present and the timer must be started for the first
condition to report successfully. A failure of this condition constitutes a fatal error and no
voice call-outs will occur; WIN-911 must be restarted for the voice applet to be restored.
The second condition is determined by a user defined number of unsuccessful call-out
attempts. A healthy voice applet will report a digital one (1) and a failure will report a zero
(0).
Number of fails before changing health indicator
The user defined portion of the "Health Indicator" is set in this field. The default number of
failures for this application is three (3). Note that these are not indicative of a fatal error
(WIN-911 does not need to be restarted.). The alarm will be reset after the next
successful voice call.
Access Name
The "Access Name" is used to select a predefined data conversation from the list defined
in the Data Source Definition. This field must be defined.
Item Name
The "Item Name" is used to identify the particular item that WIN-911 will poke to. The
actual name entered will vary from server to server. Consult the server documentation for
additional information. This field is case sensitive and must be defined.
181
WIN-911 V7.14
Special Note: This tag must not be read only and should not be part of the Digital, Analog,
or Watchdog addressing.
182
Configuration Menus
Pager Health
This selection provides clients/servers with an indication of the paging applet's status by
poking a digital (discrete) message. An error free indication depends on two conditions
being satisfied; one of which is user defined and the other is modem dependent. The first
condition requires the modem be present and the timer started for the first condition to
report successfully. A failure of this condition constitutes a fatal error and no paging will
occur; WIN-911 must be restarted for paging to be restored. The second condition is
determined by a user defined number of unsuccessful paging attempts. A healthy pager
applet will report a digital one (1) and a failure will report a zero (0).
Number of fails before changing health Indicator
The user defined portion of the "Health Indicator" is set in this field. The default number of
failures for this application is three (3). Note that these are not indicative of a fatal error
(WIN-911 does not need to be restarted.). The alarm will be reset after the next
successful page.
Access Name
The "Access Name" is used to select a predefined data conversation from the list defined
in the Configure/Data Source Definition. This field must be defined.
Item Name
The "Item Name" is used to identify the particular item that WIN-911 will poke to. The
actual name entered will vary from server to server. Consult the server documentation for
additional information. This field is case sensitive and must be defined.
183
WIN-911 V7.14
Special Note: These tags must not be read only and should not be part of the Digital,
Analog, or Watchdog addressing.
Note for COMP2 Users: This function is very limited for pager systems using COMP2.
This protocol is a simplex or unidirectional protocol and is not capable of determining
which pages are transmitted successfully and which are not. The only thing it determines
is whether the selected COM port is available during startup.
184
Configuration Menus
Group
If more than one alarm occurs per "Group", the message will change (at a default rate of
every 30 seconds) to effectively scroll through all alarms in the selected alarm group. If all
of the alarms in this group are acknowledged in WIN-911, a "GROUP ACKED" string
value is sent to the data source application, thus reporting the "Group" is cleared. If all of
the alarms in this group are acknowledged in the data source application, an "Ack" string
value (case sensitive) is read by WIN-911 and immediately replaced with a "GROUP
ACKED", thus reporting the "Group" is cleared. If the user wants to change the scroll time,
or create a custom message to be sent in place of the "GROUP ACKED" default, change
the ASCII format using this tab. Note: A blank or empty field will effectively erase or clear
a message display or HMI screen reference.
185
WIN-911 V7.14
Format
The alarm message text string will change each time an alarm state change occurs for
that group. Note that only unacknowledged alarms will be transferred or "Poked". The
message is composed of up to eleven concatenated text fields. These fields can be
arranged in any order, rigorously formatted, or omitted altogether. Date and Time styles
are configured by pull-down menus while the other fields are formatted by a combination
of a text box entry along with pad and truncate field check boxes. This format does not
pertain to the Health pokes.
The user may wish to view the alarm message in a columnar form for presentation effect.
To do this the user should specify each field's character count by adjusting the number in
the associated text box. To omit the field simply enter zero. Checking the Pad Fields
option will ensure that each field contains at least the specified number of characters. The
Truncate Fields shortens the field to the selected size.
The user may wish to view the entire text of each field. To do so uncheck the pad and
truncate fields and ensure that a number one (1) is entered for the character count. This
free-form format will take only the number of characters needed to complete each of the
desired fields.
Date
This field is used to select the desired date format in the alarm messages. The options
provided through a pull down list box are:
None
MM/DD
MM/DD/YY
186
Configuration Menus
MMM DD YYYY
DD/MM
DD/MM/YY
DD MMM YYYY
Time
This field is used to select the desired time format in the alarm messages. The options
provided through a pull down list box are:
None
HH:MM (24 Hour)
HH:MM AM
HH:MM:SS (24 hour)
HH:MM:SS AM
Event
Is the item in an alarm condition, or has it returned to normal? For a Digital Alarm, the
"Event" conditions are:
*ALM* = unacknowledged active alarm.
ALM = acknowledged active alarm.
>ALM = unacknowledged return-to-normal alarm (inactive alarm).
OK = acknowledged return -to-normal alarm (inactive alarm).
For an Analog Alarm, the conditions are: *High* (first level high alarm), *HiHi* (the second
or highest alarm), *Low* (the first low alarm), *LoLo* (the second or lowest alarm). When
an analog alarm returns to normal without first being acknowledged the event field reports
<High or <<HiHi.
Select "1" if you want the Event to be visible, "0" will ignore it. (See below for padding or
truncating message lengths.)
Priority
Each alarm may be given one of three "Priorities": High, Medium, or Low. A discussion on
alarm priorities is found in the alarm configuration section of this manual, (WIN911
Configurator.CHM -> WIN-911 Configuration -> Digital Definitions, Analog Definitions and
Watchdog Timer Definitions.)
Group
187
WIN-911 V7.14
The name given to a group of alarms, such as: "Reactor Three". Select "1" if you want the
Alarm Group description to be visible, "0" will ignore it. (See below for padding or
truncating message lengths.)
Tagname
The name given to a unique alarm. Select "1" if you want the "Tagname" to be visible, "0"
will ignore it. (See below for padding or truncating message lengths.)
Description
A text field used to describe the Tagname, or the alarm description. Example: "Water
level". Select "1" if you want the comment field to be visible, "0" will ignore it. (See below
for padding or truncating message lengths.)
Value
The numeric value of the alarm at the exact time it was reported. Select "1" if you want
the value to be visible, "0" will ignore it. (See below for padding or truncating message
lengths.)
Units
The "Engineering Unit" designation for the analog value. Select "1" if you want the
Engineering Units to be visible, "0" will ignore it. (See below for padding or truncating
message lengths.)
Limit
The value of the alarm limit. Select "1" if you want the "Limit" to be visible, "0" will ignore
it. (See below for padding or truncating message lengths.)
Pad Fields to Fixed Length
If you select the "Pad Fields" check-box, the number in the text box (character count) that
is associated with each item becomes the fixed length of that item, padded with spaces
out to the specified length.
Truncate Fields to Fixed Length
If you select the "Truncate Fields" check-box, the number in the text box (character count)
that is associated with each item becomes the maximum length of that item. (In the
examples above, the selection of "1" would be nonsensical as only one character of each
selection would be visible.)
Column Order
The alarm message is composed of up to eleven text fields that can be arranged in any
order. The user can rearrange the order to suit his/her needs by highlighting the item and
clicking the Move Up/Move Down buttons.
188
Configuration Menus
IP Definition
IP Definition
WIN-911 can send alarm messages in the form of ASCII text to networked clients. Alarm
message transmission can be done either over a RAS (Remote Access Service)
connection or across a LAN. The IP notifier is a 2-way notifier which means it can listen
for acknowledgement responses to come back from the remote endpoint. In order to
make use of the IP connection, an application must be developed by the user in order to
receive and handle messages.
189
WIN-911 V7.14
Connection Settings
The Connection Settings tab contains the connection settings for both your primary and
secondary remote machines, as well as your local machine. Communication timing is also
set-up here.
Primary Remote Dialup Connection (RAS)
Enter the name of the primary RAS Connection. This Dial-up connection is configured to
connect to the primary remote computer via telephone line and modem.
Primary Remote IP Address
Enter the IP Address of the primary remote computer.
Use Secondary
190
Configuration Menus
Select this check box if the user wishes to configure a secondary remote connection. The
secondary remote connection is used only after WIN-911 fails to send the alarm message
to the primary remote machine. WIN-911 will continue to send messages to the
secondary remote machine until the connection is disconnected. The next time WIN-911
receives an alarm, it will try to send to the primary remote machine.
Secondary Remote Dialup Connection (RAS)
Enter the name of the secondary RAS Connection. This Dial-up connection is configured
to connect to the secondary remote computer via telephone line and modem.
Secondary Remote IP Address
Enter the IP Address of the secondary remote computer. IP addresses can only be used
with an 'Always-On' Internet connection, such as cable or DSL.
Attempts
This field configures the number of attempts to be made before failing over to the
secondary connection.
IP Port
This is the TCP port through which the IP connection will be made to the
primary/secondary/local endpoint. Any firewall used must allow connections through this
port.
Local IP Address
Enter the IP address of the local machine. If only RAS connections are being used, the IP
address comes from the RAS connection configured.
Delay Between Attempts (seconds)
This is the number of seconds waited before attempting to send another message after a
failed attempt.
Maximum Idle Time (seconds)
This is the number of seconds to wait for a new alarm before disconnecting from a remote
endpoint. If you are connecting through an always-on connection, WIN-911 will close the
TCP socket. If you are using a RAS connection, WIN-911 will close the TCP socket and
disconnect from the RAS.
Minimum Disconnect Time (seconds)
After disconnecting, WIN-911 will wait this number of seconds before establishing a new
connection to a remote endpoint. This allows a window of time for another application to
access the modem COM port.
Hardware Acquire Delay (seconds)
191
WIN-911 V7.14
When configured to use a RAS Connection on a particular modem, should that modem be
unavailable, WIN-911 will terminate any active connection on the modem in order to send
out an alarm message. The hardware will not immediately become available as the phone
line may still be in use. The hardware acquire delay is the amount of time WIN-911 will
wait before actually attempting to connect.
192
Configuration Menus
Protocol
Transmit Timeout (seconds)
This is the amount of time WIN-911 will attempt to send an alarm across the IP
connection. If transmission is not completed within this amount of time, WIN-911 will
consider the attempt to have failed.
Expected Response
This is the response string expected from the remote endpoint upon receipt of an alarm
message. WIN-911 will not consider the alarm message delivered successfully unless this
string is received. If this field is left empty, then WIN-911 will consider the alarm message
delivered when transmission is completed and will not wait for a response.
193
WIN-911 V7.14
Response Timeout (seconds)
The maximum time to wait for a response to an alarm message. This setting is used only
if an expected response is defined.
Acknowledge Alarm when Expected Response received
If this option is checked, then WIN-911 will acknowledge the alarm sent through the IP
connection when the Expected Response is received. This effectively acknowledges
alarms upon delivery and receipt of delivery. This setting is used only if an Expected
Response is defined.
WIN-911 IP Diagnostic Enabled
This control will enable or disable diagnostic logging, which is useful for debugging issues
with the IP notification module. It is recommended that diagnostic logging not be used
under normal, working circumstances.
Keep-alive Ping
The ping message text may be used to demonstrate to any client application that WIN911 is still connected. It is essentially, a heart beat message. The text is configurable and
may be preceded or followed by the message prefix and suffix as defined on the format
tab.
Use Message Prefix and Suffix
This check box will append any message prefix and suffix to the message string. The
default setting is unchecked.
Note: his setting is shared by the menu item of the same name under the Diagnostic
Logging global menu.
194
Configuration Menus
Format
The format tab's settings determine the format of all alarm messages sent by the IP
Notifier. An alarm message may contain any of the eleven available alarm fields listed
here, arranged in any order. Each field may be padded or truncated to a specified length.
Alarm strings are in the ASCII format and terminated by null characters.
Message Prefix
If supplied, the message prefix text will be appended to the beginning of each alarm
message.
Message Suffix
If supplied, the message suffix text will be appended to the beginning of each alarm
message.
195
WIN-911 V7.14
Date
Use the check box to enable or disable the date field. Select the date field to format the
date's appearance. The format is defined below.
Format
"M" = A single digit representation of the month. (e.g. 1-12)
"MM" = A two digit representation of the month. (e.g. 01-12)
"MMM" = An abbreviated representation of the month (e.g. Jan.)
"MMMM" = The full month name (e.g. January)
"D" = A single digit representation of the day of the month. (e.g. 1-31)
"DD" = A two digit representation of the day of the month. (e.g. 01-31)
"DDD" = An abbreviated representation of the day of the week (e.g. Mon.)
"DDDD" = The full name of the day of the week (e.g. Monday)
"YY" = A two digit representation of the year. (e.g. 08, 09, 10, etc.)
"YYYY" = A four digit representation of the year. (e.g. 2008, 2009, 2010, etc.)
In addition to these 10 date formats, other characters can be used to help format the date.
Any other character configured will appear in the message as it does in the Format text
box. For example: MMM DD, YYYY = Jan. 11, 2009 or M/D/YY = 1/11/09. Use the
Preview button under the Format text box to preview your configured format..
Preview
The preview button is only visible when the date field is enabled and selected. This button
can be used to preview the date format. Note that the preview does not consider minimum
and maximum length options and represents the date string prior to any padding or
truncation.
Time
There are eight available formats for the time field. Examples of the eight selections are
presented below.
HH:MM:SS AM/PM --------------- (e.g. 02:05:30 PM)
HH:MM AM/PM ------------------ (e.g. 02:05 PM)
HH:MM:SS (24 hour) ------------- (e.g. 14:05:30)
HH:MM (24 hour) ------------------ (e.g. 14:05)
HH:MM:SS AM/PM ZONE ------ (e.g. 12:05:30 PM CST)
HH:MM AM/PM ZONE ---------- (e.g. 12:05 PM CST)
HH:MM:SS ZONE (24 hour) ----- (e.g. 14:05:30 CST)
HH:MM ZONE (24 hour) ---------- (e.g. 14:05 CST)
196
Configuration Menus
Tagname
The tagname represents the name of a unique alarm.
Description
The description provides more context for any given alarm.
Value
The value of an alarm can be included in the alarm message. This is the value of the
alarm point at the moment when the alarm was triggered.
Acked By
The "acked by" field lists the user who has acknowledged the alarm. If an Ack Code was
required to acknowledge the alarm, then WIN-911 user will be logged. If no Ack Code was
required, then the current Windows user will be used.
Priority
Each alarm may be assigned one of three priorities: high, medium or low as determined
by your alarm tag's settings. Check this box to pass the priority along in your alarm
message.
Event
The event field indicates the current status of an alarm. A digital alarm may be in one of
the following states:
ALM* = unacknowledged active alarm.
ALM = acknowledged active alarm.
>ALM = unacknowledged return-to-normal alarm (inactive alarm).
OK = acknowledged return -to-normal alarm (inactive alarm).
An analog alarm may be in one of the following states:
*High* (first level high alarm)
*HiHi* (the second or highest alarm)
*Low* (the first low alarm)
*LoLo* (the second or lowest alarm).
When an analog alarm returns to normal without first being acknowledged the event field
reports <High or <<HiHi.
Limit
This is the alarm limit set point.
Units
This is the engineering unit for an analog value.
197
WIN-911 V7.14
Group
The name given to a group of alarms, such as: "Reactor Three".
Label Fields
The "label fields" option is designed to increase the readability of alarm messages. When
enabled, the name of each field will appear before the field's value.
Abbreviate Labels
When "abbreviate labels" is selected, longer field labels will be abbreviated (e.g. "Desc.:"
instead of "Description").
Field Suffix (Delimiter)
The Field Suffix (Delimiter) is used to separate alarm fields. By default, NEWLINE (\n) is
selected. In addition to the fourteen predefined delimiters, users may specify their own
custom delimiter. All custom delimiters will appear in the message exactly as it appears in
the Field Suffix (Delimiter) drop down box. Some delimiters in the list format the message
such as NEWLINE (\n). This delimiter makes each field appear on a new line. Below
explains what will appear in the message when selected.
AMPERSAND (&) = An "&" will be used to separate selected fields.
ASTERISK (*) = An "*" will be used to separate selected fields.
COMMA (,) = A "," will be used to separate selected fields.
DOLLAR ($) = A "$" will be used to separate selected fields.
EXCLAMATION (!) = An "!" will be used to separate selected fields.
LINERETURN (\r\n) = This will separate each selected field with a carriage return - line
feed resulting in each selected field being on a new line.
NEWLINE (\n) = This will separate each selected field with a line feed resulting in each
selected field being on a new line.
NONE () = This will result in nothing separating each selected field. The alarm message
will be concatenated without spaces.
PERIOD (.) = A "." will be used to separate selected fields.
POUND (#) = A "#" will be used to separate selected fields.
RETURN (\r) = This will separate each selected field with a carriage return resulting in
each selected field being on a new line.
SPACE ( ) = A space will be used to separate selected fields.
TAB (\t) = Five spaces will be used to separate selected fields.
TILDE (~) = A "~" will be used to separate selected fields.
Minimum Length
When minimum length is enabled, the field size determines the minimum length of the
currently selected field. If the length of the selected field's value is less than the field size,
then it will be padded with spaces.
Maximum Length
198
Configuration Menus
When maximum length is enabled, the field size determines the maximum length of the
currently selected field. If the length of the selected field's value is greater than the field
size, then it will be truncated to meet the field size.
199
WIN-911 V7.14
Options
Options
These selections will allow the user to customize and tune WIN-911 to meet various
application or performance needs. Upon selecting "Options", you may make modifications
to data initialization, select non-default paths, and adjust Pager and Watchdog Timing
adjustments. Global Direct Connect options are set here as well.
200
Configuration Menus
Paths
By default, Specter Instruments uses the WIN-911 directory for the runtime executable
modules. For the sound files and the historical log files, sub-directories are used. Both of
these selections can be modified by changing the default choices. The example below
shows the default for both the sound files and the alarm history files.
The "Configuration Path" is chosen automatically when you open a selected "*.MDB"
configuration file. The default for the configuration files is a sub-directory named
"Configuration Files".
201
WIN-911 V7.14
Timing
Two types of timing adjustments are available with this option: Paging and Watchdog
Timeouts.
Pagers
Before aborting page:
Enter the seconds that WIN-911 will wait before terminating an alphanumeric dialout
page. The default setting is 5 seconds.
Between initialization returns:
During initialization with the pager service, WIN-911 generates a series of "Carriage
Returns" (CRs) and waits for a response of "ID=". If the pager service requires a slower or
faster sequence of (CRs), the delay time can be modified. The default setting is 2000
milliseconds.
Watchdogs
Default Time-out:
A "Watchdog Alarm" is a type of WIN-911 alarm which monitors the data source. If a
device, DDE Server, or cable is disconnected, an alarm can be sent to the user to warn of
current problem conditions. Each "Watchdog" has a selectable timeout. This option will
202
Configuration Menus
allow the user to change the default setting from 2 minutes to other values. Entries must
be in whole minutes only.
203
WIN-911 V7.14
411
Special Note: When running in Lite Mode, RSView SE Direct Connect, RSView32 Direct
Connect, or FactoryTalk Alarms and Events, WIN-411 Reporting will always be disabled
and the current state of all these settings will be ignored when Scan & Alarm runs.
Do not request confirmation of selected report
Selection of this checkbox bypasses the need for operator confirmation of the report to be
played. The default selection for this checkbox is unchecked.
Do not request confirmation of selected point
Selection of this checkbox bypasses the need for operator confirmation of the point to be
changed. The default selection for this checkbox is unchecked.
Do not request confirmation of data change
Selection of this checkbox bypasses the need for operator confirmation of the new value
to be set. The default selection for this checkbox is unchecked.
Require Watchdog for first item of a Report
Selection of this option will force the first item of each report to be a watchdog type
verification. When this feature is enabled, and the user attempts to access reports, report
204
Configuration Menus
access will not be granted (if the report was defined containing a watchdog and the
watchdog is in the failed state).
205
WIN-911 V7.14
Initialization
These options modify the way WIN-911 is initialized as a client, control DDE error
messages, and offers timing adjustments to allow for large applications to stabilize prior to
initialization.
Runtime Startup Delay
In automatic start-up applications, a delay is often needed to allow the previously
launched data source or hardware to finish initialization prior to a client application starting
its initialization routine. This is most often seen in larger applications. This option gives the
user a way to set a delay before all initialization of Scan & Alarm, including hardware. This
is especially important when running Scan & Alarm as a service. When Scan & Alarm is
configured to run as a service it can initialize before hardware components have time to
start (i.e. Dialogic card).
Start Runtime as Service
Selection of this check box will cause the Scan & Alarm to start as a service. Windows will
need to be restarted in order for the Windows system services to start Scan & Alarm as a
service. When running as a service WIN-911 will be started automatically during the
startup of the operating system and will run in the background regardless of who (if
anybody) is logged in. WIN-911 behaves in much the same way as it does when running
as an application with a few exceptions. For a more detailed explanation of how Scan &
Alarm runs as a service see, WIN911 Configurator.CHM -> Overview ->WIN-911 As a
Service.
206
Configuration Menus
Allow Non-Admin Service Restarts
Selection of this check box will allow a non-administrator to stop and start WIN-911 when
it is running as a Window's service. If this check box is unchecked only users logged in
with Administrative privileges will be able to restart the WIN-911 system.
Start Runtime in Standby (Single Session)
Selection of this check box will cause the Scan & Alarm to start in Standby mode for a
single session. When in standby mode alarm monitoring will occur but no remote
notification will be conducted. This mode of operation is implemented for users wishing to
achieve WIN-911 redundancy. Running the Activate.exe program will change WIN-911's
mode to Active and remote notification will begin. Once WIN-911 has been activated the
check box will clear. You must go back into the configuration and recheck the box to
reset.
Enable DDE Request Upon Initialization
All DDE servers and clients are not alike, and therefore require different initialization
sequences. Selecting this check box will allow WIN-911 to be advised of any change and
then request initial values. By leaving this box unchecked, WIN-911 will only be advised of
a value change.
Log DDE Transaction Failures
The user can choose if he wants to log a DDE transaction failure. Selecting this check box
will enable logging of messages to the configured log file. Leaving it unchecked will ignore
the system generated error mes
207
WIN-911 V7.14
Advanced
Display alarms in Alarm Monitor
This check box will activate the "Monitor" applet when the WIN-911 module is launched.
In the "Monitor" program, you may display either the "Summary Display" or the "History
Display". Selecting the "Summary Display" will show only the alarms which are in alarm
state (both new alarms and acknowledged alarms). Selecting the "History Display" will
show the total history of all alarms since the data base was last cleared up to the user
defined limit (default is 2000). It will give a historical time and date stamped record of
each alarm transition (alarm, acknowledged, and return to normal or "OK").
Note: Any new groups created by a user edit or an import to the configuration will use this
as the default setting for the new group.
Send alarms to Alarm Logger
If this check box is checked, all activity, which would normally show up in the "History
Display", will also be recorded to a log file. Error messages, event logging, call
progression, and acknowledgement information are also logged. A new file is created
daily or monthly, depending on user preference.
Note: Any new groups created by a user edit or an import to the configuration will use this
as the default setting for the new group.
208
Configuration Menus
Send alarms to Alarm Printer
If the "Printer" module is enabled, alarms will be sent to the printer selected in the Printer
Definitions. (See WIN911 Configurator -> Global Menus -> Printer Definition".)
Note: Any new groups created by a user edit or an import to the configuration will use this
as the default setting for the new group.
Send alarms to IP
If the "IP" module is enabled, alarms will be sent to the configured IP address/ RAS
connection defined in the "IP Definition" dialog. (See WIN911 Configurator -> Global
Menus -> WIN911 IP".)
Note: Any new groups created by a user edit or an import to the configuration will use this
as the default setting for the new group.
Enable Local Annunciation
If a sound card is present in the system, you may choose to Enable the Audio
Annunciation features in WIN-911.
Note: Any new groups created by a user edit or an import to the configuration will use this
as the default setting for the new group.
Use Tagname for Item
Selecting this box will cause the "Tagname" to be copied directly into the item name. This
is useful when connecting to other tag oriented programs like Wonderware InTouch, GE
FIX, or RSView SE, etc.
Note: Any new tags created by a user edit or an import to the configuration will use this as
the default setting for the new tag.
Auto Ack on Return to Normal
Selecting this radio button will cause the alarm to automatically acknowledge as it returns
to normal. This option removes the requirement that the associated alarm be responded
to by a person in the event that no one has acknowledged the alarm at the time it returns
to a normal condition. Experiment with all three of these option boxes to get the results
you desire.
Note: Any new tags created by a user edit or an import to the configuration will use this as
the default setting for the new tag.
Use Is/Was
In some cases, using the "Is / Was" sound will not make sense. Selecting the check-box
next to "Use Is / Was" will activate its use. Leaving the check-box blank will omit its use.
An example of this sound would be "The Pump IS on".
Note: Any new tags created by a user edit or an import to the configuration will use this as
the default setting for the new tag.
209
WIN-911 V7.14
Enable Changes by Operator (Digital or Analog)
This check box will allow changes to this alarm or status point. If this check box is left
unchecked, changes will not be allowed. Note: Change by Operator is not supported by
Filter tags.
Note: Enable changes by operator will always be disabled and ignored in Lite mode.
Note: Any new tags created by a user edit or an import to the configuration will use this as
the default setting for the new tag.
Enable Long Tagnames
This check box will only need to be checke if WIN-911 has an error while searching for
lengthy tagnames. The checked box will prevent this error but, it will also slow down the
search time considerable.
Note: Uses this as the default database search method for the WIN-911 Configurator.
210
Configuration Menus
FIX
FIX Program Path
Use of the "Direct Connect" option with GE's FIX will require providing WIN-911 with the
location of the HMI package. The field provided allows the user a choice between
manually entering the path, or using the "Browse" button to invoke the "Select FIX
Directory" dialog box to define the path.
Alarm Queue
WUserQ1, WUserQ2, or AlmUserQ can be selected to pass data to WIN-911 by choosing
the appropriate radio button.
AlmUserQ Name must be declared by WIN-911 and when the AlmUserQ radio button is
selected this text box is enabled. The default name is "TeleDAC" (case sensitive), but the
user may name it anything up to sixteen characters.
Note: Specter Instruments recommends iFIX Dynamics users only use AlmUserQ rather
than either of the WUserQ's.
Special Note for AlmUserQ: The following command line argument must be entered in the
Configure Tasks list in the SCU: /nTeleDAC
Security
211
WIN-911 V7.14
Enable Security checkbox configures WIN-911 for iFIX security features. Text boxes are
provided for the iFIX security Login Name and Password.
Note: Be sure the user login used here can write to all alarm groups. If not,
acknowledgements originating within WIN-911 will not be honored by iFIX.
Alarm on any communications failure
Selection of the "Alarm on any communications failure" checkbox will allow dial-out alarm
processing in the event of a communications failure. If this checkbox is not selected,
alarm processing for communication failures will be prohibited.
212
Configuration Menus
RSView SE
These are the Global Options for the RSView SE Direct Connect.
The RSView tab of the Global Options allows the user to select the Alarm Severity Filter
and Dynamic Properties for the RSView SE Direct Connect data. These are global
settings that apply to all RSView SE Data Sources.
Alarm Severity Filter
The range of alarm severity that WIN-911 will monitor is selected through this pull-down
menu. All alarms falling outside of the selected filter will be ignored. Level one severity is
the most severe.
Dynamic Properties
The RSView SE Direct Connect is designed to allow as much seamless integration
between Rockwell and WIN-911 as possible. This includes receiving as much information
from RSView SE as possible dynamically during runtime, thus preventing the need to
redundantly and statically configure information in WIN-911. However, instances can arise
where this is not desired or possible.
All Dynamic Options: Globally enables all dynamic functions (default setting).
Tag Sounds: Dynamic Tag Sounds is the preferred mode of WIN-911 audio annunciation.
It uses a two tiered hierarchy of optional text sources to build the audio message at
runtime. The first choice of a text source for the Tag Sound extraction is the RSView Tag
213
WIN-911 V7.14
Description. This text will be provided to WIN-911 during runtime as the data is passed
from RSView SE. If the RSView Tag Description is undefined then WIN-911 will use the
WIN-911 Tag Sound which is statically defined in the WIN-911 configuration file. When
both sound text sources are undefined no sound will be generated.
Description: Dynamic descriptions accept description text from RSView during runtime as
alarms occur and are passed to WIN-911. When static descriptions are configured or
dynamic text is not available then WIN-911 uses the text defined in the alarm Base
Definition.
Analog State Sounds: Dynamic Analog State Sounds are generated by reading text
strings acquired from RSView during runtime as the data is passed from RSView to WIN911. This string is called the "Threshold Label." If the Threshold Label is not available
when the alarm data is passed, then WIN-911 falls back to the Analog Sound text that is
statically defined in the WIN-911 configuration (Analog Definition, Sounds tab). When the
check box is left unchecked then the RSView Threshold Label is ignored and only the text
in WIN-911 is used.
Note: If both the dynamic and static analog state sounds are undefined WIN-911 will use
a hard coded string of "Threshold X" for alarm state annunciation, where "X" is a variable
of 1 through 8 representing the actual level.
Digital State Sounds: Dynamic Digital State Sounds are generated by reading text strings
acquired from RSView during runtime as the data is passed from RSView to WIN-911.
This string is called the "Alarm Label." If the Alarm Label is not available when the alarm
data is passed, then WIN-911 falls back to the Digital Sound text that is statically defined
in the WIN-911 configuration (Digital Definition, Sounds tab). When the check box is left
unchecked then the RSView Alarm Label is ignored and only the text in WIN-911 is used.
Priority: Dynamic priority accepts severity level data from RSView during runtime as
alarms occur and are passed to WIN-911. When the alarm priority is configured statically
WIN-911 sets the priority during configuration development and it is not modifiable at
runtime.
Units: Dynamically configured units accept unit text from RSView during runtime as
alarms occur and are passed to WIN-911. When the engineering units are defined
statically they are set in the WIN-911 Configurator during development in the Analog
Alarm Base Definition tab and are not modifiable during runtime.
214
Configuration Menus
Wonderware
Wonderware InTouch Program Path
Use of the "Direct Connect" option with Wonderware's InTouch will require providing WIN911 with the location of the HMI package. The field provided allows the user a choice
between manually entering the path, or using the "Browse" button to invoke the "Select
Wonderware InTouch Directory" dialog box to define the path.
215
Configuration Menus
Configure Menu
These buttons are used to define the specific configuration information for a single
application (either WIN-911 or WIN-411). All changes made to Configuration information
is stored in the "*.MDB" file.
217
WIN-911 V7.14
Schedule Definitions
The list of defined schedules is shown here. If you wish to create a new schedule from
scratch, select "New". You may edit existing schedules by either double clicking or
highlighting the name and selecting the "Edit" button. You may have an unlimited number
of schedules.
The default "Always (24 hours - All week)" schedule is shown below.
Here you will notice that the schedule configuration sheet utilizes a combination of a
repeating cycle distributed across as many weeks as required superimposed on a
calendar. You may name the "Duty Schedule" to fit your application.
Note: Time is defined using a 24-hour time convention. The Start Time must come before
the End Time.
218
WIN-911 Runtime
Phonebook
Phonebook
All WIN-911 users are defined in the Phonebook, along with their contact methods,
access codes and schedule assignments. The following sections discuss the creation of
users and their notification connections.
219
WIN-911 V7.14
Phonebook Entry to Edit
If no names have previously been configured, select "New". You may edit existing names
by either double-clicking or highlighting the name and selecting the "Edit" button.
220
WIN-911 Runtime
Name Definition
This screen contains the definition for the user Tom Jones. His access code,
acknowledgement code and all of his connections are defined here.
Connections are ordered. Use the Move Up and Move Down buttons to arrange the order
in which your user's connections will be attempted.
Name
The Name is a unique identifier for the person that will have Group access. This name is
later found in a list box for selection purposes. Each name in the phone book can have
three options for customizing an initiated call. The options include: phone numbers;
choice of E-Mail, SMS, Voice, or Pager service; and Duty Schedule. Each phone or pager
number also has its own selection for: number of retries, delay between retries, and a
delay between this and the next phone number. The alarms to be directed to the dial-out
connections are selected in the Group Definition section of the configuration.
Name Sound
The user Name Sound is essentially a verbalization of the user name to be used in the
"Voice" dial-out operation. As with any other sounds, the sounds are selected from a
dialog box. A typical message might be "A message for Mr. Smith...". If your application is
for 411 only, or Voice Pager, user name sound is ignored. User name sounds are not
required.
Access Code
The Access Code is a unique numeric code (maximum of 15 digits) that is entered by the
user before alarm messages are provided over the telephone. This ensures that only
authorized persons receive the alarm status reports.
221
WIN-911 V7.14
Zero Access Code
The prompt for an Access Code may be disabled by configuring a user in the Phonebook
with an Access Code of zero. This is only possible when using a Dialogic board. The
prompt will not be disabled when using a TAPI voice modem.
When a user in the Phonebook has an access code of zero, the access code prompt is
bypassed and WIN-911 assumes that all subsequent dial-outs and call-ins are to the user
with an Access Code of zero. As a result, this user must be in all groups if alarms for
those groups are to be announced during a voice call.
When an alarm is acknowledged, an Acknowledgement Code must still be entered. This
code may belong to any user in your Phonebook. If your Phonebook contains duplicate
Acknowledgement Codes, then it is always assumed that the user who is acknowledging
an alarm is the first user in the Phonebook alphabetically.
Note: This feature may allow security breaches to occur. Do not use this feature when
liability or safety is an issue.
Anyone (no code)
If a user name of "Anyone (no code)" (case sensitive) is defined, the access code will be
requested, but a "#" key with no code will allow access, and an acknowledge code will be
requested, but a "#" key with no code will acknowledge alarms. There still must be a
unique Access Code entered in the phone Book of the configuration, but it will be
transparent to the user when he/she interacts with the system.
Note: This feature may allow security breaches to occur. Do not use this feature when
liability or safety is an issue.
Duplicate Access Code
Multiple user names using the same access code can be configured. However, during the
processing of inbound and outbound calls, WIN-911 will not be able to distiguish which
user is calling in and WIN-911 will assume that the user calling is the first person in
alphabetical order that has that Access Code assigned to it. Reusing access codes in not
recommended.
Note: This feature may allow security breaches to occur. Do not use this feature when
liability or safety is an issue.
Acknowledge Code
The Acknowledge Code is a required numeric code (maximum of 15 digits) used to
acknowledge an alarm condition, and can be used for local password entry. The
combination of the user name and Ack code can be used to ensure that alarms are
recognized by the appropriate persons if configured to be unique.
222
WIN-911 Runtime
Connection Definition
Select New or Edit to display the Connection Definition dialog.
Connection
The first selection is a drop down list box to determine the type of connection.
Note: Lite Mode only permits one type of connection to be configured per application.
Phone Number
If the connection is defined as Voice, Voice Pager, Numeric Pager, SMS Message, or
Dialout Announcer, this field contains the telephone number to be dialed. If Alphanumeric
Pager is chosen, this field will contain the pager service number designed to accept
incoming calls from modems. This is the dispatch number that the Pager Service will
assign for automatic computer message dial-ups.
Pager PIN
If Alphanumeric, Local Alpha, or Local Numeric Pager is chosen, this is where the
individual pager PIN number is entered. The maximum size of this number is 255 digits.
The number may include embedded Hayes commands such as "wait" and "pause".
Consult the modem manual for specific information. This field will be inactive for any other
type of connection.
223
WIN-911 V7.14
E-Mail
If E-Mail is chosen, enter the address of your contact here. You may send an E-Mail to
multiple addresses by separating each address by a semicolon.
The address field is limited to 255 characters. If your e-mail addresses exceed that, you
may place them in a text file. Each address should be separated by a newline. The text
file must have an extension of .txt and must be placed in the root directory of your WIN911 folder. By default this is: C:\Program Files\Specter Instruments\WIN-911 V7\. For
example, you may place several addresses, each on their own individual line, in a file
called "emails.txt." The file should then be placed in the root WIN-911 folder and the Email field should read "emails.txt" When a message is sent to that contact, emails.txt is
opened and then each address in the file would be sent the same message. The number
of addresses you may send to is limited only by your SMTP server.
Device ID
The Device ID is required to send messages to mobile devices using the Mobile-911
application. This serves as a sort of phone number or address so that Mobile-911's push
notifications can be routed to your device. Retrieve this number from the Mobile-911
application by navigating to your settings screen. Tap the Send Device ID button and an
email will be composed that contains the Device ID. Send the ID to yourself so that you
may copy and paste the ID from your email client.
Country Code
If an SMS Message connection is defined, this field contains the contact's country code
prefix. The country code for the United States and Canada is 1.
Number of Retries
If the phone or pager service is busy, not answering, or is answered by an answering
service, (Access Code was not entered), do you want to retry this number prior to going to
the next listed number or next person in the "Phone Book"? Or, if the e-mail service does
not send back a successful response, do you want to retry this e-mail address prior to
going to the next listed number or person in the "Phone Book"? Or, if the SMS module is
unable to send your message (e.g. signal strength too low), do you want to retry sending
the message prior to going to the next listed number? A value of "0" in this box will only
dial the number one time. A value of "3" (or any non-zero number) would retry this
number an additional three times (or equal to the integer in the box). Not all connection
types support retries.
Delay Between Retries
This is the number of minutes or seconds to wait before trying a connection again.
Delay Between Same Connection Type
Delay Between Same Connection Type is the number of minutes or seconds to wait
before trying the next connection of the same type. If you wish to separate each SMS, email, or other connection by five minutes, you would need to configure a five minute delay
224
WIN-911 Runtime
between each connection. The important thing to note is that the delay is between the
next connection of the same type, and not the next connection.
The Duty Schedule
Each connection may have a unique schedule for selecting the day or days that each
connection is valid, along with the starting time and stopping time for each day. The
number is dialed only on valid days and times. If more than one number is valid, each
valid number is called.
Note: A pre-existing, unacknowledged alarm will not be dialed out to a single user if
he/she comes on-duty after that Item has gone into an alarm condition. If the Group has
other users which were on call at the time of the alarm and the call-out is still in progress,
he/she will be added to the call out list.
Selecting a Duty Schedule
A list box selection will allow choices of pre-configured duty schedules. If you do not find a
schedule which fits your needs for this number, you may edit or add additional duty
schedules using the Schedule Definition discussed in the previous section.
225
WIN-911 V7.14
Data Source Definitions
Data can be served to WIN-911 generically or by custom data services where WIN-911 is
the client. OPC and DDE are the generic modes of data service and Direct Connect is the
custom data service available to meet the needs of the user. For more specific details
about the Data Source Definition see the data source's corresponding .CHM file in the
WIN-911 Help Library.
Select the Data Source Type
The "Data Source Type" list box shows all available data source connections. The user
specifies the data source by selecting one in the list. The user is then brought to a the
"Data Source Options" window. For more details about the "Data Source Options"
window, see the data source's corresponding .CHM file in the WIN-911 Help Library.
Data Source Definition to Edit
226
WIN-911 Runtime
The "Data Source Definition to Edit" window shows all configured data sources. Selecting
"Edit" or double-clicking on the "Access Name" will bring you back to the corresponding
"Data Source Options" window.
227
WIN-911 V7.14
Group Definitions
Group Definitions
This button is used to build "Groups". Groups are used to associate information with
people. Each data tag (alarm or information) is assigned to one group (and one group
only). A Group can have any number of data tags assigned to it. Each group has its own
Contact List that assigns people from the phone book and the order they are to be
contacted in. With this functionality you can organize your remote alarm notification
tasking in a compartmental fashion with different people (or teams) assigned to different
alarms (or alarm areas).
An example of an effective Group strategy might be a city water system that is composed
of a network of lift stations scattered throughout the city. If the city is large, you may need
to organize your groups into lift stations, with different people assigned to each lift station.
Group Definition to Edit
If a "Group" has not previously been configured, select "New". You may edit existing
"Groups" by either double clicking on or highlighting the name and selecting the edit
button. You may have an unlimited number of groups.
Selecting the "New", "Edit", or "Copy" button from the "Group Definition to Edit" brings you
to the "Group Definition" dialog.
Group Definition
A selection of the "Fresh Water Storage" group in the above example will bring up the
"Group Definition" dialog box. You may have an unlimited number of groups. For
example, you may want a separate group per lift station in a wastewater application.
It is with this dialog box that you can decide which alarms are to be "audible" and which
shall be merely displayed on the video monitor and logged to the printer. This step also
defines which alarms will be routed to the dial-up options. You may also use different
groups to "direct" which alarms are routed to the supervisor and which are simply
reported to the operators. Each alarm may only be used with one group. Applications,
228
WIN-911 Runtime
which require that the same alarm be assigned to several "Groups", will require you to
configure the same alarm with a different "Tagname" but with the same "Item Name".
229
WIN-911 V7.14
Base Definition
Group Name
This is a unique name used to identify the group. This name may be used in alarm
messages if desired. This name will appear in a pull down list box for future "Group"
selection. Note that if the name is changed after it is assigned to a specific data point, the
name change will be shown automatically.
Special Note for Numeric Pager Users
If a group reference number is needed in a numeric representation alarm, include it in the
group name with square brackets, such as: Lift Station [22]. The numeric pager option will
strip the alpha characters and send the numeric.
Display alarms in Alarm Monitor
This check box will activate the "Monitor" module when the WIN-911 module is launched.
In the "Monitor" window, you may display either the "Summary Display" or the "History
Display". Selecting the "Summary Display" will show only the alarms which are in alarm
state (both unacknowledged alarms and acknowledged alarms). Selecting the "History
Display" will show the total history up to the user defined limit (default 2000) of all alarms
and WIN-911 activities since Scan & Alarm was last started. It will give a historical time
and date stamped record of each alarm transition (alarm, acknowledged, and return to
normal or "OK").
Send alarms to Alarm Logger
230
WIN-911 Runtime
If this check box is checked, all activity, which would normally show up in the "History
Display", will also be recorded to a log file. By default, all log files are stored in the
"C:\Program Files\Specter Instruments\WIN-911 V7\Log Files" directory. Error messages,
event logging, call progression, and acknowledgement information are also logged. A new
file is created daily or monthly, depending on user preference.
Send alarms to Alarm Printer
If the "Printer" module is enabled, alarms will be sent to the printer configured in the
"Printer Definition" dialog.
Send alarms to IP
If the "IP" module is enabled, alarms will be sent to the configured IP address/ RAS
connection defined in the "IP Definition" dialog.
Pop-Up Alarms
A selection of a "Pop-Up Alarm" for the group will cause one of the following reactions for
any alarm condition in this group.
None
A selection of "None" will disable the "Pop-Up" feature for this group of alarms.
Summary List on New Unacked
If a "Pop-Up Alarms" selection of "Summary List on New Unacked" is made, any new
unacknowledged alarms will cause the Monitor (Summary) view to appear over any other
window. If the Monitor program is minimized, the view will be restored to the last location
and size. The display option must also be selected.
Summary List on Any Change
If a "Pop-Up Alarms" selection of "Summary List on Any Change" is made, any alarm
(including a return to normal) will cause the Monitor (Summary) view to appear over any
other window. If the Monitor window is minimized, the window will be restored to the last
size. The display option must also be selected.
Box
If the "Pop-Up Alarms Box" option is checked, any new unacknowledged alarms will
appear in its own individual pop-up dialog box. The dialog box will appear over any other
window and will disappear when the alarm is acknowledged. If this option is used, it is
recommended that the WIN-911 Monitor run as a minimized window. The display option
must also be selected.
231
WIN-911 V7.14
Contact List
Even though "Phone Book" names are selected here for remote dial-outs, it is important
to realize that WIN-911 creates a different queue for each connection type. Therefore, it
is possible for WIN-911 to be making an alphanumeric or numeric page and/or e-mail at
the same time it is making a voice dial-out alarm call.
Available Name List
The "Available Name List" contains all the contacts previously defined with in the "Phone
Book Definitions".
Selected Name List
The "Selected Name List" contains the "selected" names, which are assigned for this
group. To select a name, highlight the desired name and click on the "Add" button. To
remove a name from the "Selected Name List", highlight the desired name and click on
the "Remove" button. You may place the same person in the list more than once. The
location of the name in the list determines the order of alarm notification attempts. You
may organize the list in any desired order by using the "Move Up" and "Move Down"
Buttons. Phone numbers, retries, and retry delays are found in the "Phone Book."
232
WIN-911 Runtime
Contact Delays
Delay Before First Voice Call
"Delay Before First Voice Call" is used to allow time for an alarm to be acknowledged
locally before any voice calls are made. This time is expressed in either minutes or
seconds, depending on the selection from the pull down list box. This setting is
independent of the paging and e-mail delays.
Note: For voice calls there is only one delay timer, which is started with the generation of
an alarm. If a second alarm is generated during the timeout, the timer will be reset for the
callouts to begin. Configuring a long delay creates a situation conducive for a randomly
extended delay before voice calls commence.
Delay After Last Voice Call
"Delay After Last Voice Call" is used to select one of two possible options: 1) Single pass
through the contact list, or 2) Continuous cycling through the group contact list until
alarm(s) are acknowledged. A value of "0" will select a single cycle. Any other integer
value will select continuous cycling and the delay time in minutes or seconds, depending
on the selection from the pull down list box. This setting is independent of the paging and
e-mail delays.
Delay Before First Page, E-Mail, SMS and/or Mobile-911
"Delay Before First Page, E-Mail, SMS and/or Mobile-911" is used to allow time for an
alarm to be acknowledged before any pages, e-mails, SMS, or Mobile-911 messages are
233
WIN-911 V7.14
made. This time is expressed in minutes or seconds, depending on the selection from the
pull down list box. This setting is independent of the voice delays.
Delay After Last Page, E-Mail, SMS and/or Mobile-911
"Delay After Last Page, E-Mail, SMS and/or Mobile-911" is used to select one of two
possible options: 1) A single pass through the contact list, or 2) Continuous cycling
through the group contact list until the alarm(s) is acknowledged. A value of "0" will select
a single cycle. Any other integer value will select continuous cycling and the delay time in
minutes or seconds, depending on the selection from the pull down list box. This setting
is independent of the voice delays.
Special Note: You must specify a Delay After period greater than zero if you wish to
repeat the contacts in the contact list. If a zero is entered, the list is only contacted once.
234
WIN-911 Runtime
Group Poke
The "Group Poke" is used to send ASCII alarm messages to a DDE/OPC server. If the
DDE/OPC address is used by an application program, the alarm messages can be used
as any other ASCII string within the program. Some HMI software packages have the
ability to build "script language programming". Using this feature will allow WIN-911 to
acknowledge alarms in the HMI display, or to send an acknowledgement to a driver or
field device (such as a PLC).
Access
This field is a pull down list that contains all previously defined Data Source Access
Names for data sources which support Group Pokes.
Item
The "Item" field defines the "Item" that will receive the ASCII message containing the
alarm string. The alarm string is configured in the "Data Poke Definitions" under the
"Group Poke" tab. (see, WIN911 Configurator.CHM -> WIN-911 Global Menus -> Data
Poke for details.) The message will change immediately each time a new alarm state
change occurs for that group. Note that only unacknowledged alarms will actually be sent.
If more than one alarm occurs in that group, the message will cycle every 30 seconds
(default value) to effectively scroll through all alarms in the selected alarm group. If all of
the alarms in this group are acknowledged, a "global string" is sent to the DDE/OPC
address, thus overwriting the alarm string. If the user wants to change the message cycle
time, or design a custom message to be sent in place of the "Global Group Ack Text", the
default settings must be modified in the "Data Poke Definitions".
235
WIN-911 V7.14
Special Note: This function is used for remote acknowledgement from within data source
software or display of alarms for remote messaging systems. The data type for the tag
used must be an ASCII string and must not be read only. This tag is not part of the
Analog, Digital, Filter, or Watchdog address.
Group Poke - Interfacing 3rd Party Software
The "Group Poke" functions as a "Client" that will both read and write a DDE/OPC
message. This will make it possible for a "third party" application to "Acknowledge" any
WIN-911 Alarm Group. The purpose of the Group Poke is to receive acknowledgements
from the applications software to WIN-911 or notify the applications software of new
alarms.
It is quite often desirable to closely couple the graphics HMI software and WIN-911. Since
WIN-911 is a generic solution to alarm management and telephonic data acquisition, a
simple, universal interface between the two applications is made possible by the group
poke transfer. This is configured as part of the "Group Definition" and is used to send
alarm messages to a DDE/OPC server. If the HMI package has the ability to interpret
ASCII strings and logically react to the string values (sometimes called "Script Language
Programming"), the HMI software can interact with WIN-911. Using this feature will allow
WIN-911 to acknowledge alarms via the HMI display or to send an acknowledgement to a
driver or field device (such as a PLC).
To Send Alarms or "GROUP ACKED" from WIN-911 to the Applications Software:
Configure a "Data Poke" with a valid data link to the target applications software. This tag
must be created and should be reserved within the application software for the purpose of
receiving a text string. When an alarm occurs (which is assigned to this Group), WIN-911
will send the alarm message string to the Application's data address. The format and
structure of the Data Poke message must be defined. To define the format of the transfer
message go to the "Data Poke Defintions" from the main WIN-911 Configurator. There
are nine fields available which may be selected for transmission, including time and date.
(see WIN911 Configurator -> WIN-911 Global Menus -> Data Poke -> Format for more
details.)
If more than one alarm has occurred for that "Group", the ASCII Messages for all active
alarms will be transferred at a given cycle rate, effectively rotating the messages
displayed in the application software. The time period for this rotation is defaulted to 30
seconds, but can be changed by a setting in the Message Cycle Time on the "Data Poke
Definition's" "Group" tab. If all alarms in the "Group" are "Acknowledged", the global
Acknowledge text string is sent to the Application's data address. If the user wants to
change the scroll time, or edit the global Ack text string to be sent in place of the "GROUP
ACKED", see WIN911 Configurator -> WIN-911 Global Menus -> Data Poke -> Format for
more details.
To Send an "Ack" from the Applications Software to WIN-911:
When an Acknowledgement occurs within the HMI application software, the Application
must write the text string "Ack" (case sensitive) to the data tag name. WIN-911 monitors
all Data Poke tags and when the "Ack" is detected, WIN-911 will acknowledge all alarms
within that Group. After acknowledgement occurs within WIN-911, WIN-911 will send a
"GROUP ACKED" string (or custom message) to the data tag. This process will notify the
236
WIN-911 Runtime
application that the alarms have been acknowledged and clear the application, making it
ready for the next alarm condition.
Note: Do not use a single data address (TAG) in an HMI for more than one WIN-911
Group or for any other purpose.
Examples
If an alarm occurs in WIN-911, an ASCII alarm description is sent to the application
software from WIN-911 to the designated tag within the application software. When the
alarm is acknowledged within Scan & Alarm, WIN-911 sends an "all clear" message in the
form of the Global Group Ack Text to replace the alarm description in the application
software.
The application software can also acknowledge the alarm and transfer the
acknowledgement back to WIN-911 by writing a literal ASCII string containing the three
letter sequence of "Ack" (case sensitive) to the tag within the application software. WIN911 will read the "Ack" message, acknowledge the alarm(s) within that Group, and then
poke the user defined acknowledgement message (Global Group Ack Text).
237
WIN-911 V7.14
Sound
The Sound tab of the Group Definition dialog will associate a group sound and allow local
sound to be activated at the runtime computer. In many applications, the operators may
not be constantly watching the HMI/SCADA software. If an alarm occurs, much time may
expire before a visual alarm is noticed. The Sound option on WIN-911 will alert the local
operator of an alarm condition, which will then prompt attention.
Group Sound
The Group Sound is essentially a verbalization (or sound effect) of the Group name to be
used in both the audio annunciation and voice telephone connections. As with any other
sounds, the sounds are selected from a dialog box. Another example of a common
"Group Sound" is a siren, or alert horn.
Announcer Enabled
If a sound card is present in the system, you may choose to Enable the Audio
Annunciation features in WIN-911. Audio alarms are composed of several selected
sounds, which are automatically strung together to form a message. The format of a
complete audio alarm message is: GROUP SOUND + TAG SOUND + "IS / WAS" +
CONDITION SOUND + ACTIVE STATE SOUND. Any one of the six parts can be turned
off to fit your unique application. A typical example of a verbal alarm message is:
"Conveyor Number 4", "Selector Arm", "Is", "Jammed", "and is", "Active". To continue the
example: You might have 10 conveyor systems that are identical. To offer the same
alarming capability to each one, you would only need to create 10 "Group Sounds"
(Conveyor 1 through Conveyor 10) and create 10 groups of alarms. However, if you
wanted all 10 conveyors to use the same paging or telephone list, then you would need to
238
WIN-911 Runtime
have unique TAG sounds identifying each conveyor and possibly disabling the "Group"
sound. All 10 alarms would be assigned to the same group.
Repeat Enable / Duration
The Group Definition also gives you the choice of repeating the audio announcement of
unacknowledged alarms. Selecting a "0" in the edit field will disable the repeat feature. A
selection of "5" in the "Repeat" edit field "Minutes" in the Minutes/Seconds spinner will
cause any unacknowledged alarm to be announced every 5 minutes (or seconds), until
acknowledged.
Special Note: You must specify a Repeat period greater than zero if you wish to repeat
the announcements for this group. If a zero is selected, the group is only announced
once.
239
WIN-911 V7.14
Filter Definitions
Filter Definition
This button is used to define all filter points. Filter tags consist of both digital and analog
points. Filter tags are different from statically configured Digital, Analog and Watchdog
tags in that no import is necessary. Filter tags subscribe to alarms on the fly depending on
the criteria configured. Criteria is configured at both the data source level (Global Options)
and tag level (Filter Definition). Filter tags are configured using this button.
Note: Filter Tags are not supported by all data sources. See the data source's
corresponding .CHM help file in the WIN-911 Help Library for more details on Filter
Definitions.
Filter Definition to Edit
"Alarms" are arranged by "Groups". Using the pull down list box, select the "Group" that
the new or existing alarm is assigned. Only the alarms associated with the "Group" will be
listed. You may select the appropriate "Group" by the pull-down list box, or select "All
Groups".
After selecting the specific "Group" or selecting "All Groups", you are ready to add or
modify digital alarms.
240
WIN-911 Runtime
Selecting "New", "Edit", "Copy" or double-clicking on the "Filter Tag" will bring up the Filter
Definition window.
241
WIN-911 V7.14
Base Definition
Tagname
The WIN-911 Filter Tagname is a symbolic tool that allows the user to assign names to a
Filter tag or group of tags that are created by the tags filters and properties. It should be
kept in mind that this is WIN-911's name for the Filter alarm point or points not the data
sources.
Filter
The "Filter" allows you to subscribe to a specific set of alarms. This can be done by
clicking the Edit Filter button. The Edit Filter button opens up the data source's Filter
dialog. The Filter dialog allows the user to configure filters using data and syntax specific
to supported data sources. See the data source's corresponding .CHM help file in the
WIN-911 Help Library for more details on the Filter dialog and Filter Syntax.
Group Name
Alarms are organized by groups for reporting out-of-tolerance conditions. You have by
now created a unique digital alarm or point. You must choose a predefined "Group" to
specify the reporting actions for this alarm. (Remember, you have already selected a
group name, specifying the reporting options and an optional sound for this group.) A
242
WIN-911 Runtime
review of the "Group" button is not a bad idea here. To select another "Group", click on
the drop-down arrow with the cursor and choose. You may change the Group assignment
(move the tag to another group) simply by selecting another defined "Group" from the
drop down list box.
Alarm Type
Filter tags can monitor both Digital and Analog tags. If supported by the configured data
source, the Alarm Type drop down menu allows the user to specify the type of alarm the
Filter tag subscribes to. By default Any Alarm is selected.
Use Is / Was
In some cases, using the "Is / Was" sounds will not make sense. If supported by the
configured data source, selecting the check-box next to "Use Is / Was" will activate its
use. Leaving the check-box blank will omit its use. An example of this sound would be
"The Entry Door IS open".
Access Name
The "Access Name" is used to select a predefined data conversation from the list of
supported sources defined in the "Data Source Definitions".
Automatic Acknowledgement
Never
Selecting this radio button will require a manual acknowledgement of the alarm.
On Alarm
Selecting this radio button will cause the alarm to automatically become "Acknowledged"
as it enters into an alarm condition. This option would allow audio reports of an alarm's
current condition without initiating other reporting options listed in the "Group". If this
option is active, the message (going into an alarm condition) will not generate "Pop-Up"
alarm messages or any of the remote notification options. Because the alarm is
automatically acknowledged, the message coming back to a normal state would indicate
that the condition is in the normal mode. The "Was" message would never be used.
On Return To Normal
Selecting this radio button will cause the alarm to automatically acknowledge as it returns
to normal. This option removes the requirement that the associated alarm be responded
to by a person in the event that no one has acknowledged the alarm at the time it returns
to a normal condition. Experiment with all three of these options to get the results you
desire.
243
WIN-911 V7.14
Setup
These settings are not supported by all data sources. Refer to the help document for you
data source.
Digital Alarm and Normal Labels
These text strings are generic labels for the Filter Digital Alarm and Normal conditions.
Digital Priority
Alarm Priorities (Data Source) and Alarm Priorities (WIN-911) accomplish much the same
thing by sorting alarm message urgency in a way that ensures the alarm with higher
urgency gets priority in the remote notification sequence. Higher priority alarms will go to
the front of the line in the contact sequence while alarms with the same priority are
handled on a first come first serve basis.
For more details on Digital Alarm Priority mapping see the data source's corresponding
.CHM help file in the WIN-911 Help Library.
Analog Alarm Setpoint Enables
"Analog Alarm Setpoints" are enabled and disabled using the four corresponding
checkboxes. Since different data sources can have different ways for configuring
setpoints and thresholds WIN-911 must map these thresholds to four setpoints. For more
244
WIN-911 Runtime
details on Analog Alarm Setpoint mapping see the data source's corresponding .CHM
help file in the WIN-911 Help Library.
Analog Alarm Setpoint Priorities
Alarm Priorities (Data Source) and Alarm Priorities (WIN-911) accomplish much the same
thing by sorting alarm message urgency in a way that ensures the alarm with higher
urgency gets priority in the remote notification sequence. Higher priority alarms will go to
the front of the line in the contact sequence while alarms with the same priority are
handled on a first come first serve basis.
For more details on Analog Alarm Setpoint Priority mapping see the data source's
corresponding .CHM help file in the WIN-911 Help Library.
Number of Decimal Places
WIN-911 supports two types of analog data types: "Integer" or "Floating Point". WIN-911
supports: a) 32 bit signed integer values, and b) 32 bit IEEE floating point values. Note:
Acceptable Floating Point numbers (without round-off errors) are 3.4 e38, or a resolution
of 7 digits. Values beyond seven digits will exhibit round-off errors. "Integer Data Type" is
the default type and represented as "0" "Number of Decimal Places". To select "Floating
Point", select the "Number of Decimal Places" to something other than "0".
Engineering Units
The "Engineering Units" field is an optional text string which identifies the engineering
units a value represents. Analog values may be scaled and displayed as real world units
of measure.
245
WIN-911 V7.14
Tag Sound
The "Tag Sound" is essentially a verbalization of the "Tagname" to be used in the audio
annunciation. As with any other sounds, the sounds are selected from a dialog box. This
sound is required for any voice connection. Note that not all data sources support the tag
sound; see the data source's corresponding .CHM help file in the WIN-911 Help Library
for more details concerning Filter Tag Sounds
.
246
WIN-911 Runtime
Digital Sound
Sounds are essentially a verbalization of the alarm description and the "Alarm" and
"Normal" sound to be used in the audio annunciation. As with any other sounds, the
sounds are selected from a dialog box. Note that not all data sources support these digital
sounds. Refer to the help documentation for your data source.
Digital Alarm & Normal Sound
These sounds are the verbalization of the Alarm and Normal conditions. See the data
source's corresponding .CHM help file in the WIN-911 Help Library for more details
concerning Digital Alarm & Normal Sound.
247
WIN-911 V7.14
Analog Sound
Note that not all data sources support these analog sounds. Refer to the help
documentation for your data source.
Analog Alarm & Normal Sounds
A specific sound can be configured for each of the alarm conditions. These sounds are
normally the verbalization of the phrases "...above the threshold alarm", "...below the
threshold alarm". In addition, there is a return to normal sound which may be the phrase
"in the normal range".
Engineering Unit Sound
The "Engineering Units" field is an optional sound which identifies the engineering units a
value represents. Analog values may be scaled and displayed as real world units of
measure. See the data source's corresponding .CHM help file in the WIN-911 Help
Library for more details concerning Engineering Unit Sounds.
248
WIN-911 Runtime
Digital Definitions
Digital Definition
This button is used to define all digital points. With both WIN-911 and WIN-411, alarms or
monitored points are classified as either a Digital "1" or "0", "bit picked" Analog data
values or Text Match ASCII strings. Digital alarms/points are configured within this button.
(Note, some application software packages will convert a DDE/OPC digital value to an
ASCII string, such as "OPEN" or "CLOSED". WIN-911/411 can also interpret these
conditions as digital alarms. See below for an explanation.)
Note: The recommended maximum number of DDE Items should not exceed 1,500.
Note: Some data sources do not support Digitals.
Special Note: Lite Mode users are limited to a total of 24 digital tags and unlimited
watchdog tags. Analog tags are not supported in Lite Mode.
Digital Definition to Edit
Alarms/Points are arranged by "Groups". Using the pull down list box, select the "Group"
that the new or existing alarm/point is assigned. Only the alarms/points associated with
the "Group" will be listed. You may select the appropriate "Group" by the pull-down list
box, or select "All Groups".
After selecting the specific "Group" or selecting "All Groups", you are ready to add or
modify digital alarms.
249
WIN-911 V7.14
Selecting "New", "Edit", "Copy" or double clicking on the Tagname will bring up the
following dialog box:
Numeric Pager Considerations
If the WIN-911 application requires numeric pagers (do not confuse with alphanumeric
pagers), a special entry is needed during configuration. Any or all field(s): Group Names,
Tagnames, Descriptions, or Digital States may have an embedded numeric touch-tone
string. It must be surrounded by square brackets, and included in the format selection for
pagers. Upon an alarm, the numeric data is stripped and sent out as a numeric page.
Example: An alarm Tagname such as C_44N [88] and a base number of 411 would be
received by a numeric pager as 41188.
250
WIN-911 Runtime
Base Definition
Tagname
HMI data point tag names tend to be cryptic and otherwise non-descriptive. The WIN-911
"Tagname" is a symbolic tool that allows the user to assign names to data points that are
better fit for human consumption. It should be kept in mind this is WIN-911's name for the
data point, and not the data source's. The Item Name is the data source's name for the
data point and is independent of the Tagname (unless "Use Tagname for Item" is
selected).
Tagname is a unique identifier for an alarm/point. It could be as simple as: "Boiler
Temperature", although use of a structured tag naming convention is recommended.
Thus, a temperature switch might be represented as TS0501, where: TS indicates a
temperature switch, 05 indicates the process area, and 01 indicates that this is the first
sensor of this type in this process area. The description can be placed in the description
field.
Description
The "Description" field is used to provide a more detailed description of an alarm or point.
This information is in addition to the "Tagname" and "Alarm Group Name". It is best not to
include the "Tagname" or "Alarm Group Name" in this description, since it is redundant.
Typically, this is the beginning of the ASCII string message which can be displayed,
logged, or paged.
Group Name
Alarms are organized by groups for reporting out-of-tolerance conditions. You have by
now created a unique digital alarm or point. You must choose a predefined "Group" to
specify the reporting actions for this alarm. (Remember, you have already selected a
251
WIN-911 V7.14
group name, specifying the reporting options and an optional sound for this group.) A
review of the "Group" button is not a bad idea here. To select another "Group", click on
the drop-down arrow with the cursor and choose. You may change the "Group"
assignment (move the tag to another "Group") simply by selecting another defined
"Group" from the drop down list box.
Bit
Even though a digital alarm is a comparison of a "1" or "0", some applications require the
data server to read a 16 bit word or a 32 bit word, and decipher the word into 16 or 32
unique digital alarms. This is exactly the purpose of this selection. If your data item is
already broken into bit form, select Integer Bit 1 as your type. If your data item is an
integer value, select the "Type" drop-down list arrow, and choose the correct bit to pick
(from least to most significant) for this unique digital alarm/point.
If you are using the "ASCII string option" to define digital alarms, select "Text Match" for
the Bit Type.
The "Remote Alarm" selection is a selection associated with the "Direct Connect" options
only.
Access Name
The "Access Name" is used to select a predefined data conversation from the list of
supported data sources defined in the "Data Source Definition". This field must be
defined.
Use Tagname for Item
Selecting this box will cause the "Tagname" to be copied directly into the item name. This
is useful when connecting to other tag oriented HMI packages.
Item Name
The "Item Name" is used to identify the particular item to monitor in the data source. The
actual name entered will vary from server to server. Consult the server documentation for
additional information. This field is case sensitive and must be defined.
252
WIN-911 Runtime
Alarm Conditions
Alarm and Normal Labels
The text strings that identify the "Alarm" and "Normal" conditions which will appear on the
alarm monitor displays, reports and pages are identified here. Examples may be "On/Off",
"Open/Closed", "Normal/Alarm", or "Red/Green".
If you are using ASCII strings (as opposed to numeric 1 or 0) to represent the two digital
conditions (ON/OFF, OPEN/CLOSE), you should have selected "Text Match" in the
previous tab (Base Definition). In this mode of operation, WIN-911 uses these text strings
as comparison templates for identifying digital conditions. The ASCII strings defined in
these fields must match (case sensitive) the text being sent by the data source.
Note: Ensure that Digital data points defined using a Text Match comparison are
configured with the exact ASCII string that will be provided by the data source. An
inaccurate comparison template will not be able to interpret the incoming strings. It is also
worth noting that this situation will not generate any error messages during runtime!
Note: Alarm and Normal text boxes change to On and Off when the digital data is not
being monitored for alarm conditions.
Digital Alarm
The "Digital Alarm" value is either a "1" or a "0". A digital alarm condition can be either a
"1" state, or a "0" state. WIN-911 gives you the choice, since applications vary. Selecting
"ON" from the pull-down list will cause an alarm to be reported if the digital value is a "1".
The "OFF" selection reverses the choice.
253
WIN-911 V7.14
If you are using WIN-411, you may want to monitor a digital condition but not want it
alarmed. In this case, configure the digital point as if it were an alarm, but choose the
"None" selection.
Initial Value
Select the initialization value you wish WIN-911 to begin with upon start-up.
Priority
For each alarm, you may select three levels of "Priority": High, Medium, and Low. Within a
"Group", a higher priority alarm will bump a lower priority alarm down the queue to call
out, even if the lower priority alarm was first in line.
Automatic Acknowledgement/Never
Selecting this radio button will require a manual acknowledgement of the alarm.
Automatic Acknowledgement/On Alarm
Selecting this radio button will cause the alarm to automatically become "Acknowledged"
as it enters into an alarm condition. This option would allow audio reports of an alarm's
current condition without initiating other reporting options listed in the same "Group". If
this option is active, the message (going into an alarm condition) will not generate "PopUp" alarm messages or any of the "Dial-Out" options. Because the alarm is automatically
acknowledged, the message coming back to a normal state would indicate that the
condition is in the normal mode.
Automatic Acknowledgement/On Return To Normal
Selecting this radio button will cause the alarm to automatically acknowledge as it returns
to normal. This option removes the requirement that the associated alarm be responded
to by a person in the event that no one has acknowledged the alarm at the time it returns
to a normal condition. Experiment with all three of these option boxes to get the results
you desire.
254
WIN-911 Runtime
Sounds
"Sounds" are essentially a verbalization of the alarm description and the "on" and "off"
sound to be used in the audio annunciation. As with any other sounds, the sounds are
selected from a dialog box.
Tag Sound
The "Sound" is essentially a verbalization of the "Tagname" and/or the description to be
used in the audio annunciation. As with any other sounds, the sounds are selected from a
dialog box. This sound is required for any voice connection or 411 Reports.
Alarm & Normal Sound
These sounds are the verbalization of the "Alarm & Normal" alarm labels.
Use Is / Was
In some cases, using the "Is / Was" sound will not make sense. Selecting the check-box
next to "Use Is / Was" will activate its use. Leaving the check-box blank will omit its use.
An example of this sound would be "The Pump IS on".
Preview Announcer
Selecting this button will allow you to review this alarm's entire audio.. AS THEY WILL BE
HEARD IN THE LOCAL ANNOUNCER.. for each condition of the alarm in the local
announcer. Selecting the "Auto Acknowledge" option discussed above will affect whether
you can test the "State Acknowledged" button. Note: If this control is disabled see the
corresponding .CHM help file in the WIN-911 Help Library for more details.
255
WIN-911 V7.14
Changeable
The last tab selection is for WIN-411 applications only. If you are using the WIN-411
Option, a user may call-in to the computer to inquire on digital status conditions, not just
alarm conditions. If configured, the user may even change the status from a touch-tone
telephone. If the developer elects to allow the user to make changes, each alarm, or data
point must be configured to permit changes.
Note: Lite mode, RSView SE and RSView32 Direct Connect will not allow the enabling of
changes by the operator because 411 reports are ignored.
Enable Changes by Operator
This check box will allow changes to this alarm or status point. If this check box is left
unchecked, changes will not be allowed.
256
WIN-911 Runtime
Analog Definitions
Analog Definition
With both WIN-911 and WIN-411, alarms (or monitored points) are classified either as
digital "1" or "0", or analog data values. "Analog Alarms" are configured with the "Analog
Alarm Definition" button.
Note: The recommended maximum number of DDE Items should not exceed 1,500.
Note: Some data sources do not support Analog alarms.
Special Note to Lite Mode Users: Analog alarms are not permitted in Lite Mode.
Analog Definition to Edit
"Alarms/Points" are arranged by "Groups". Using the pull down list box, select the "Group"
that the new or existing alarm/point is assigned. Only the alarms/points associated with
the "Group" will be listed. You may select the appropriate "Group" by the pull-down list
box, or select "All Groups".
After selecting the specific "Group" or selecting "All Groups", you are ready to add or
modify analog alarms.
257
WIN-911 V7.14
Selecting "New", "Edit", "Copy" or double clicking on the "Tagname" will bring up the
Analog Definition sheet.
Numeric Pager Considerations
If the WIN-911 application requires numeric pagers (do not confuse with alphanumeric
pagers), a special entry is needed during configuration. Any or all field(s): Group Names,
Tagnames, Descriptions, or Digital States may have an embedded numeric touch-tone
string. It must be surrounded by square brackets, and included in the format selection for
pagers. Upon an alarm, the numeric data is stripped and sent out as a numeric page.
Example: An alarm Tagname such as C_44N [88] and a base number of 411 would be
received by a numeric pager as 41188.
258
WIN-911 Runtime
Base Definition
Tagname
HMI data point tag names tend to be cryptic and otherwise non-descriptive. The WIN-911
"Tagname" is a symbolic tool that allows the user to assign names to data points that are
better fit for human consumption. It should be kept in mind this is WIN-911's name for the
data point, and not the data source's. The Item Name is the data source's name for the
data point and is independent of the Tagname (unless "Use Tagname for Item" is
selected).
Tagname is a unique identifier for an alarm/point. It could be as simple as: "Boiler
Temperature", although use of a structured tag naming convention is recommended.
Thus, a temperature switch might be represented as TS0501, where: TS indicates a
temperature switch, 05 indicates the process area, and 01 indicates that this is the first
sensor of this type in this process area. The description can be placed in the description
field.
Description
The "Description" field is used to provide a more detailed description of an alarm or point.
This information is in addition to the "Tagname" and "Alarm Group Name". It is best not to
include the "Tagname" or "Alarm Group Name" in this description, since it is redundant.
Typically, this is the beginning of the ASCII string message which can be displayed,
logged, or paged.
Group Name
259
WIN-911 V7.14
Alarms are organized by groups for reporting out-of-tolerance conditions. You have by
now created a unique digital alarm or point. You must choose a predefined "Group" to
specify the reporting actions for this alarm. (Remember, you have already selected a
group name, specifying the reporting options and an optional sound for this group.) A
review of the "Group" button is not a bad idea here. To select another "Group", click on
the drop-down arrow with the cursor and choose. You may change the "Group"
assignment (move the tag to another "Group") simply by selecting another defined
"Group" from the drop down list box.
Engineering Units
The "Engineering Units" field is an optional field, which provides text that identifies the
engineering units. Analog values may be scaled and displayed as real world units of
measure.
Access Name
The "Access Name" is used to select a predefined data source conversation from the list
of supported data sources defined in the Data Source Definition. This field must be
defined.
Use Tagname for Item
Selecting this box will cause the "Tagname" to be copied directly into the item name. This
is useful when connecting to other tag oriented HMI applications.
Item Name
The "Item Name" is used to identify the particular item to monitor in the data source. The
actual name entered will vary from server to server. Consult the server documentation for
additional information. This field is case sensitive and must be defined.
260
WIN-911 Runtime
Conversion
Conversion Type
"Conversion Type" defines which filter is applied to the raw data. Being a 32-bit
application, analog data is treated as a 32-bit integer. Selection of "Floating Point" is not
defined here (see below: "Number of Decimal Places" for floating point definitions).
The incoming values can be processed in four ways. The first and simplest is that the
value is not scaled: numbers appear exactly as they are brought in. The next is a linear
scaling: raw values in the specified range are converted to the engineering units' range.
The third conversion is square root scaling where the square root of the raw value is
taken and then the value is converted to the engineering units' range. Square root
conversions are commonly used in flow calculations. The final conversion is "Bit Mask": a
selection of the number of bits to use in displaying data or calculating scaling factors.
None
Selection of "None" will make data available in its raw or native form.
Linear
Selection of "Linear" will enable linear scaling. If this is selected, minimum and maximum
values must be entered.
261
WIN-911 V7.14
Square Root
Selection of "Square Root" will first apply the "Square Root" of the raw data and then
make the scaling selections available.
Bit Mask
Selection of "Bit Mask" will strip the 32 bit native form to match the data coming from a
field device. For example, if the A/D converter is 12 bits, you could select "Bit Mask" and
then a resolution of 12 bits. These selections would then strip the excess data from the
raw 32-bit form and present it as 12 bit data. Scaling selections would then be available if
needed.
Remote Alarming
This selection is used for Direct Connect data and is not selectable for DDE/OPC data.
Raw Resolution
(See the above discussion on "Bit Mask".)
Raw Signed
A selection of this check box will convert a 32 bit unsigned integer into a 16 bit signed
integer.
Raw Minimum/Maximum
The raw engineering units' values are used to create a multiplier for converting values.
Scaled Minimum/Maximum
The scaled engineering units' values are used to create a multiplier for converting values.
You should enter the minimum and maximum values in engineering units which
correspond to the minimum and maximum raw data values. The software will
automatically scale the incoming (or in the case of WIN-411, outgoing) data to the correct
values for WIN-911 alarm comparison or WIN-411 reporting. Note that the min and max
engineering units are used to clamp the converted value. The value will not exceed the
min and max span.
Number of Decimal Places
WIN-911/411 supports two types of analog data types: Integer or Floating-Point. WIN911/411 supports: a) 32 bit signed integer values, and b) 32 bit IEEE floating point values.
Note: Acceptable Floating-Point numbers (without round-off errors) are 3.4 e±38, or a
resolution of 7 digits. Values beyond seven digits will exhibit round-off errors. Integer Data
Type is the default type and represented as "0" Number of Decimal Places. To select
Floating Point, select the Number of Decimal Places to something other than "0". This
selection will also select the number of decimal places to verbalize in a WIN-411 Report.
Scaling Examples
262
WIN-911 Runtime
Depending upon the source, supplying data to OPC values may be scaled to
"Engineering Units". However, some data may be in unscaled form. In the "Conversion"
tab, you will find the "Conversion Type List Box": None, Linear, Square Root, and Bit
Mask. Using the cursor and checking the "None" selection will disable any scaling
routines for this "Tagname". Selecting "Linear" will activate the scaling routine. You must
then fill in the minimum and maximum values for the raw data and corresponding
minimum and maximum values for the scale's data. The scaling is performed based upon
the entered values. For example: a Min/Max range for raw data of 0 and 50 and a
Min/Max selection for engineering units of 0 and 100 would result in a 2:1 scaling factor. A
raw data value of 25 would be scaled to 50. Also, it is important to note that the scaled
values are not permitted to go beyond the Min/Max settings.
Choosing "Square Root" scaling will allow two scalings to be applied to the raw data.
First, the "Square Root" of the raw data is taken, and then the results may be scaled. This
calculation is useful in flow measurements.
263
WIN-911 V7.14
Alarm Limits
The four alarm limits are used to determine when alarm conditions occur. The value must
be above the high limits for the high alarms and below the low limits for the low alarms. If
the value is scaled, the limits must be within the scaled range. Notice that you do not have
user defined visual alarm messages with Analog alarms. The visual messages are fixed:
High, HiHi, Low, and LoLo. The alarm selection boxes are used to select the desired
alarm states to be monitored. In WIN-411 applications, you may occasionally have a data
point which you want to monitor, but not alarm. In such cases, do not select any of the
Alarm States check boxes.
Initial Value
Select the initialization value you wish WIN-911 to begin with during start-up. The "Initial
Value" is used to enter a first value into the variable before the first values are read. It is
recommended that the "Initial Value" be set to a non-alarm level.
Priority
For each alarm, you may select three levels of "Priority": High, Medium, and Low. For that
"Group", a higher priority alarm will bump a lower priority alarm down the queue to call
out, even if the lower priority alarm was first in line.
Deadband
264
WIN-911 Runtime
You may also select a common "Deadband" for each "Tagname". Entering a value into
the "Deadband" edit field will activate this option. A value of "0" will cause an analog
alarm to trigger at one digit over the alarm value, and will report a normal condition when
the value equals the alarm value. A "Deadband" of "2" will execute an alarm exactly as
before, but to report a "Normal" state, the value must fall 2 digits below the alarm setting.
Automatic Acknowledgement/Never
Selecting this radio button will require a manual acknowledgement of the alarm.
Automatic Acknowledgement/On Alarm
Selecting this radio button will cause the alarm to automatically become "Acknowledged"
as it enters into an alarm condition. This option would allow audio reports of an alarm's
current condition without initiating other reporting options listed in the same "Group". If
this option is active, the message (going into an alarm condition) will not generate "PopUp" alarm messages or any of the "Dial-Out" options. Because the alarm is automatically
acknowledged, the message coming back to a normal state would indicate that the
condition is in the normal mode. The "Was" message would never be used.
Automatic Acknowledgement/On Return To Normal
Selecting this radio button will cause the alarm to automatically acknowledge as it returns
to normal. This option removes the requirement that the associated alarm be responded
to by a person in the event that no one has acknowledged the alarm at the time it returns
to a normal condition. Experiment with all three of these option boxes to get the results
you desire.
265
WIN-911 V7.14
Sounds
Tag Sound
The "Tag Sound" is essentially a verbalization of the "Tagname" and/or the description to
be used in the audio annunciation. As with any other sounds, the sounds are selected
from a dialog box.
Alarm Sounds
A specific sound can be specified for each of the alarm conditions. These sounds are
normally the verbalization of the phrases " ...above the high limit","...above the HiHi limit",
"...below the low limit", and "...below the LoLo limit". In addition, there is a return to normal
sound, which may be the phrase "now normal".
Engineering Unit Sound
The "Units" field is an optional sound which identifies the engineering units a value
represents. Analog values may be scaled and displayed as real world units of measure.
Use Is / Was
In some cases, using the "Is / Was" sound will not make sense. Selecting the check-box
next to "Use Is / Was" will activate its use. Leaving the check-box blank will omit its use.
Preview Announcer
Selecting this button will allow you to review this alarm's entire ... AS THEY WILL BE
HEARD ... for each condition of the alarm in the local announcer. Selecting the "Auto
Acknowledge" option discussed above will affect whether you can test the "In the Normal
266
WIN-911 Runtime
Range" button. Note: If this control is disabled see the data source's corresponding .CHM
help file in the WIN-911 Help Library for more details.
267
WIN-911 V7.14
Changeable
The last tab selection is for WIN-411 applications only. If you are using the WIN-411
Option, a user may call in to the computer to inquire on data values, not just alarm
conditions. If configured, the user may even change a value from a touch-tone telephone.
If the developer elects to allow the user to make changes, each alarm or data point must
be configured to permit changes.
Changeable by Operator
This check box will allow changes to this alarm or data point. If this check box is left
unchecked, changes will not be allowed.
Note: Lite mode, RSView SE and RSView32 Direct Connect will not allow the enabling of
changes by the operator because 411 reports are ignored.
Minimum and Maximum Values
Changes will be allowed only within the "Minimum and Maximum" values.
You must assign the range allowed for a change.
Minimum Value: Integer....................................-2147483648
Minimum Value: FP without round-off error ...-9999999
Maximum Value: Integer.................................. +4294967295
Maximum Value: FP without round-off error ...+9999999
268
WIN-911 Runtime
Watchdog Timer Definitions
Watchdog Timer Definition
Should trouble exist in either the server, cabling, or the actual control device, WIN-911 will
stop receiving new data from its data source. For this reason, WIN-911's alarm reporting
chores would be restricted, or totally shut down. Therefore, the "Watchdog Timer Alarms"
have been implemented. This method will also detect when a PLC has been shut down
for maintenance or program changes. The "Watchdog Timer" option in WIN-911 will alert
you if the data source becomes inactive. "Watchdog Timers" are arranged by "Groups"
just like other alarms/points. Using the pull down list box, select the "Group" that the new
or existing alarm/point is assigned. Only the "Watchdog Timers" associated with the
"Group" will be listed.
To utilize the "Watchdog Timer", you must choose a changing integer data value in each
device to be monitored. A good example of such a data value would be a "continuous
changing counter value" programmed into the PLC that you are monitoring. The
"Watchdog Timer" would monitor this value. If the value does not change over a preselected time period, an "Alarm Message" would be generated. If you are not receiving
data, you cannot alarm it. A typical voice message for this condition could be:
"WARNING, PLC#4, HAS LOST COMMUNICATIONS WITH ALARM LOGGER".
Watchdog Timer Definition to Edit
After selecting the specific "Group" or selecting "All Groups", you are ready to add or edit
watchdog alarms.
Selecting "New", "Edit", "Copy" or double clicking on the "Access Name" will bring up the
Watchdog Timer Definition sheet.
Numeric Pager Considerations
If the WIN-911 application requires numeric pagers (do not confuse with alphanumeric
pagers), a special entry is needed during configuration. Any or all field(s): Group Names,
Tagnames, Descriptions, or Digital States may have an embedded numeric touch-tone
269
WIN-911 V7.14
string. It must be surrounded by square brackets, and included in the format selection for
pagers. Upon an alarm, the numeric data is stripped and sent out as a numeric page.
Example: An alarm Tagname such as C_44N [88] and a base number of 411 would be
received by a numeric pager as 41188.
270
WIN-911 Runtime
Base Definition
Tagname
Tagname is a unique identifier of a watchdog alarm.
Description
The Description Field is used to provide a more detailed description of a watchdog alarm.
This information is in addition to the Tagname and Group Name. It is best not to include
the Tagname or alarm Group Name in this description since it is redundant.
Group Name
Alarms are arranged by Group. Select the Group to which the Watchdog Timer should be
assigned here.
Access Name
The Access Name is used to select a predefined data source conversation from the list
defined in the Data Source Definition. This field must be defined.
Use Tagname for Item
Selecting this box will cause the Tagname to be copied directly into the item name. This is
useful when connecting to other tag oriented HMI applications.
Item Name
The Item Name is used to identify the particular item to monitor in the data source. The
actual name entered will vary from server to server. Consult the server documentation for
additional information. This field is case sensitive and must be defined.
271
WIN-911 V7.14
Alarm Conditions
Alarm / Normal
The Alarm and Normal fields identify the normal and alarm states that appear on the
alarm monitor displays and reports.
Time-out After __ Minutes
Watchdog Timers monitor a changing value within your data source. If WIN-911 does not
see that value change after a certain period of time, it will place the Watchdog Timer into
its alarm state. This is the length of the timer. If an update from the point being monitored
is received after the alarm has been triggered, then the Watchdog Timer will return to its
normal state.
If this field is set to zero, the Watchdog Timer will alarm when connectivity to the data
source is lost.
Note: RSViewSE, RSView32, and FactoryTalk data sources behave differently with
respect to watchdogs. Refer to the help documentation for these data sources.
Priority
For each alarm, you may select three levels of Priority: High, Medium, and Low. For each
Group, a higher priority alarm will bump a lower priority alarm down the queue to call out,
even if the lower priority alarm was first in line.
Automatic Acknowledgement
272
WIN-911 Runtime
Never
Selecting this radio button will require a manual acknowledgement of the alarm.
On Alarm
Selecting this option will cause the Watchdog Timer to become acknowledged upon
receipt. It will still be announced by the local announcer, however no remote alarm
notification will occur.
On Return To Normal
Selecting this radio button will cause the alarm to automatically acknowledge as it returns
to normal. This means that all notifications for the Watchdog Timer will end when it
returns to normal.
273
WIN-911 V7.14
Sounds
Tag, Alarm, and Normal Sounds
Like other WIN-911 alarms, the "Sounds" are essentially a verbalization of the description,
and the normal and timer failure text to be used in the audio annunciation. As with any
other sounds, the sounds are selected from a dialog box.
Use Is / Was
In some cases, using the "Is / Was" audio will not make sense. Selecting the check-box
next to "Use Is / Was" will activate its use. Leaving the check-box blank will omit its use.
Preview Announcer
Selecting this button will allow you to review this alarm's entire audio... AS THEY WILL
BE HEARD … for each condition of the alarm in the local announcer.
274
WIN-911 Runtime
WIN-411 Reports
Overview
WIN-411 is a set of reporting features in WIN-911 which allow you to get the current
status of any data point. Simply build a report and access it by report number later on via
voice call or SMS message.
WIN-411 Voice Reports also allow you to change data values from a touch tone phone.
Data points that require this ability, must be configured as changeable in their digital or
analog definition.
The following data sources are supported by WIN-411:
•
InTouch
•
OPC
•
DDE
•
FIX
If your data source is not supported by WIN-411, a good solution is to create an OPC
connection to your SCADA/HMI package for data only, while keeping your direct
connection for alarming purposes.
Note: WIN-911 Lite does not support WIN-411 Reports.
275
WIN-911 V7.14
Prerequisites
General Knowledge
Prior to using this chapter to begin configuring WIN-411 Reports, you must have
completed the configuration of each of the data points or alarms to be monitored. If you
have not configured the data points or alarms, go to the "WIN-911 Configuration" section
of this help file.
A Data Point vs. an Alarm?
If you are using the WIN-911 alarm capabilities, you must configure data items as alarms.
If you are using the WIN-411 monitoring capabilities, you may either monitor alarm values
or just the data values. If you are configuring a data item to be both an alarm and a data
value, just configure the item as if it is a normal WIN-911 alarm. If you are configuring a
data item to be a data value only (with no alarming capabilities), you must configure the
items in the following manner:
Digital Data Point
Configure the item as if it were an alarm, but select "None" for the Digital Alarm list box
found in the Alarm Conditions tab.
Analog Data Point
Configure the item as if it were an alarm, but do not select any of the four Alarm States
check boxes found in the Alarm Limits tab.
276
WIN-911 Runtime
277
WIN-911 V7.14
The Audio
Global Sounds
Review the "WIN-911 Global Menus" section in this help file. Be sure you have completed
the necessary Common Sounds and the special WIN-411 sounds or text strings
necessary for Scan & Alarm to read during Runtime Voice Synthesis.
Data Point Sounds
Configure the digital, analog and watchdog data point sounds as if they were alarms. If
you are not alarming an analog data point, you may omit the alarm sounds for these
items, but you must create and use the Tag Sounds and State Sounds for digital points
and watchdogs.
278
WIN-911 Runtime
411 Options
Special Note: When running in Lite Mode, RSView SE Direct Connect, RSView32 Direct
Connect, or FactoryTalk Direct Connect, WIN-411 Reporting will always be disabled and
the current state of all these settings will be ignored when Scan & Alarm runs.
Do not request confirmation of selected report
Selection of this checkbox bypasses the need for operator confirmation of the report to be
played. The default selection for this checkbox is unchecked.
Do not request confirmation of selected point
Selection of this checkbox bypasses the need for operator confirmation of the point to be
changed. The default selection for this checkbox is unchecked.
Do not request confirmation of data change
Selection of this checkbox bypasses the need for operator confirmation of the new value
to be set. The default selection for this checkbox is unchecked.
Require Watchdog for first item of a Report
Select of this option to require the first item of your report to be a watchdog. If this feature
is enabled, report access will not be granted if the watchdog is in the failed state.
279
WIN-911 V7.14
Voice Report Definitions
Report Definition
From the WIN-911 main menu, select the "Define Report" button to build or edit WIN-411
reports. The Report Definition list box will pop-up.
Report Definition to Edit
If no reports have previously been configured, select "New". You may edit existing reports
by either double clicking or highlighting the report name and selecting the "Edit" button.
You may have an unlimited number of reports.
Report Definition
The example shown is a previously configured report, which has been named: "Fresh
Water Storage Report Number 1". A total of three data points are assigned to this report.
280
WIN-911 Runtime
Report Name
The "Report Name" is a required unique identifier for each report. You may configure an
unlimited number of reports.
Helpful Hint: Verbalizing data values as voice communications is time consuming. It is
suggested to keep each report as short as possible, but make as many reports as needed
to meet your application needs. In a waste water application, you might want to have a
separate report for each lift station consisting of no more than four data items or alarms.
Report Sound
A "Report Sound" is required. Use the same technique as discussed in earlier sections to
generate audio. Define a sound, which describes the report. In the example above, the
report audio was: "Fresh Water Storage Report Number 1".
Voice Report Number
Each report must be assigned a unique number. This number may be any unsigned
integer (1 to 15 digit number) and does not need to be sequential. Think of this as the
second level of security (the first being the initial user access code). To make it more user
friendly, some developers will match the report number with the report name (Lift Station
22 would be report number 22).
Change Authorization Code - Optional
281
WIN-911 V7.14
If the user is allowed to change any of the data points in this report, a third level of
security is available, an access code for changes. Without this code, a user may monitor
data values, but he may not change them. This number may be any unsigned integer (1
to 15 digit number) and does not need to be sequential. Change authorization code is
required even if no points are changeable.
Disabling Security:
If this level of security is not desired, enter a zero in this field and a change authorization
code will not be requested.
Note: Disabling may allow security breaches to occur. Do not use this feature when
liability or safety is an issue.
Available Tags
The "Available Tag List" contains all the data points or alarms that have been previously
defined, assigned to the "Group", and have a tag sound defined. A WIN-411 Report may
consist of data points or alarms from more than one "Group". You may select "All Groups"
to view all available "Tags".
Note: For a data point to appear in the WIN-411 configuration sheet it must have the
appropriate sound(s) assigned to it.
Selected Tags
The "Selected Name List" contains the data points or alarms which have been selected
for this Report. To select a data point or alarm, highlight the desired data point/alarm in
the Available Tag List and click on the "Add" button. Data points/alarms from any Group
may be included in a single Report. To remove a tag from the Report list, highlight the
desired tag and click on the "Remove" button. You may organize the list in any desired
order by using the "Move Up" and "Move Down" buttons.
Note: It is a good idea to place a watchdog tag in each report as the first item in the
report. This way an expired watchdog will alert the user accessing the report that there
may be no connection to the data source and report values may be invalid.
282
WIN-911 Runtime
Defining a Data Point to Change
Data Change Index
From the "Report Definition" edit box, select the data point to change by double-clicking
the left mouse button on the data point's ID field found in the report list. This will bring up
the "Change Definition" edit box. The example below is from the continuing Pneumatic
Conveyor Number 2 example.
Note: This dialog box will not be activated if you did not select the data point to allow
changes. This selection is made available during configuration of the digital or analog
alarm (data points).
Changeable by Operator
Select the "Changeable by Operator" check box to enable the change index field for the
tag. The software enables the appropriate input field.
Note: If a tag was imported as read-only and you attempted to make it changeable by
adding a change index, a warning message will be presented to inform you the point may
not be able to be written to.
Data Change Index
The "Data Change Index" is the fourth level of security (or password) allowing for a
change of a data value. This number may be any unsigned integer (1-65535), and does
not need to be sequential. Each data point must have a unique "Data Change Index"
within the same Report.
283
WIN-911 V7.14
Miscellaneous
Number of Decimal Places to Verbalize
If the data point is a floating point analog value, the number of decimal places to verbalize
in reporting the value is defined in the Analog Definition. Details about this can be found in
WIN-911 Configuration section of this help file. Whatever you select for the Number of
Decimal Places to display is also the number of Decimal Places to verbalize. If you select
the number "3", the data value will be reported to three decimal places. A value of 14.0
will be reported as 14.000; a value of 632.8733492 will be reported as 632.873. Up to
fifteen digits total can be verbalized.
Helpful Hint:
Verbalizing data values as voice communications is time consuming. It is suggested to
keep each report as short as possible, but make as many reports as needed to meet your
application. In a wastewater application, you might want to have a separate report for
each lift station consisting of no more than four data items or alarms.
WIN-411 & InTouch Direct Connect
When developing a WIN-411 report using InTouch Direct Connect with digital data that is
to be reported only and not monitored for any alarm condition, ensure that the "Bit:" field
is set for anything except "Remote Alarming".
284
WIN-911 Runtime
SMS Report Definitions
Text Report (Mobile-911 or SMS) Definition
Before data values can be requested from WIN-911, a 411 report must be built. Click the
411 icon to edit 411 reports.
Report Definition to Edit
If no reports have previously been configured, select "New Text". You may edit existing
reports by either double clicking or highlighting the report name and selecting the "Edit"
button.
Report Definition
285
WIN-911 V7.14
A 411 report contains a set of data points which may be requested by report number or
individually through an SMS message or Mobile-911 transaction. When a request is made
for a 411 report, every data point in the report will be sent back to the phone which
requested the report as separate text messages. Request an individual report item by its
index number and that item will be sent to the requesting phone. The following is a
description of the elements of a Text Report.
Report Number
The Report Name is a unique identifier for each Mobile-911 or SMS report. The maximum
length of this field is three digits. Reports are requested by number.
Available Tags
The Available Tag List contains all of the tags available for inclusion in a Mobile-911 or
SMS Report. They are organized by group. Use the drop down menu to select the groups
you would like to see.
Note: For a data point to appear in the WIN-411 configuration sheet it must have the
appropriate sound(s) assigned to it.
Selected Tags
The Selected Report Item list contains all items in your report. A Report Item has two
components, a tagname, which is the name of the tag within WIN-911 and a short
description. When a report is delivered it will contain both of these fields. The tagname is
the name of the report item and the short description gives more context. The Default
286
WIN-911 Runtime
Short Descriptions radio button determines what the default short description of a tag will
be when it is added to a report.
Add a Report Item to your SMS Report by selecting it in the Available Tag List and then
clicking add. If the Default Short Description is set to User Defined, then you will be
prompted for a Short Description.
When the Default Short Description is set to Copy Descriptions, then the tag's description
is copied into the Short Description field. Likewise, when Copy Tagnames is selected, the
tagname is copied into the Short Description field.
Remove a Report Item by using the remove button or right clicking the Report Item. Use
the Move Up and Move Down buttons to arrange the order of the Report Items.
287
WIN-911 V7.14
Requesting Reports
Once a report is defined, it may be requested using its report number. Send a text
message to the WIN-911 machine containing the text "411:<report number>." For
example, to request report 21 send in the following:
411:21
If the phone which sent in the request is configured within WIN-911, then WIN-911 will
respond with the 411 report. An example report is shown below:
If you would like to request a single Report Item send in the text "411:<report
number>:<report item>." If you would only like the first item of report 21 send in the
following:
411:21:1
If WIN-911 cannot determine which report you would like, possibly because of a
formatting error or because that report does not exist, it will respond with "BAD411REPORT:<report number>." If the report item you've specified does not exist, then it will
respond with "BAD411-ITEM:<item number>." If you are not licensed for 411 reports, you
will receive "411 Request Rejected per license."
288
WIN-911 Runtime
Scan & Alarm Operation
The WIN-911 runtime system (Scan & Alarm) operation is TeleDAC.exe (executable)
which reads the configuration, starts the appropriate DLL's, scans the alarm conditions,
makes on-the-fly configuration modifications, and shuts down Scan & Alarm. Once
started, controls can be accessed through the tray icon. By right-clicking on the tray icon,
a control menu will pop-up giving the operator the options to show or hide the status
windows, bypass alarms, override contact's schedules, and shutdown WIN-911.
Because WIN-911 is usually a mission critical application, three security options are
offered that prevent unauthorized personnel from modifying or shutting down WIN-911: 1)
Requiring User Name and Ack codes to modify or shutdown Scan & Alarm (see "WIN-911
Global Menus.CHM" -> Display Definition -> Monitor Appearance -> Monitor
Acknowledge). 2) A global password can be set that will be required to access the WIN911 Configurator and can be configured to shutdown Scan & Alarm (see "WIN-911 Global
Menus.CHM" -> Display Definition -> Monitor Appearance -> Monitor Acknowledge). 3) A
combination of 1 and 2.
289
WIN-911 V7.14
When "Interact with Desktop" is Enabled WIN-911 will function the same way it does now
except you can't exit Scan & Alarm in the usual manner. You would have to go through
the Service Control Manager to shut it down or use the Restart.exe applet.
When "Interact with Desktop" is Disabled the user cannot use the WIN-911 Alarm Monitor
and hence, cannot acknowledge alarms or send manual messages. All the tray icons are
disabled as well as all applets, except Restart.exe.
290
ArchestrA Direct Connect
Startup
Starting of WIN-911 can be done a variety of ways, such as double clicking the
TeleDAC.exe from Explorer, using the Start\Run -> TeleDAC.exe, or Start Button -> All
Programs -> WIN-911 V7 -> Scan & Alarm task bar sequence or the Restart.exe applet.
Windows can start WIN-911 automatically with the Windows Startup program or WIN-911
can be launched by another vendor's startup program. It can also be started when
Windows boots via the 911SRV.exe Service Wrapper. Note: Starting WIN-911
automatically can launch WIN-911 before the data source or hardware is ready. Utilize the
delay configured in the Global Options/ Initialization tab to give the hardware and data
source plenty of time to initialize.
Launching the WIN-911 program will automatically launch all modules necessary to run
the configured application. Each module's status during startup will be displayed on the
WIN-911 Status window (TeleDAC). This information will provide an overview of the
module connections and any error messages. Once they are launched, the WIN-911
Status window will minimize to the system tray. To review the launch messages after the
status window is minimized right-click the Scan 911/411 tray icon and select "Show
Status" from the pop-up menu. If you want to close this windows after reviewing the
messages, right-click the tray icon and select "Hide Status".
291
WIN-911 V7.14
Shutdown
WIN-911 can be shutdown one of three ways: 1) right-clicking on the tray icon will pop up
the control menu where Exit WIN-911 can be selected; 2) from the Status (TeleDAC)
window; click the 'X' will invoke the shutdown sequence; 3) using the Shutdown.exe
command applet. Except when using the Shutdown.exe, confirmation of intent to
shutdown WIN-911 will appear prompting the operator to confirm the shutdown by clicking
Exit. If WIN-911 is running as a service it can be shutdown one of two ways: 1) executing
Restart.exe, or 2) stopping the WIN-911 Service Wrapper in the Windows Service
manager shuts down Scan & Alarm. Note: Only a Windows user with Administrative
privileges can stop the WIN-911 service.
Note: Security is available with this function that would require a user name and ack code
before the function will execute. Additionally, the global system password can be required
when the Shutdown.exe command applet is used.
292
ArchestrA Direct Connect
Bypassing Alarms
Alarms can be removed from and returned to the active callout list without having to take
WIN-911 offline and modify its configuration. This is done with the Bypass Alarms
command, accessed by right-clicking on the tray icon and selecting Bypass Alarms or
running the Bypass.exe from the Tools folder. When selected the following dialog box will
appear:
This warning is to ensure that the operator is aware that the bypassed alarm will not be
called out. To accept responsibility, click Bypass and select the alarms to bypass.
Note: This confirmation dialog only appears when alarms are bypassed directly by
TeleDAC.exe and not the third party BYPASS.exe scripting tool, unless the global setting
for user Ack on Bypass is set.
293
WIN-911 V7.14
Note: Security is available with this function that would require a user name and ack code
before the function will execute.
294
ArchestrA Direct Connect
Dialout Override
Individuals scheduled in a group's phone list can be removed from and returned to the
active callout list without having to take WIN-911 offline and modify its configuration. This
is done with the Dialout Override command, accessed by right-clicking on the tray icon
and selecting Dialout Override or running the Override.exe from the Tools folder. When
selected the following dialog box will appear:
This warning appears to ensure the operator is aware that the person who is being
removed from the callout list will not receive remote notification of any alarm condition
until restored. To accept responsibility, click Override and select the users to override.
Note: This confirmation dialog only appears when schedules are overridden directly by
TeleDAC.exe and not the third party Override.exe scripting tool.
Warning: All Override information is stored globally, independent of the configuration file.
Any user placed in override may or may not be in the current list for the active
configuration.
295
WIN-911 V7.14
Overrides can be scheduled one of two ways, either permanently or by date. As the name
would indicate, anyone who is overridden using the Permanent button is immediately
overridden and will remain so until manually restored using the delete button. The
Selected Date button will schedule an override for each selected 24-hour calendar date.
You can have as many "selected date " based overrides as you need and that override
will be restored automatically to the active call out list at midnight of the following day.
Note: Security is available with this function that would require a user name and ack code
before the function will execute.
296
ArchestrA Direct Connect
The WIN-911 Alarm Monitor
By default, the WIN-911 Monitor will automatically be launched at runtime. After
initialization the Monitor window appears in Summary mode, ready for you to begin work.
Note that the size and position is saved when the program is exited and the monitor
window will return to its last position and size when restarted. Note that if WIN-911 is
exited when the monitor is minimized, next time WIN-911 is started the monitor will be
minimized.
Warning: When 911SRV.exe service wrapper is controlling WIN-911,"Interact with
Desktop" must be enabled to use the Monitor.
The Monitor Window consists of several distinct areas: Title Bar, Control Bar, Display
area, and Scroll Bar.
The Control Bar provides access for six items. The "Acknowledge" button may be
selected by mouse commands or by pressing (and holding) the Alt key and the letter key
that is underlined. If the mouse is used, the command is initiated when the mouse button
is released.
The Control Bar also presents the "Summary" and "History" radio buttons. The
"Summary" and "History" buttons will allow an easy selection of desired visual
presentation of alarms, and status information.
The third item in the Control Bar is the "Alarm Count Box". It will provide the user with a
count of total alarms visually available (depending on the Summary or History selection).
If more alarms are listed than can be displayed, it will give information as to the total
number of alarms and which one is currently being displayed. An example would be :
"Record 14 of 14 "
The fourth item is the Lock button. This button relocks the Acknowledge feature after a
user has entered his/her acknowledge code to acknowledge alarms. This is a
configurable security feature that removes acknowledgement authorization before the
297
WIN-911 V7.14
designated relock time has elapsed. The Lock button only appears when the WIN-911
system is unlocked. If the configuration doesn't require an acknowledge code to
acknowledge alarms then the button will not appear.
The fifth item is the "Manual Message" button, which will be available if paging, SMS, or
e-mail notifications have been configured.
The sixth item is the "Display Lock". When depressed this button stops the automatic
scrolling of the monitor as the space required to display the activity exceeds the space
provided for the monitor. This button also disables all events from toggling between
current History and Summary views.
The Display area provides a scrollable window showing the alarm lines. The scroll bar
adjusts as the alarm buffer grows, so that the entire buffer can be accessed.
Also, unless otherwise configured the Alarm Monitor window can be resized using the
Min/Max buttons in the top right of the Monitor window. The window can also be resized
by stretching the border both vertically and horizontally. The columns within the Monitor
window also can be resized by dragging the column borders horizontally.
Event Status Reporting
During a normal alarm dial-out sequence, the status events of the page, e-mail, SMS
message, or telephone call are logged in the "History " display. These include such items
as: Who is being called? Did the person answer? Did they acknowledge the alarm? To
view these events, select the "History " radio button.
Upon a serious failure or event, such as losing a server, the status is logged as described
above, but the "History " display is automatically selected by default. Global monitor
settings can disable this behavior.
Acknowledge Button
The Acknowledge button will acknowledge all of the active alarms requiring
acknowledgment (not one at a time). See the "Acknowledge Options" section to
customize acknowledgment selections.
When the default alarm colors are used, acknowledged alarms appear in reverse video
from the unacknowledged alarms. For example, red characters on white background
indicate an acknowledged alarm and white characters on red background indicate an
unacknowledged alarm.
Summary and History Buttons
The "Summary / History" radio buttons will select the desired visual mode. The alarm
history displays the alarms in the order that they occurred. The most recent alarm is
always shown on the bottom of the display. Note that the screen buffer permits a
maximum of 2,000 alarms by default (10,000 max); the oldest alarms will be scrolled off
the list. The additional alarms will be contained in the archive file if it was selected in the
Group Definition. The alarm summary display is built from the alarm history display and
shows only the alarm points which are in an alarm state (whether acknowledged or not).
The alarm summary display will not show alarms that have cleared (and been
298
ArchestrA Direct Connect
acknowledged). Also shown in the History display are logged event states such as
telephone and pager progress, who was called, who acknowledged, etc.
Pop-Up Window
The pop-up window option allows the user to enable the WIN-911 Monitor window to be
the top window. This can be configured in the alarm group definition to either pop-up
when a new alarm occurs or upon any event.
Acknowledgment Options
In the WIN-911 Configurator -> Display Definition -> Acknowledge tab. See "WIN-911
Global Menus.CHM ", for more information. Default settings are shown below.
Enable Total Acknowledge
The user may acknowledge all current alarms at one time by clicking on the menu bar
"Acknowledge " button. Leaving this box unchecked will disable the "Total Acknowledge"
option.
Enable Single Acknowledge
Some applications require individual acknowledgments on an alarm by alarm basis.
Selecting this check box will allow this option. An alarm is acknowledged by doubleclicking a displayed alarm in the Summary display. Leaving this box unchecked will
disable single acknowledgments.
299
WIN-911 V7.14
Require Ack Code to Acknowledge
If security and/or enhanced historical alarm record keeping are needed, the developer
may use this option to require an operator to enter his/her user name and
acknowledgment code in order to have access to local alarm acknowledgments. Selecting
this box will activate this feature. The user may also acknowledge more than one alarm at
a time. That is the purpose of the relock time. The developer may select this in minutes. If
the developer selects this option and selects 2 minutes for relock, the operator may
acknowledge as many alarms as he/she wishes, without re-entering his/her code. In this
example, if two minutes elapse after the last acknowledgment, the system will relock and
require a password to be re-entered to acknowledge the next alarm. A selection of "0"
minutes for relock would require re-entering the code for each alarm. Leaving this box
unchecked will disable password protection. If this option is implemented, the "Alarm
Monitor" would appear as follows:
If an alarm is activated, the user may acknowledge it in any of the modes of
acknowledgment, but he/she must first enter his/her name (Operator) and "Ack" code
(from the Phone Book) before the acknowledgment is processed. The user's access code
is also accepted in place of the user's name.
Appearance
In some applications, the developer may desire to "Lock Out " unauthorized access to the
standard Windows access tools such as: no access to "minimize or maximize", or
"elimination of the standard Windows frame" around the Monitor. These modifications are
available in the Global Monitor settings in the WIN-911 Configurator. (See "WIN-911
Global Menus.CHM" -> Monitor Definition -> Monitor Appearance, for more information.)
Default settings are shown below.
300
ArchestrA Direct Connect
The developer may remove any or all of the standard Windows access tools such as:
Caption Bar, Min/Max Commands, and the Windows Frame. The following is an example
of the WIN-911 Monitor with all controls removed:
301
WIN-911 V7.14
Manual Messenger
Options are available to allow users to be remotely notified of alarm conditions by
automatic paging, e-mail, and/or SMS message. Pager selections include numeric,
alphanumeric, local alpha, and local numeric pagers.
The "Manual Message" button will only be present when Pager, E-Mail, and/or SMS
connections have been configured for at least one user. WIN-911 is designed to alert
alarm events by sending the alarm message to targeted remote messaging devices. The
"Manual Message" button will allow the user to create a custom message, and send it to
anyone in the WIN-911 phone book that has a remote messaging connection. In the
example below, the user selected Tom Jones from the Phone Book, and typed in a
custom message. Clicking the Send button will send the message.
Message to Send
Type the message you wish to be sent in the Message to Send text box.
Note: When sending messages to numeric pagers, enclose the digits you wish to send in
brackets. e.g., [123]
Message Status
In the Manual Messenger dialog box, the user has access to status information on the
messaging connections. The information shown in this box will indicate the progress of
message negotiations with the server.
302
ArchestrA Direct Connect
2-way SMS Manual Messages
Sending a manual message via SMS is slightly different than sending a manual message
via e-mail or pager. This is because a SMS manual message will accept a reply in the
form of a SMS message. The SMS messenger is a 2-way communication where e-mail
and Paging are only 1-way. If a contact in the 'Phone Book' sends a SMS text message to
WIN-911 while the Manual Messenger is open the sent text should appear in the
"Message Status" window. Note: Every SMS message that is sent to the Manual
Messenger will result in WIN-911 responding with a SMS message saying "Invalid SMS
received: ....". Although it is not an invalid message to the Manual Messenger, it is an
invalid message to TeleDAC.exe. Just ignore the "Invalid SMS" response if sending
manual messages.
303
WIN-911 V7.14
Alarm Logger
The Alarm Logger module can be selected for long term storage of alarm history data.
Alarm archiving is selected in the group definitions. In addition to the normal alarm history
data, there are additional historical elements such as system startup and shutdown. This
is meant to allow more complete alarm analysis. Also, this file is very useful if you are
using remote notification as it will document who was contacted and what their response,
if applicable, was.
Monthly MDB File
The data format for this file is Microsoft Access database format (*.MDB located in the
Log Files folder) and uses date and time style and column order as defined by the
Monthly MDB tab of the global definition of the WIN-911 Configurator. This data file can
be viewed dynamically by Alarm Log Manager.
The alarm database is built on a monthly basis and is designed to take advantage of the
files ability to sort data, add notes to events and refresh the presentation to include the
most recent events.
Daily Text File
The data format for this file is ASCII and uses the alarm string format setup by the Daily
TXT tab of the global definition in the WIN-911 Configurator. It may be viewed with any
text editor. The file may be sent to the Print Manager to obtain a printout of the history for
some selected day.
A new file is created daily. The filename is built based upon the Julian date. The format of
this name is the letter 'A', followed by a two-digit year and then a three digit Julian date.
The extension of the file is "*.TXT ". The file created on February 15, 2005 would be
A05046.TXT (as that is the 46th day of the year 2005).
304
ArchestrA Direct Connect
Alarm Log Manager
Alarm events that are archived using the Access MDB File format can be viewed with the
Alarm Log Manager giving the user the ability to sort, enter comments, print out records,
and refresh current events.
Events can be sorted by clicking on a column title bar in the Alarm Log Manager. This will
be helpful in locating, organizing, and reorganizing events by any of the alarm message
fields
By double clicking on any event in the Alarm Log Manager, a text box will appear,
allowing the operator to add notes. These could include details of the event that are not
part of the WIN-911 alarm message which could be helpful for event reconstruction and
archiving.
For more detailed information about the Alarm Log Manager see the Alarm Log Manager
help file.
305
ArchestrA Direct Connect
Introduction
ArchestrA Direct Connection
Introduction
The ArchestrA direct connection provides connectivity between WIN-911 and
Wonderware’s ArchestrA Application Server. Through the direct connection, WIN-911
receives alarm event information by subscribing to alarm events, rather than creating
alarms from data points. This event subscription model allows for a single point of
maintenance within ArchestrA with regard to alarm levels and types, as ArchestrA has
sole responsibility for determining what is and is not in alarm. The connection also allows
for acknowledgments to be passed back and forth seamlessly.
Alarming may be implemented in two different ways. The first and most straightforward
method is to subscribe to ArchestrA alarms directly. In this scenario data is gathered from
field equipment and other sources and used as input to objects within ArchestrA. Alarm
conditions are then specified for those objects within ArchestrA and WIN-911 subscribes
to those alarm events.
The second method is to use ArchestrA as a proxy for InTouch alarms. In this scenario,
alarms are configured within InTouch and then an InTouch Proxy object is created within
ArchestrA. WIN-911 is then provided with a reference to the proxy which then provides
alarm events to WIN-911. It is important to understand the distinctions between these two
alarm types before continuing. If you need more clarification regarding InTouch Proxy
alarms and ArchestrA, consult your ArchestrA documentation.
Important Notes
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
WIN-911 must be installed on a deployed ArchestrA platform.
Requires a minimum version of Archestra 3.1 SP3 Patch 1
Communication with the galaxy requires an MXAccess license. MXAccess is included as
part of an InTouch 10 license. If you would like to install WIN-911 on a system that does
not have a licensed copy of InTouch, download an MXAccess license from our website.
While multiple ArchestrA connections can be defined within WIN-911, WIN-911 may only
connect to the Galaxy deployed on the same platform.
Should communication between WIN-911 and ArchestrA be lost, the connection will be
reestablished when it becomes available again.
Watchdog Timers are supported and must monitor a changing alarm, rather than a
changing data value. For more information, see the section on Watchdog Timers.
WIN-411 reporting, Bypass Data Pokes, and Alarm Suppression are not supported for
the ArchestrA Direct Connection.
Alarm extensions are not supported.
307
WIN-911 V7.14
Step by Step Overview
Follow these steps in order to connect to ArchestrA and receive alarms through your
desired notification options.
1. Create a new configuration file in the WIN-911 Configurator.
2. Create a new data source definition for ArchestrA or your InTouch Proxy.
3. Import your alarm tags. If you wish to define tags manually, you must first create a
group in which to place the tags.
4. Create a user within the phone book and assign him a notification method and duty
schedule.
5. Associate that user with an alarm group by placing him in the Selected Name List of a
Group.
6. Save your configuration and start the Scan and Alarm executable.
Note: This manual only covers the ArchestrA data source. For information concerning
remote alarm notification, see the Configurator manual.
308
FactoryTalk Alarms and Events
ArchestrA Data Source Definition
Data Source Definition
The Data Source Definition contains all of the settings required to connect to
ArchestrA. Once created, alarm tags may be imported or manually defined to reference
your ArchestrA Data Source definition. Open the ArchestrA Data Source Definition dialog
by clicking the Data icon on the WIN-911 Configurator. Use the New and Edit buttons to
create new connections or edit existing connections.
Access Name
The Access Name is a user defined name, used to represent a particular data source
within WIN-911. Alarm tags are associated with data sources by referencing the Access
Name of a Data Source.
ArchestrA User Account
309
WIN-911 V7.14
If security is enabled within ArchestrA, WIN-911 must authenticate with the Galaxy in
order to receive and acknowledge alarms. ArchestrA may be configured to authenticate
users against Galaxy user logins, OS users, or OS groups.
When the security mode is set to "Galaxy," you must provide a valid user name and
password here for the Galaxy. If the security mode is set to "OS Users" or "OS Groups"
then WIN-911 must be run under a Windows user account that can log into the Galaxy to
receive and acknowledge alarms. In this scenario, WIN-911 does not require a User
Name and Password as the permissions assigned to the account that WIN-911 is running
under determines the level access WIN-911 has to the Galaxy.
Consult with your ArchestrA documentation and your ArchestrA configuration to
determine a valid user name and password.
Alarm Source
The alarm source setting determines whether the alarms you will be configuring for this
data source will be owned wholly be ArchestrA or if they are InTouch alarms proxied by
ArchestrA. If you are configuring an InTouch Proxy connection, you must specify the
name of the proxy in the InTouch Proxy Name field.
Please be sure that you understand the differences between these types of alarms before
proceeding. Remember that although data may be routed through ArchestrA from
InTouch to create ArchestrA alarms, these are not proxy alarms. Proxy alarms are alarms
that are defined in InTouch and then proxied through ArchestrA. You may define as many
InTouch proxy Data Sources as necessary. It is, however, impractical to create multiple
Data Source definitions for Galaxy alarms, as WIN-911 may only connect to the single
Galaxy deployed to the same platform.
ArchestrA Galaxy Settings
The ArchestrA Galaxy Settings dialog contains settings which govern the types of alarm
events WIN-911 will subscribe to, as well as sound settings used for voice notifications
and the local announcer. These settings are global to all ArchestrA Data Source
definitions, meaning that editing these settings will change all ArchestrA data sources.
310
FactoryTalk Alarms and Events
Mapped Priority Thresholds
ArchestrA’s priority scheme ranges from 0-999 with 999 as the lowest priority. WIN-911
has three alarm priorities: low, medium and high. You may change which priority values
map to which priorities within WIN-911 by editing the ranges here. By default, WIN-911
maps 1 – 332 to high, 333 – 666 to medium and 667 – 999 to low. Higher priority alarms
take precedence over lower priority alarms for notification.
Dynamic Options
Once connected to ArchestrA, WIN-911 can obtain object information dynamically. This
reduces the configuration overhead within WIN-911 and centralizes alarm configuration
within ArchestrA itself. If you wish to override any of the dynamic settings, deselect it here
and then manually define the alarm attribute in your WIN-911 alarm definition. Attributes
which may be dynamically subscribed to are:
•
•
•
•
Description
Priority
Units
Sounds
Select “Use All Dynamic Options” to subscribe to all attributes.
311
WIN-911 V7.14
When the Dynamic Sounds option is enabled, WIN-911 will retrieve the text for speech
synthesis from ArchestrA when an alarm is triggered. This text is pulled from the object
description field and the alarm message field for Galaxy alarms. The text for speech
synthesis is pulled from the comment field in InTouch for proxy alarms. Alarm conditions
for InTouch proxy alarms are not dynamically obtained and must be defined within WIN911 manually or through an alarm import.
Extended States and Sounds
WIN-911 may subscribe to a variety of different alarm events which are issued by
ArchestrA. You may subscribe and unsubscribe to them here. Consult with your
ArchestrA documentation for a description of each of these. Deselect any option to
unsubscribe from it, which disables alarming across the entire system for that type of
alarm event.
The local announcer and voice notification options will use the text beside any of the
extended states listed here for voice synthesis. Click the button beside any option to edit
the text for speech synthesis or to select a wave file to be played. You may also preview
the voice synthesis by clicking the green play button.
Retain ACK Comment as Alarm Comment
When an alarm is acknowledged by WIN-911, it passes the method of acknowledgment
and the user who made the acknowledgment to ArchestrA Galaxy by writing to the
AckMsg field of your alarm. When using an InTouch alarm display, that AckMsg field is
displayed in the alarm comment field. If you wish to disable this behavior, deselect this
box.
InTouch Proxy Settings
Like the ArchestrA Galaxy Settings dialog, the InTouch Proxy Settings dialog contains
settings which govern the types of alarm events WIN-911 will subscribe to as well as
sound settings used for voice notifications and the local announcer. These settings are
also global to all InTouch Proxies.
Dynamic Options
312
FactoryTalk Alarms and Events
As with ArchestrA Galaxy alarms, WIN-911 is capable of dynamically setting alarm
attributes based upon your InTouch proxy alarm attributes. Deselect any of these options
in order to specify your own values from within WIN-911 in your alarm definitions.
•
•
•
Description
Units
Sounds
Select “Use All Dynamic Options” to subscribe to all attributes.
Extended States and Sounds
InTouch tags may have Rate of Change, Major and Minor Deviation alarms associated
with them in your InTouch tag database. Deselect any of these options to unsubscribe
from a specific alarm event for all InTouch Proxies.
InTouch Proxy Name
When connecting to an InTouch Proxy within your ArchestrA Galaxy, you must specify the
proxy’s name. Click the browse button to browse your ArchestrA Galaxy for proxies. In
order to browse your Galaxy, you must first specify a valid username and password in the
ArchestrA User Account fields below.
Note: User names and passwords may not exceed 127 characters in length.
313
WIN-911 V7.14
Importing Alarms from ArchestrA
Importing Alarms from ArchestrA
Once an ArchestrA data source is defined, tags can be imported which reference it. This
is the most efficient method of creating tags in WIN-911, as it creates alarm groups within
WIN-911 and insures that the syntax used when defining tags is correct. Alternatively, you
may manually create groups and alarm tags.
To begin the import process, select the ArchestrA Data Source Definition from the data
source selection dialog and then click import. If you are importing alarms from an
ArchestrA Galaxy and are on a platform with the ArchestrA IDE installed, you will be
presented with the option of importing alarms from a CSV file or importing alarms directly
from ArchestrA. If you will be importing from a CSV file, select the objects you would like
to export from ArchestrA and export them to a CSV using the Galaxy Dump. Select the
CSV in WIN-911 by first selecting CSV Offline Import and then use the browse button to
locate your CSV file on the disk. Click OK to have WIN-911 read the CSV file. InTouch
proxy alarms must be exported from InTouch with Wonderware's DBDump utility and then
imported from the resulting CSV file. Each import is discussed below.
Importing ArchestrA Alarms
314
FactoryTalk Alarms and Events
If the machine you are on does not have the ArchestrA IDE installed, then your only
option will be to use the CSV import.
To import directly from ArchestrA use the GRAccess Online Import. Provide the name of
the computer where the Galaxy Repository resides in the Selected Network Node field,
then set the Selected Galaxy field to the name of the Galaxy you wish to import from. You
may use the browse buttons to search for both of these pieces of information. In order to
import alarms, the user name and password you configured in your data source definition
must be valid. If they are not, you will be prompted for them. Click OK and WIN-911 will
request a list of tags from ArchestrA.
315
WIN-911 V7.14
After the Configurator has received the list of available tags, they will be presented to you
in the tag selection dialog. Select the tags you would like to import and click add and then
apply to import them. Use the Group Name drop down box to change the Group to which
tags will be imported. You may import tags to several different groups. By default the Use
Import Areas option will be selected. This will create a set of groups within WIN-911 that
correspond to the areas in ArchestrA and place all alarms in the appropriate group.
Available Tag Filter
The available tag filter will filter the available tag list according to the text entered in it.
Type any text in it, then click refresh and the available tag list will show only those alarms
which contain that text.
Show Only Enabled Alarms
By default, the available tag list will make all analog and discrete devices available for
import as alarms. These objects may or may not have alarming enabled. If you wish to
import only those objects which are configured as alarms, enable the Show only enabled
Alarms options and click refresh.
Unsupported alarm types and tags which are already defined within your WIN-911
configuration will not be listed in the list of available tags.
316
FactoryTalk Alarms and Events
Importing InTouch Proxy Alarms
Proxy alarms are defined within InTouch and then fed to WIN-911 through ArchestrA.
Export the alarms from InTouch using its DBDump utility. Select your Data Source
definition from the Data Source selection dialog and click Import. You will then be
presented with a tag selection dialog. It functions in the same manner as the ArchestrA
tag selection dialog discussed previously.
After the Import
Once your alarm tags are imported, the only task left to complete is to setup remote alarm
notifications for your alarm groups. You may review, edit or delete your WIN-911 tag
definitions by opening the digital or analog alarm definitions from the Configurator.
Importing Tags Later On
Should your ArchestrA Galaxy or InTouch Tagname dictionary grow, new tags may be
imported from them. Simply repeat the steps outlined above. Existing tags will not be
affected and the tag selection dialog will only present you with tags which are not
currently defined within WIN-911.
317
WIN-911 V7.14
ArchestrA Digital Definitions
ArchestrA Digital Definitions
Editing or Creating Digital Alarms
Click the Digital Definition icon on the Configurator to create or edit digital alarms. The
digital alarm selection dialog will appear.
Use the drop down menu to select a Group to browse its alarms. Click the new or edit
buttons to create or edit digital alarms.
Digital Definition
The Digital Definition dialog contains the alarm settings for a single digital alarm. Each of
these settings is discussed below.
Base Definition
318
FactoryTalk Alarms and Events
Tagname
The tagname is a human friendly alias of an individual alarm in ArchestrA or InTouch. It
does not reference an ArchestrA alarm or InTouch tag. It is simply a pronounceable name
used to identify alarms in WIN-911. If your object or InTouch tag has a friendly enough
name, select the Use Tagname for Item option presented below. This option is selected
by default for all tags created using the import feature.
Description
The Description field is used to provide more context for a particular alarm. By default,
WIN-911 receives this information when an alarm event is received from ArchestrA. If you
wish to edit this field you must deselect this dynamic option from within your ArchestrA
data source definition.
Group Name
Each alarm must be associated with a group. Select the Group to which the alarm will be
assigned by using the drop down box. Alarm notifications are processed on a per Group
basis. See the Configurator manual for detailed information regarding groups and alarm
notification.
Bit
This field is disabled for ArchestrA Data Sources.
Access Name
319
WIN-911 V7.14
The Access Name references data sources within WIN-911. To reference an ArchestrA
data source, and thus configure this alarm as an ArchestrA Galaxy or InTouch Proxy
alarm, select the Access Name of an ArchestrA data source.
Use Tagname for Item
When this option is enabled, the Tagname is copied into Item Name field. If your
ArchestrA object or InTouch Proxy alarm’s name is descriptive enough, enable this option
and set the Tagname field to the name of your alarm within ArchestrA.
Item Name
The Item Name references object name of your ArchestrA object. It is important that you
supply the unique ArchestrA tagname here, if you are referencing a digital or analog
device within ArchestrA. WIN-911 interprets all item names which contain a "." as field
attributes. If you are referencing an analog or digital device which is contained by another
object, do not use the contained name to reference the object within WIN-911.
If you are defining an InTouch Proxy alarm, there is no need to specify the name of the
proxy. In fact, the following Item Name would not work:
“InTouchProxy_001.AlarmName,”as WIN-911 already prefixes the proxy name to the Item
Name causing the previous Item Name to effectively be
“InTouchProxy_001.InTouchProxy_001.AlarmName.” Never specify the InTouch Proxy’s
name this way.
Alarm Conditions
Alarm and Normal Text Strings
320
FactoryTalk Alarms and Events
The Alarm and Normal strings for ArchestrA alarms are defined within the Galaxy and do
not need to be redefined here. If you do not wish to use ArchestrA’s settings deselect the
dynamic option for your ArchestrA Galaxy or InTouch Proxy Data Source.
Digital Alarm
Alarm states are managed within ArchestrA or the InTouch Proxy.
Initial Value
The initial value of alarms is managed within ArchestrA or the InTouch Proxy.
Priority
By default the priority of ArchestrA alarms is obtained at runtime. To override ArchestrA’s
priority settings, disable the dynamic priority option within your ArchestrA Data Source
definition. The priority, at the time of import, filtered through WIN-911's priority mapping
will be utilized.
The priority of InTouch Proxy alarms is not obtained dynamically. Priorities are set during
the CSV import of tags. You may change the priority of InTouch Proxy alarms by making
a selection from the priority combo box.
Automatic Acknowledgement
WIN-911 can automatically acknowledge alarms when the alarm meets certain conditions.
Never
Selecting this radio button will require a manual acknowledgement of the alarm.
On Alarm
When this option is selected, all alarms are acknowledged by WIN-911 when they are
received. This prevents all notifications from occurring, except the local announcer.
On Return to Normal
Select this option to have WIN-911 acknowledge an alarm when ArchestrA alerts it that
the alarm has returned to normal. This will prevent notifications from being processed
when an alarm returns to normal.
Sounds
The Sounds tab is used to manage the verbalization of alarms. By default the text used to
synthesize speech is dynamically obtained at runtime from ArchestrA and the controls
here are disabled. Disable the dynamic sound option within your ArchestrA data source to
manually define all sounds.
321
WIN-911 V7.14
Tag Sound
The Tag Sound field defines the text or wave file that will be played when announcing the
name of an alarm. By default, the text used for speech synthesis is provided by
ArchestrA. Disable the dynamic sounds option in your ArchestrA Data Source to manually
configure this or any other alarm sound. When using dynamic sounds, the tag sound
comes from the object description field in ArchestrA, from the .Desc or .ShortDesc field.
The InTouch proxy tag sound is pulled from the tag's comment field.
Alarm & Normal Sound
These fields determine the text or wave file which will be used when announcing the state
of an alarm. When the dynamic sounds option is enabled, these sounds are provided by
ArchestrA. Galaxy alarm sounds are pulled from the object's description and the alarm
message field (.DescAttrName). Proxy alarm and normal sounds are not dynamically
retrieved from ArchestrA and must be defined within WIN-911 through an import or be
manually defined. Dynamic Sounds must be turned off to manually define alarm sounds.
Note: If a Digital Alarm Prefix sound is defined, under Common Sounds, it will be prefixed
to the Alarm Sound.
Changeable
This feature is not supported for ArchestrA data sources.
322
FactoryTalk Alarms and Events
ArchestrA Analog Definitions
ArchestrA Analog Definitions
Define Analog Alarms to monitor analog alarms within ArchestrA or non-discrete InTouch
Proxy alarms.
Note: Analog alarms are not permitted in Lite Mode.
Analog Definition
Analog alarms are very similar to digital alarms. Settings which are identical to both
analog and digital alarms will not be mentioned here so as to avoid any unnecessary
repetition. It is recommended that you read the section on digital alarms, if you have not
already, before proceeding any further.
Base Definition
Engineering Units
Engineering units are provided by ArchestrA when an alarm event is received. If you
would like to manually define your engineering units, disable the Units Dynamic Option in
your Data Source Definition, and then define it here.
323
WIN-911 V7.14
Note: The text placed here is used to generate the sound for engineering units if voice
synthesis is enabled.
Conversion
Because most of these settings are defined within ArchestrA or InTouch, they are
disabled here with the exception of Number of Decimal Places.
Number of Decimal Places
WIN-911 supports 32 bit signed integers and 32 bit floating point values. A 32 bit integer
is the default data type. For floating point numbers set the number of decimal places to
something other than zero.
Alarm Limits
WIN-911 may subscribe to Hi, HiHi, Low, and LoLo alarm events for analog alarms.
Deselect any of these fields to unsubscribe from a specific event and thus disable that
alarm. Alarm limits are configured within ArchestrA or InTouch and as such they are
disabled here.
324
FactoryTalk Alarms and Events
Deadband
Deadbands are configured within ArchestrA or InTouch and as a result this option is
disabled here.
Sounds
325
WIN-911 V7.14
A specific sound can be configured for each of the alarm limits, which are listed in the
image above. When using Dynamic Sounds, the text used for speech synthesis is pulled
from the object description and alarm message fields. InTouch proxy alarms use the tag's
comment field. The alarm condition field must be specified manually or be imported during
an alarm import.
Changeable
ArchestrA alarms cannot be a part of 411 reports and this tab is disabled.
326
FactoryTalk Alarms and Events
ArchestrA Watchdog Timers
ArchestrA Watchdog Timers
The connectivity of mission critical application must be verifiable. WIN-911 implements
Watchdog Timers to do just that. ArchestrA Watchdog Timers monitor a changing alarm
event. If no alarm event is passed to WIN-911 after a period of time the Watchdog Timer
Alarm is triggered. WIN-911 requires a Discrete Device alarm or discrete alarm from your
InTouch Proxy in order to create Watchdog Timers.
Click the red clock icon to create or edit Watchdog Timers. The selection dialog functions
identically to the alarm selection dialogs discussed earlier.
Watchdog Timer Definition
Watchdog Timers have several configurable attributes. Due to their similarity to other
alarm types, identical settings are omitted from this discussion. See the section covering
digital alarms for topics that are not discussed here.
Base Definition
Item Name
The Item Name must refer to an ArchestrA DiscreteDevice with alarming enabled or a
discrete InTouch Proxy alarm. The alarm which you are referencing should continuously
cycle in and out of alarm to demonstrate ArchestrA’s presence.
327
WIN-911 V7.14
Alarm Conditions
Alarm and Normal
The Alarm and Normal text are used to display the alarm in the Alarm Monitor Window
and for text based notification methods as well.
Time-out After __ Minutes
This is the period of inactivity that must elapse before the Watchdog Timer Alarm is
triggered. After an update from ArchestrA is received regarding the Watchdog Timer tag,
the counter is reset. If an update regarding the Watchdog is received after the alarm has
already been triggered, it will return to normal.
Priority
There are three Priority levels for alarms within WIN-911: High, Medium, and Low. When
processing remote notifications, higher priority alarms trump lower priority alarms in call
out precedence. Select the priority you wish to assign to your Watchdog Timer from the
drop down box.
Sounds
328
FactoryTalk Alarms and Events
Tag, Alarm, and Normal Sounds
Like other alarms, the sounds configured here are used to vocalize the tagname and
alarm states. Click the sound button to set the text which will be used for voice synthesis
or to select a .wav file to be played.
Preview Announcer
Click this button to preview the alarm sounds.
329
FactoryTalk Alarms and Events
Overview
The "FactoryTalk Alarms and Events" option provides a means of connecting directly to
Rockwell's FactoryTalk Services. The WIN-911 direct-connect interface to FactoryTalk
facilitates access to alarms generated by FactoryTalk Alarm and Events. This means the
alarms are configured and generated at the PLC level and not by WIN-911.
Multiple data sources can be configured for FactoryTalk Alarms and Events. This allows
the user to connect to multiple applications as well as configure separate Event
Subscription parameters. FactoryTalk Alarms and Events supports the ability to reconnect
to FactoryTalk Services if it ever loses its connection.
FactoryTalk Alarms and Events does not support an import of tags. Tags can only be
subscribed to through Filter Tags.
Note: The FactoryTalk Alarms and Events ONLY supports Alarm tags.
Note: The FactoryTalk Alarms and Events does not yet support the following: WIN-411
reporting; Bypass; ALARM OFF command and SUPPRESS command from FactoryTalk
View.
FactoryTalk Alarms and Events supports watchdog timers. FactoryTalk Alarms and
Events watchdog timers can be configured in two ways. WIN-911 must monitor a
changing alarm condition as opposed to a changing data value. In this case the watchdog
timer would be set to value greater than the interval of the reoccurring alarm condition.
You can also use a FactoryTalk Alarms and Events watchdog timer to monitor the
connection to the FactoryTalk A & E server. This will only report an alarm if WIN-911
loses its connection with FactoryTalk. Both watchdogs have the ability to return to the
normal condition.
FactoryTalk Alarms and Events supports Filter tags. Filter tags allows WIN-911 to
subscribe to alarm events according to a configured filter. The FactoryTalk Alarms and
Events filter supports Alarm Name, Alarm Class, and Severity. This expidites the WIN-911
alarm configuration process.
The FactoryTalk Alarms and Events tag properties are configured at the PLC level making
all properties dynamic with respect to WIN-911. This means that a tag can be
reconfigured in FactoryTalk and those changes are automatically reflected in WIN-911.
Note: The FactoryTalk alarm message is used as the alarm's description.
FactoryTalk assigns one of four Priorities to Alarms: Urgent, High, Medium, Low. WIN-911
can subscribe to FactoryTalk alarms based on the Priority. Priorities are configured at the
data source level. Any FactoryTalk Alarms configured outside the selected Priorities will
be ignored by WIN-911. All Priorities are selected by default. FactoryTalk also assigns
Severities to alarms, ranging from 1 (least severe) to 1000 (most severe). Severities are
configured at the tag level in the Filter Tag definition.
331
WIN-911 V7.14
Data Source Definition
FactoryTalk Alarms and Events can be configured with multiple FactoryTalk data sources.
When a FactoryTalk Alarms and Events data source is selected, the FactoryTalk Data
Source Settings window is opened. Once the Connection Settings and Event Subscription
forms are filed out the data source is created. The FactoryTalk Data Source Settings
dialog can be used to filter alarms. The Filter Definition is also enabled when a
FactoryTalk Alarms and Events data source is defined.
332
RSView32 Direct Connect
FactoryTalk Data Source Settings
Event Subscription
The "Event Subscription" specifies which FactoryTalk alarm events are sent to WIN-911
by the FactoryTalk Alarm and Events server. Events that match the subscription criteria
will generate alarms in WIN-911. The user is able to specify three criteria: Priority,
Area/SubArea and Event Sources. The three criteria are described in detail below.
Priority
The alarm "Priorities" are selected using the corresponding check boxes. Only those
events whose priority is selected here will be sent to WIN-911. By default all priorities are
checked.
Note: WIN-911 does not support all combinations of Priorities. The four unsupported case
are: Urgent & Low only; High & Medium only, High & Low only, and Urgent & Medium
only.
Area/SubArea
Only those events whose Area/SubArea match the criteria will be sent to WIN-911. By
default all areas are specified.
Event Sources
Only those events whose source match the criteria will be sent to WIN-911. By default all
sources are specified
Note: It is possible to configure an Event Subscription that doesn't subscribe to a single
alarm.
333
WIN-911 V7.14
Connection Settings
All Connection Settings can be found in both FactoryTalk View Studio and FactoryTalk
Administration Console.
Access Name
The "Access Name" is a user defined name used to represent this particular data source.
Application
The "Application" is the name of an application configured in FactoryTalk View. If
FactoryTalk Services is installed the WIN-911 Configurator will try to connect to the
application name in order to verify it exists.
FactoryTalk Global Options
The Factory Talk Global Options are applied to ALL FactoryTalk sources. This means that
only one Directory Scope can be configured and only one User Name and Password can
be configured. If the Directory Scope, User Name or Password is changed in any
configured FactoryTalk data source, all FactoryTalk data sources will use those settings.
If FactoryTalk Services is installed the WIN-911 Configurator will verify that the Global
Options configured exists.
Directory Scope
Every FactoryTalk View Application is configured with a "Directory Scope". A stand-alone
application is configured as "Local". Distributed or networked applications are configured
as "Network."
FactoryTalk User & Password
The "FactoryTalk User Name" and "Password" are configured here. This information can
be found in the FactoryTalk Administration Console.
Ignore Bad and Uncertain Events
Select this check box to prevent the alarming and logging of bad or uncertain events.
This can significantly reduce the amount of activity WIN-911 processes.
Note: This is a global option that affects all FactoryTalk AE tags.
334
RSView32 Direct Connect
Alarm Filters
Filter Definitions
This button is used to define filter tags. Filter tags subscribe to alarms on the fly
depending on the criteria configured. Filter tags are configured using this button.
Filter Definition to Edit
Alarms are arranged by Groups. Using the pull down list box, select the Group that the
new or existing alarm belongs. Only the Filter tags associated with the Group will be
listed. You may select the appropriate "Group" by the pull-down list box, or select All
Groups.
After selecting the specific Group or selecting All Groups, you are ready to add or modify
filter tags.
Selecting New, Edit or double-clicking on the Filter Tag will bring up the Filter Definition
window.
335
WIN-911 V7.14
Filter Definition
Selections must be made for the user defined tagname, the filter criteria, group selection,
as well as acknowledgement choices. Each choice is described below.
Base Definition
Tagname
The WIN-911 Filter Tagname allows the user to assign names to a filter tag or group of
tags that are created by the tags filters and properties. It should be kept in mind that this
is WIN-911's name for the filter alarm point or points, not FactoryTalk View's.
Filter
The FactoryTalk Alarms and Events Filter allows you to subscribe to a specific set of
alarms. This can be done by clicking the Edit Filter button. The Edit Filter button opens up
the FactoryTalk Filter Editor window. Here the user can configure the Alarm Name filter,
Alarm Class filter and Severity filter. See the section titled "FactoryTalk Filter Syntax" for
more details.
Group Name
Alarms are organized by groups for reporting out-of-tolerance conditions. You have by
now created a filter tag. You must choose a predefined Group to specify the reporting
actions for this alarm. See the section titled
336
RSView32 Direct Connect
Group Definition" for more details. To select another Group, click on the drop-down arrow
with the cursor and choose. You may change the Group assignment (move the tag to
another group) simply by selecting another defined Group from the drop down list box.
Access Name
The Access Name is used to select a predefined FactoryTalk Alarms and Events server
from the list defined in the data sources. This field must be defined.
Automatic Acknowledgement
Never
Selecting this radio button will require a manual acknowledgement of the alarm.
On Alarm
Selecting this radio button will cause the alarm to automatically become Acknowledged as
it enters into an alarm condition. This option would allow local reports (e.g. audio, printing,
and logging) of an alarm's current condition without initiating remote reporting options
(e.g. voice, SMS, etc.) listed in the Group. If this option is active, the message (going into
an alarm condition) will not generate Pop-Up alarm messages or any of the remote
notification options.
On Return To Normal
Selecting this radio button will cause the alarm to automatically acknowledge as it returns
to the normal condition. This option precludes the need for human interaction if no one
has acknowledged the alarm at the time it returns to a normal condition.
337
WIN-911 V7.14
Filter Syntax
The "FactoryTalk Filter Editor" dialog box allows the user to filter a specific alarm or
group of alarms for alarm notification. All alarms that make it past the FactoryTalk Data
Source "Event Subscription" filter are then further qualified by the three filters (Filter on
Alarm Name, Filter on Alarm Class and Filter on Alarm Severity) seen on this dialog. Only
alarms being passed through the FactoryTalk Data Source "Event Subscription" filter
(configured in the FactoryTalk Data Source Settings) will be effected by the FactoryTalk
Filter(s).
Filter on Alarm Name
The "Filter on Alarm Name" can be toggled on/off using the checkbox. If the checkbox is
checked, the user can define a filter based on the alarms' name. The Alarm Name filter
can contain up to 140 characters. This filter will omit all alarms that do not match the
name defined. No double quote characters ( " ) are accepted. The filter also honors two
wildcard characters, asterisk ( * ) and question mark ( ? ). The asterisk ( * ) symbol is a
wildcard character representing any valid character string. The question mark ( ? ) symbol
is a wildcard representing any valid single character.
A filter defined with an asterisk ( * ) will subscribe to all tag names. A filter defined with six
question marks ( ?????? ) will subscribe to all tag names containing exactly six
characters. A filter defined with a tag name and an asterisk ( "Liftstation *" ) will subscribe
to all alarms whose name starts with "Liftstation " (including space character).
Filter on Alarm Class
The "Filter on Alarm Class" can be toggled on/off using the checkbox. If the checkbox is
checked, the user can define a filter based on the alarm class. The alarm class filter can
contain up to 50 characters. This filter will omit all alarms that do not exactly match the
alarm class defined. No double quote characters ( " ) are accepted. The filter also honors
two wildcard characters, asterisk ( * ) and question mark ( ? ). The asterisk ( * ) symbol is
a wildcard character representing any valid character string. The question mark ( ? )
symbol is a wildcard representing any valid single character.
A filter defined with an asterisk ( * ) will subscribe to all alarm classes. A filter defined with
six question marks ( ?????? ) will subscribe to all alarm classes containing exactly 6
characters. A filter defined with an alarm class and an asterisk ("Class12*" ) will subscribe
to all alarms whose alarm class begins with "Class12."
Filter on Alarm Severity
The "Filter on Alarm Severity" can be toggled on/off using the checkbox. If the checkbox
is checked, the user can define a filter based on the alarm severity. This filter will omit all
alarms that do not fall within the alarm severity range. The alarm severity range is
configured by typing in a MIN and MAX value. The MIN and MAX values can range from 1
to 1000 where the MIN value must be less than or equal to the MAX value. MIN and MAX
values are included in the range.
Note: It is possible to configure a Filter that filters all possible alarms.
338
RSView32 Direct Connect
Watchdog Timer Definitions
Editing Watchdogs
The integrity of mission critical data such as that which WIN-911 is tasked to monitor must
be verifiable. This means that the data servers must have a way to demonstrate their
presence and functionality. WIN-911 provides the user with Watchdog Timers for this very
purpose. This function monitors one or two things (user definable) to ensure data and/or
servers are healthy: 1) observe a changing alarm condition that is guaranteed to cycle at
a specified rate, or 2) a message from FactoryTalk Services indicating a loss of alarm
information.
Note: Unlike other WIN-911 Watchdog functions, the FactoryTalk Alarms and Events
Watchdog monitors a changing alarm condition rather than a changing value.
To utilize the Watchdog Timer setup a data point that is continuously cycling in and out of
alarm condition. A typical voice message for this condition could be: "WARNING AREA #4
HAS LOST COMMUNICATIONS WITH ALARM LOGGER."
Watchdog Timer Definition to Edit
Alarms/Points are arranged by Group. Using the pull down list box, select the Group to
which the new or existing watchdog alarm is assigned. Only the watchdogs associated
with the Group will be listed. You may select the appropriate Group from the pull-down list
box, or select All Groups.
After selecting the specific Group or selecting All Groups, you are ready to add or modify
watchdog timer alarms.
339
WIN-911 V7.14
Selecting New, Edit or double-clicking on the Tagname will bring up the Watchdog Timer
Definition sheet.
340
RSView32 Direct Connect
Base Definition
Tagname
The tagname is an alias of the Watchdog tag in the FactoryTalk's Alarm & Event server.
This is a user friendly name for the alarm and not the address of the A&E Watchdog tag.
Description
The Description Field is used to provide a more detailed description of a watchdog alarm.
This information is in addition to the Tagname and Group Name. It is best not to include
the Tagname or alarm Group Name in this description, since it is redundant.
Group Name
Alarms are organized by groups for reporting alarm conditions.
You have by now created a unique Watchdog alarm. You must choose a predefined
Group to specify the reporting actions for this alarm. See the section titled "Group
Definition" for more details. To select another Group, click on the drop-down arrow with
the cursor and choose. A review of the Group button is not a bad idea here. To select
another Group, click on the drop-down arrow with the cursor and choose.
You may change the Group assignment simply by selecting another defined "Group" from
the drop down list box.
Access Name
341
WIN-911 V7.14
The Access Name is used to select a predefined FactoryTalk Alarms and Events server
from the list defined in the data sources. This field must be defined.
Tagname for Item
Selecting this box will cause the Tagname to be copied directly into the item name. This
check box is intended to be a time saving mechanism that can be utilized when the
Tagname and Item Name are not required to be different.
Item Name
The Item Name is used to identify the particular item to monitor via FactoryTalk Alarm and
Events. This field is case sensitive and must be defined.
For FactoryTalk A&E watchdogs, you must specify three components: Area Name, A&E
Server Name, and the A&E Tag. The correct syntax for this is:
AreaName:A&EServerName:Tag
-- e.g.,-Area1:Samples Water AE Alarms:AEWatchdog
If the A&E Server is locatedd on the Root Area, only the A&E Server name and the A&E
Tag are required. The correct syntax for this is:
:A&EServerName:Tag
-- e.g.,-:Samples Water AE Alarms:AEWatchdog
342
RSView32 Direct Connect
Alarm Conditions
Alarm and Normal
The Alarm Conditions text identifies the normal and alarm conditions that appear on the
alarm monitor displays and reports.
Time-out After __ Minutes
The Time-out After __ Minutes field is a count down timer preset. Each time a new alarm
state is reported for the selected item, the counter is reset to the preset value. If the timer
ever counts down to zero, the alarm occurs. This entry is in one-minute increments.
If a value of 0 minutes is configured in the field, the Watchdog alarm will be triggered by a
loss of communication with the data source. e.g. Project Stop, exit, etc. Since, the
FactoryTalk Alarms and Events data source can re-establish communication with WIN911, these Watchdogs can return to normal.
Priority
For each alarm, you may select three levels of Priority: High, Medium, and Low. For each
Group, a higher priority alarm will bump a lower priority alarm down the queue to call out,
even if the lower priority alarm was first in line.
Automatic Acknowledgement
Never
Selecting this radio button will require a manual acknowledgement of the alarm.
On Alarm
343
WIN-911 V7.14
Selecting this radio button will cause the alarm to automatically become Acknowledged as
it enters into an alarm condition. This option would allow local reports (i.e. audio, printing,
and logging) of an alarm's current condition without initiating remote reporting options
(e.g. voice, SMS, etc.) listed in the Group. If this option is active, the message (going into
an alarm condition) will not generate Pop-Up alarm messages or any of the Dial-Out
options.
On Return To Normal
Selecting this radio button will cause the alarm to automatically acknowledge as it returns
to normal.
344
RSView32 Direct Connect
Sounds
Tag, Alarm, and Normal Sounds
Like other WIN-911 alarms, the "Sounds" are essentially a verbalization of the description,
and the Alarm and Normal text to be used in the audio annunciation. As with any other
sounds, the sounds are selected from a dialog box.
Preview Announcer
Selecting this button will allow the user to review the alarm's entire audio ... AS IT WILL
BE HEARD IN THE LOCAL ANNOUNCER ... for each condition of the alarm.
345
RSView32 Direct Connect
Overview
The "RSView32 Direct Connect" option provides a means of bypassing Windows
DDE/OPC and connecting directly to Rockwell's RSView32. The WIN-911 direct-connect
interface to RSView32 facilitates access to alarms generated by RSView32. This means
RSView32 owns the alarms, unlike an OPC or DDE connection where WIN-911 must
determine alarm conditions.
Only a single data source can be configured for the RSView32 Direct Connect. This is
because only a single data source is needed to connect to the RSView32 project. The
RSView32 Direct Connect supports the ability to reconnect to RSView32 if it ever loses its
connection.
The WIN-911 configurator has an import facility for RSView32 Alarms that takes as input
the Tag and Alarm *.CSV files that are exported with the RSView32 Tag Import and
Export Wizard. These *.CSV files contain information about Tags and Alarms from a
specific Project. When importing Alarms from RSView32, the user must select the Tag
and Alarm *.CSV files.
Note: The RSView32 Direct Connect ONLY supports Alarm tags.
Note: The RSView32 Direct Connect does not support the following: WIN-411 reporting;
running as a service; Bypass; ALARM OFF command and SUPPRESS command from
RSView32.
The RSView32 Direct Connect does support watchdog timers. RSView32 watchdog
timers must monitor either a cycling alarm condition or just the connection to RSView32.
In order to monitor a cycling alarm condition, WIN-911 must be provided the address of
the alarm which cycles in and out of alarm. Should WIN-911 not see any updates
regarding this alarm after a period of time, then WIN-911 will report a failure on the
watchdog timer. If you wish to monitor only the connection to RSView32, set that period of
time to zero. Both of these scenarios are discussed further in proceeding sections.
The RSView32 Direct Connect supports filter tags. Filter tags allow WIN-911 to subscribe
to alarm events, while filtering out events with which it is not concerned. The alarm filter
may filter based upon tagname and alarm severity. This greatly reduces configuration
overhead, as WIN-911 will not need a reference to each and every alarm in order to
report them.
Note: A Filter tag will never result in RSView32 Tags from the"System" subfolder. An
Analog or Digital tag must be statically defined to monitor RSView32 "System" tags.
The RSView32 Direct Connect also supports Dynamic properties. These properties:
Sounds; Description; Priority; and Units, take text strings configured in RSView32 and use
them in WIN-911. These also have the ability to be disabled, allowing the user to
configure these properties manually in WIN-911.
347
WIN-911 V7.14
RSView32 assigns Severities to Alarms, ranging from 1 (most severe) to 8 (least severe).
WIN-911 uses this information in two ways. First, WIN-911 can monitor RSView32 Alarms
based on the Severity of the Alarm. A property for severity is configured at the data
source level. Any RSView32 Alarms outside this range will be ignored by WIN-911. The
default Severity filter range for WIN-911 is 1-8 so that no Alarms are ignored. The Second
use of Severities by WIN-911 is to assign Priorities, which are used in determining the
order that notifications are sent. Static Priorities are set during imports where Severities 13 map to High Priority, 4-6 map to Medium Priority, and 7-8 map to Low Priority. These
Static Priorities are only used if WIN-911 is not configured for Dynamic Priorities. For
Dynamic Priorities, the Priorities can be manually mapped to a severity at the data source
level.
RSView32 Analog Alarms allow up to 8 Thresholds to be configured. Thresholds must be
either Increasing or Decreasing. An Increasing Threshold generates an alarm when the
process variable goes above the Threshold, and a Decreasing Threshold generates an
alarm when the process variable goes below the Threshold. Increasing Threshold alarms
are mapped to WIN-911 High alarms and Decreasing Threshold alarms are mapped to
WIN-911 Low alarms.
348
RSView SE Direct Connect
Data Source Definition
RSView32 can only be configured with a single RSView32 data source. When the
RSView32 Direct Connect data source is selected the RSView32 Direct Connect Options
window is open. Once the options are selected the WIN-911 Configurator automatically
configures the Access Name, Application Name and the Topic Name, as seen below. The
RSView32 Direct Connect Options menu can be used to filter alarms. The Filter Definition
is also enabled when an RSView32 data source is defined.
349
WIN-911 V7.14
Global Options
The RSView32 Direct Connect Options are global options.
Note: RSView32 Watchdogs do not use Dynamic Options.
RSView32 Severity Filter
The range of alarm severity that WIN-911 will monitor is selected by placing a check in
the 'Monitored?' column. All alarms falling outside of the selected severities will be
ignored. The user can map the priority of each severity by using the corresponding pulldown menu in the 'WIN-911 Priority' column. This user-defined mapping is only
referenced when the Dynamic Options "Priority" is selected.
Dynamic Options
The RSView32 Direct Connect is designed to allow as much seamless integration
between Rockwell and WIN-911 as possible. This includes receiving as much information
from RSView32 dynamically during runtime, thus preventing the need to redundantly and
statically configure information in WIN-911. However, instances can arise where this is
not desired or possible.
Use All Dynamic Options
Globally enables all dynamic functions.
Description
Dynamic Description uses the RSView32 Tag Description text during runtime as the data
is passed from RSView32 to WIN-911. If the Tag Description is not defined in when the
alarm data is passed from RSView32 , WIN-911 uses the statically defined description in
the WIN-911 configuration. When the check box is left unchecked the RSView32 Tag
Description is ignored and only the text in WIN-911 is used.
Priority
350
RSView SE Direct Connect
Dynamic Priority uses the 'WIN-911 Priority' associated with the 'Severity' configured in
the RSView32 Direct Connect Options during runtime as the data is passed from
RSView32 to WIN-911. If the Priority check box is left unchecked, WIN-911 uses the
statically defined priority in the WIN-911 tag configuration.
Units
Dynamic Units uses the RSView32 Unit text during runtime as data is passed from
RSView32 to WIN-911. If the Unit check box is left unchecked, WIN-911 uses the
statically defined unit in the WIN-911 configuration.
Sounds
With dynamic sounds enabled, WIN-911 pulls text from RSView32 for speech synthesis at
runtime. It uses a two tiered approach. The tag sound is pulled from the RSView32 tag
description, if that field is unavailable, then WIN-911 will use the RSView32 tag name.
If dynamic sounds are disabled, then the text present in the WIN-911 tag sound and tag
description will be used for speech synthesis. If those fields are undefined, then the tag
name will be used instead.
351
WIN-911 V7.14
Import Source
Use the WIN-911 Configurator's File\Import function to import your RSView32 tags. The workflow
begins in RSView32 Works where you will export your RSView32 data into *.CSV files. Once the
*.CSV (Tag and Alarm) files are created you may use the WIN-911 Configurator Import function to
browse and selectively import tags and assign them to alarm groups.
RSView32 Import
Generate RSView32 Export
From the RSView32 Works Project pull-down menu select Import & Export Wizard.
Select the Operation you would like to perform.
Export RSView32 database to CSV files.
Choose the RSView32 project that contains the tags you want to export.
Project: C:\Program Files\Rockwell Software\Samples\RSView\Samples\Samples.rsv
Note: Choose the proper *.RSV file and take note of the path as you will need it.
Specify names for the destination files.
Only check Tags and Alarms, name the files and take note of the paths so you can find them
during the WIN-911 import.
Click Finish to complete the export portion.
Start WIN-911 Import
From the WIN-911 Configurator File pull-down menu select Import/RSView Imports/RSView32.
RSView32 Export Files
352
RSView SE Direct Connect
Path to RSView32 Tags *.CSV
Use the Browse button to map the location of the "*Tags.CSV" file created by the export.
Path to RSView32 Alarms *.CSV
Use the Browse button to map the location of the "*Alarms.CSV" file created by the export.
Automatic File Name Filtering
File filtering suppresses all files except ones ending in "-Tags.CSV" for the tag import and "Alarms.CSV" for the Alarm import, to make selection of the proper files easy.
353
WIN-911 V7.14
Importing Alarms
To select a block of tags to import quickly, click on the first tag of the block.
354
RSView SE Direct Connect
Next, scroll down to the bottom of the block list and shift-click the last tag.
Once all the tags are selected, press the Add button and the application will fill the
Selected Tags.
If you wish to deselect any of the tags from the list before the import is applied, select
them from the Selected Tags using the Remove button. Otherwise, select Apply and the
WIN-911 database import will execute.
355
WIN-911 V7.14
Alarm Filters
Base Definition
Tagname
The WIN-911 "Filter Tagname" is a symbolic tool that allows the user to assign names to
a filter tag or group of tags that are created by the tags filters and properties. It should be
kept in mind that this is WIN-911's name for the filter alarm point or points not
RSView32's.
Filter
The RSView32 Filter allows you to subscribe to a specific set of alarms. This can be done
by clicking the Edit Filter button. The Edit Filter button opens up the RSView32 Filter
window. Here the user can configure the Tagname filter and Severity filter. See section
title RSView32 Filter Syntax for more details.
Group Name
Alarms are organized by groups for reporting out-of-tolerance conditions. You have by
now created a unique filter alarm. You must choose a predefined "Group" to specify the
reporting actions for this alarm. (Remember, you have already selected a group name,
specifying the reporting options and an optional sound for this group.) A review of the
"Group" button is not a bad idea here. To select another "Group", click on the drop-down
arrow with the cursor and choose. You may change the "Group" assignment (move the
tag to another group) simply by selecting another defined "Group" from the drop down list
box.
The default group name will be "RSView32 Import Group."
Alarm Type
RSView32 Filter tags can monitor both Digital and Analog tags. The Alarm Type dropdown box allows the user specify the type of alarm the Filter tag subscribes to. By default
Any Alarm is selected.
Access Name
The "Access Name" is used to select a predefined data conversation from the list defined
in the "Data Source Definitions".
Automatic Acknowledgement
356
RSView SE Direct Connect
Never
Selecting this radio button will require a manual acknowledgement of the alarm.
On Alarm
Selecting this radio button will cause the alarm to automatically become "Acknowledged"
as it enters into an alarm condition. This option would allow audio reports of an alarm's
current condition without initiating other reporting options listed in the "Group". If this
option is active, the message (going into an alarm condition) will not generate "Pop-Up"
alarm messages or any of the remote notification options.
On Return To Normal
Selecting this radio button will cause the alarm to automatically acknowledge as it returns
to normal. This option removes the requirement that the associated alarm be responded
to by a person in the event that no one has acknowledged the alarm at the time it returns
to a normal condition. Experiment with all three of these options to get the results you
desire.
357
WIN-911 V7.14
Setup
Digital Alarm and Normal Text Strings
These text strings are not used in the RSView32 Direct Connect options.
Analog/Digital Priorities
Alarm Severity (RSView32) and Alarm Priority (WIN-911) accomplish much the same
thing by sorting alarm message urgency in a way that ensures the alarm with higher
urgency gets priority in the remote notification sequence. Higher priority/severity alarms
will go to the front of the line in the contact sequence while alarms with the same
priority/severity are handled on a first come first serve basis.
Things to note when assigning priorities:
•
Only tags that fall within the globally set Alarm Severity Monitored range will be
monitored for remote notification regardless of assigned priority (See Options
RSView32).
•
During the import, and only for imports, WIN-911 will distribute the selected
Severity range evenly through the three tiered WIN-911 Priority Range (High,
Medium, and Low). Although the actual Alarm Severity may differ in RSView32
(example tag alarm 1 and tag alarm 2 are configured for severity 1 and 2,
respectively), if the alarms are grouped in the same WIN-911 Alarm Priority
(example High Priority for Severities 1 and 2), they will be called out on a first
come, first serve basis.
•
If RSView32 is set to use dynamic Priorities, this setting is ignored.
Analog Alarm Setpoint Enables
RSView32 Analog Alarms allow up to 8 Thresholds to be configured. RSView32
Thresholds must be either Increasing or Decreasing. An Increasing Threshold generates
an alarm when the process variable goes above the Threshold, and a Decreasing
Threshold generates an alarm when the process variable goes below the Threshold.
Increasing Threshold alarms are mapped to WIN-911 High alarms and Decreasing
Threshold alarms are mapped to WIN-911 Low alarms.
Things to keep in mind when configuring Alarm Limits
•
If High and/or Low limits are selected for monitoring then each new threshold that
the tag advances through will trigger a new alarm. So if a High threshold alarm
exists and the next threshold on the increasing scale is breached then a second
"High" alarm will be generated in WIN-911.
Number of Decimal Places
358
RSView SE Direct Connect
WIN-911 supports two types of analog data types: "Integer" or "Floating Point". WIN-911
supports: a) 32 bit signed integer values, and b) 32 bit IEEE floating point values. Note:
Acceptable Floating Point numbers (without round-off errors) are 3.4 e38, or a resolution
of 7 digits. Values beyond seven digits will exhibit round-off errors. "Integer Data Type" is
the default type and represented as "0" "Number of Decimal Places". To select "Floating
Point", select the "Number of Decimal Places" to something other than "0".
359
WIN-911 V7.14
Tag Sound
The "Tag Sound" is essentially a verbalization of the "Tagname" to be used in the audio
annunciation. As with any other sounds, the sounds are selected from a dialog box. If
your data source is configured to use dynamic sounds this sound box will be disabled and
ignored. See RSView32 Direct Connect Options concerning Dynamic Sounds.
Tag Sound
Define the text to be used for speech synthesis here. If you have selected the wave files
only option in your sound configuration, select a wave file here as well. This will be used
to announce the name of the tag currently in alarm.
360
RSView SE Direct Connect
Digital Sound
Sounds are essentially a verbalization of the alarm description and the "Alarm" and
"Normal" sound to be used in the audio annunciation. As with any other sounds, the
sounds are selected from a dialog box.
Digital Alarm & Normal Sound
Define the text to be used for speech synthesis here. If you have selected the wave files
only option in your sound configuration, select a wave file here as well. These sounds will
be used to announce the normal and alarm states of digital alarms.
361
WIN-911 V7.14
Analog Sound
Analog Alarm & Normal Sounds
A sound can be specified for each of the analog alarm conditions. These sounds are
normally the phrases "...above the threshold alarm", "...below the threshold alarm". In
addition, there is a return to normal sound which may be the phrase "in the normal range".
362
RSView SE Direct Connect
Filter Definitions
This button is used to define all filter points. Filter tags consist of both digital
and analog points. Filter tags are different from statically configured Digital,
Analog and Watchdog tags in that no import is necessary. Filter tags subscribe
to alarms on the fly depending on the criteria configured. Filter tags are
configured using this button.
Filter Definition to Edit
"Alarms" are arranged by "Groups". Using the pull down list box, select the "Group" that
the new or existing alarm is assigned. Only the alarms associated with the "Group" will be
listed. You may select the appropriate "Group" by the pull-down list box, or select "All
Groups".
After selecting the specific "Group" or selecting "All Groups", you are ready to add or
modify digital alarms.
Selecting "New", "Edit" or double-clicking on the "Filter Tag" will bring up the Filter
Definition window.
363
WIN-911 V7.14
Filter Syntax
There are two levels of filtering for RSView32. The first level is in the RSView32 Data
Source Definition. There you may filter alarms based on their severity. Any alarms that
occur which are not in the severities defined there will not be discarded.
The second level is discussed here. Here you may filter alarms based on tag name and
severity. If both options are selected, they are combined with a logical and operation. That
is to say that an alarm must match both the tag name pattern and the alarm severity filter.
Only alarms which fall within the constraints of a second level filter will be reported as
alarms by WIN-911. You may define as many second level filters as you wish. As each of
these must be assigned to a group, that is the only way to have different call out lists for
different alarms when using filters.
Filter on Tag Name
Check this option to filter alarms based on tag name. Only alarms that match the text
pattern entered here will be reported by WIN-911. You may enter a literal string as well as
an asterisk for a wild card string. Use a question mark to match any single character.
Valid characters in your string literal are: alphanumeric characters, underscores, and
backslashes.
Enter a single asterisk to subscribe to all tag names. A filter with six question marks will
subscribe to all alarms with a tag name of exactly six characters. A filter defined as
"Automotive/*" will subscribe to all alarms that begin with "Automotive/."
Filter on Alarm Severity
Check this option to filter alarms based on their severity. Only alarms that fall within the
severities selected here will be reported by WIN-911. Keep in mind, however that the filter
364
RSView SE Direct Connect
defined in your RSView32 data source definition sits above this filter and if an alarm does
not pass through it, then it cannot pass through this filter as it has already been discarded.
365
WIN-911 V7.14
Digital Definitions
Digital Definition
Click this icon on the configurator to manually define or edit digital alarms. A digital alarm
is an alarm which is either on or off.
Digital Definition to Edit
Alarms are arranged by Groups. Using the pull down list box, select the Group that the
new or existing alarm is assigned. Only the alarms associated with the Group will be
listed. You may select the appropriate Group by the pull-down list box, or select "All
Groups".
After selecting the specific Group or selecting All Groups, you are ready to add or modify
digital alarms.
Selecting New, Edit or double-clicking on the Digital Tag will bring up the Digital Definition
window.
366
RSView SE Direct Connect
367
WIN-911 V7.14
Alarm Conditions
Alarm and Normal Text Strings
The "Alarm" and "Normal" text strings are not used in the RSView32 Direct Connect.
Digital Alarm
The "Digital Alarm" state for RSView32 alarms are defined within the RSView32 database
and do not need to be redefined here. Since this information is accessed directly from
RSView32, this field is disabled.
Initial Value
The "Initial Value" for RSView32 alarms are defined within RSView32 and do not need to
be redefined here. Since this information is accessed directly, this field is disabled.
Priority
Alarm Severity (RSView32) and Alarm Priority (WIN-911) accomplish much the same
thing by sorting alarm message urgency in a way that ensures the alarm with higher
urgency gets priority in the remote notification sequence. Higher priority/severity alarms
will go to the front of the line in the contact sequence while alarms with the same
priority/severity are handled on a first come first serve basis.
Things to note when assigning priorities:
•
Only tags that fall within the globally set Alarm Severity Monitored range will be
monitored for remote notification regardless of assigned priority (See Options
RSView32).
•
During the import, and only for imports, WIN-911 will distribute the selected
Severity range evenly through the three tiered WIN-911 Priority Range (High,
Medium, and Low). Although the actual Alarm Severity may differ in RSView32
(example tag alarm 1 and tag alarm 2 are configured for severity 1 and 2,
respectively), if the alarms are grouped in the same WIN-911 Alarm Priority
(example High Priority for Severities 1 and 2), they will be called out on a first
come, first serve basis.
•
If RSView32 is set to use dynamic Priorities, this setting is ignored.
Automatic Acknowledgement
Never
Selecting this radio button will require a manual acknowledgement of the alarm.
On Alarm
368
RSView SE Direct Connect
Selecting this radio button will cause the alarm to automatically become "Acknowledged"
as it enters into an alarm condition. This option would allow audio reports of an alarm's
current condition without initiating other reporting options listed in the "Group". If this
option is active, the message (going into an alarm condition) will not generate "Pop-Up"
alarm messages or any of the remote notification options.
On Return To Normal
Selecting this radio button will cause the alarm to automatically acknowledge as it returns
to normal. This option removes the requirement that the associated alarm be responded
to by a person in the event that no one has acknowledged the alarm at the time it returns
to a normal condition.
369
WIN-911 V7.14
Sounds
Sounds are essentially a verbalization of the alarm description and the "Alarm" and
"Normal" sound to be used in the audio annunciation. As with any other sounds, the
sounds are selected from a dialog box.
Tag Sound
The "Tag Sound" is essentially a verbalization of the "Tagname" and/or the description to
be used in the audio annunciation. As with any other sounds, the sounds are selected
from a dialog box.
Alarm & Normal Sound
These sounds are the verbalization of the Alarm and Normal conditions.
370
RSView SE Direct Connect
Changeable
This option is not supported in ME Alarm Control.
371
WIN-911 V7.14
Analog Definitions
Analog Definition
This button is used to define all analog points. With WIN-911, "Integer" or "Floating Point"
data values are classified as Analog alarms. Analog alarms are configured with the
"Analog Alarm Definition" button.
Analog Definition to Edit
"Alarms" are arranged by "Groups". Using the pull down list box, select the "Group" that
the new or existing alarm is assigned. Only the alarms associated with the Group will be
listed. You may select the appropriate "Group" by the pull-down list box, or select "All
Groups".
After selecting the specific "Group" or selecting "All Groups", you are ready to add or
modify analog alarms.
Selecting "New", "Edit" or double-clicking on the "Analog Tag" will bring up the Analog
Definition window.
372
RSView SE Direct Connect
Base Definition
Tagname
RSView32 alarm names may not be descriptive enough. The WIN-911 Tagname is a user
defined alias of an alarm, which WIN-911 will report as the name of the alarm. This is not
used to reference the alarm in RSView32 unless the Use Tagname for Item check box is
checked.
Description
The Description field is used to provide a more detailed description of an alarm or point.
One of the time saving features of the RSView32 Direct Connect option is how WIN-911
utilizes the Description field as defined within the SCADA package if dynamic
Descriptions are being used.
Group Name
Alarms are organized by Group. See the WIN-911 Configurator manual for a detailed
explanation of Groups. Use this drop down menu to select the Group with which you wish
your alarm to be associated.
Engineering Units
The Engineering Units field for RSView32 alarm points can be defined here. This will
append the engineering units to the alarm value.
Access Name
The Access Name refers to the Data Source Definition previously defined. Select
RSView32 Direct Connect to configure the current alarm as an RSView32 alarm.
Use Tagname for Item
Select this option to have the Tagname field copied into the Item Name field. Use this
option if the RSView32 alarm name is descriptive enough as to not require an alias.
Item Name
The Item Name refers to the name of the alarm as it is defined within RSView32. Its
syntax must match the RSView32 alarm exactly.
373
WIN-911 V7.14
Conversion
Conversion Type
"Conversion Type" defines which filter is applied to the raw data. Because RSView32
performs these functions internally, further scaling would produce invalid results. With the
sole exception of "Number of Decimal Places", this dialog box is disabled for the
RSView32 Direct Connect option.
Number of Decimal Places
WIN-911 supports 32 bit signed integers and 32 bit floating point values. A 32 bit integer
is the default data type. For floating point numbers set the number of decimal places to
something other than zero.
374
RSView SE Direct Connect
Alarm Limits
RSView32 Analog Alarms allow up to 8 Thresholds to be configured. RSView32
Thresholds must be either Increasing or Decreasing. An Increasing Threshold generates
an alarm when the process variable goes above the Threshold, and a Decreasing
Threshold generates an alarm when the process variable goes below the Threshold.
Increasing Threshold alarms are mapped to WIN-911 High alarms and Decreasing
Threshold alarms are mapped to WIN-911 Low alarms.
Things to keep in mind when configuring Alarm Limits:
•
If High and/or Low limits are selected for monitoring then each new threshold that
the tag advances through will trigger a new alarm. So if a High threshold alarm
exists and the next threshold on the increasing scale is breached then a second
"High" alarm will be generated in WIN-911.
Initial Value
The "Initial Value" function is set within the RSView32 and is not a valid function for WIN911. This field is disabled for the RSView32 Direct Connect.
Priority
Alarm Severity (RSView32) and Alarm Priority (WIN-911) accomplish much the same
thing by sorting alarm message urgency in a way that ensures the alarm with higher
urgency gets priority in the remote notification sequence. Higher priority/severity alarms
375
WIN-911 V7.14
will go to the front of the line in the contact sequence while alarms with the same
priority/severity are handled on a first come first serve basis.
Things to note when assigning priorities:
•
Only tags that fall within the globally set Alarm Severity Monitored range will be
monitored for remote notification regardless of assigned priority (See Options
RSView32).
•
During the import, and only for imports, WIN-911 will distribute the selected
Severity range evenly through the three tiered WIN-911 Priority Range (High,
Medium, and Low). Although the actual Alarm Severity may differ in RSView32
(example tag alarm 1 and tag alarm 2 are configured for severity 1 and 2,
respectively), if the alarms are grouped in the same WIN-911 Alarm Priority
(example High Priority for Severities 1 and 2), they will be called out on a first
come, first serve basis.
•
If RSView32 is set to use dynamic Priorities, this setting is ignored.
Deadband
The "Deadband" function is set within the RSView32 and is not a valid function for WIN911. This field is disabled for the RSView32 Direct Connect.
Automatic Acknowledgement
Never
Selecting this radio button will require a manual acknowledgement of the alarm.
On Alarm
Selecting this radio button will cause the alarm to automatically become "Acknowledged"
as it enters into an alarm condition. This option would allow audio reports of an alarm's
current condition without initiating other reporting options listed in the "Group". If this
option is active, the message (going into an alarm condition) will not generate "Pop-Up"
alarm messages or any of the "Dial-Out" options.
On Return To Normal
Selecting this radio button will cause the alarm to automatically acknowledge as it returns
to normal. This option removes the requirement that the associated alarm be responded
to by a person in the event that no one has acknowledged the alarm at the time it returns
to a normal condition. Experiment with all three of these options to get the results you
desire.
376
RSView SE Direct Connect
Sounds
Tag Sound
The Tag sound is played to announce the name of the current alarm. The text that will be
synthesized for speech will appear here. Remember that what is present here is only
taken into account if the Dynamic Sounds option is disabled.
Alarm Sounds
These sounds are played to announce the state of the alarm. The sound selection box
operates in the same manner as the tag sound selection box.
377
WIN-911 V7.14
Changeable
This feature is not supported for RSView32 Direct Connect data sources.
378
RSView SE Direct Connect
Watchdog Definitions
Watchdog Definition
The integrity of mission critical data, such as that which WIN-911 is tasked to monitor,
must be verifiable. This means that the data servers must have a way to demonstrate
their presence and functionality. WIN-911 provides the user with Watchdog Timers for this
very purpose. This function monitors one or two things to ensure data and/or servers are
healthy: observe a changing alarm condition that is guaranteed to cycle at a specified
rate, or a message from RSView32 indicating a loss of alarm information.
Note: Unlike other WIN-911 Watchdog functions, the RSView32 Watchdog monitors a
changing alarm condition rather than a changing value.
To utilize the Watchdog Timer setup a data point that is continuously cycling in and out of
alarm condition. A typical voice message for this condition could be: "WARNING, AREA
#4, HAS LOST COMMUNICATIONS WITH ALARM LOGGER".
Watchdog Timer Definition to Edit
“Alarms/Points” are arranged by “Groups”. Using the pull down list box, select the “Group”
that the new or existing watchdog alarm is assigned. Only the watchdogs associated with
the “Group” will be listed. You may select the appropriate “Group” by the pull-down list
box, or select “All Groups”.
After selecting the specific “Group” or selecting “All Groups”, you are ready to add or
modify analog alarms.
379
WIN-911 V7.14
Selecting New, Edit or double-clicking on the “Tagname” will bring up the Watchdog Timer
Definition sheet.
380
RSView SE Direct Connect
Base Definition
Tagname
Tagname is a unique identifier for the Watchdog Alarm.
Description
The Description Field is used to provide a more detailed description of a watchdog alarm.
This information is in addition to the Tagname and Group Name. It is best not to include
the Tagname or alarm Group Name in this description, since it is redundant.
Group Name
Like other alarms, Watchdog Timer Alarms are organized by Group. Select the Group to
which you wish to assign your Watchdog Timer here.
Access Name
The Access Name is used to select a predefined RSView32 Direct Connect server from
the list defined in the data sources.
Tagname for Item
Select this option to have the Tag Name copied into the Item Name field. Use this if your
RSView32 alarm name is descriptive enough to suit your needs.
Item Name
The Item Name refers to the alarm within RSView32 that is to be monitored. Its syntax
and case must match exactly to what is defined in RSView32.
381
WIN-911 V7.14
Alarm Conditions
Alarm and Normal
The Alarm and Normal text identifies the normal and alarm states that appear on the
alarm monitor displays and reports.
Time-out After __ Minutes
Watchdog Timers monitor a cycling alarm condition. If WIN-911 does not see a change in
that alarm after a certain period of time then WIN-911 will sound the alarm, indicating that
communication is lost. That amount of time is defined here. When an update is seen by
WIN-911, the Watchdog Timer Alarm will return to normal.
If a value of zero minutes is set here, then WIN-911 will trigger the Watchdog Timer Alarm
the moment that the connection with RSView32 is lost.
Priority
For each alarm, you may select three levels of "Priority": High, Medium, and Low. For
each "Group", a higher priority alarm will bump a lower priority alarm down the queue to
call out, even if the lower priority alarm was first in line.
Automatic Acknowledgement
Never
Selecting this radio button will require a manual acknowledgement of the alarm.
On Alarm
Selecting this radio button will cause the alarm to automatically become "Acknowledged"
as it enters into an alarm condition. This option would allow audio reports of an alarm's
current condition without initiating other reporting options listed in the "Group". If this
option is active, the message (going into an alarm condition) will not generate "Pop-Up"
alarm messages or any of the "Dial-Out" options.
On Return To Normal
Selecting this radio button will cause the alarm to automatically acknowledge as it returns
to normal. This option removes the requirement that the associated alarm be responded
to by a person in the event that no one has acknowledged the alarm at the time it returns
to a normal condition. Experiment with all three of these options to get the results you
desire.
382
RSView SE Direct Connect
Sounds
Tag, Alarm, and Normal Sounds
Like other WIN-911 alarms, the "Sounds" are essentially a verbalization of the description,
and the Alarm and Normal text to be used in the audio annunciation. As with any other
sounds, the sounds are selected from a dialog box. Unlike Digital and Analog Tags,
Watchdog sounds are not filtered.
Preview Announcer
Selecting this button will allow the user to review the alarm's entire audio ... AS IT WILL
BE HEARD IN THE LOCAL ANNOUNCER ... for each condition of the alarm.
383
RSView SE Direct Connect
Overview
The RSView SE Direct Connect option provides a means of connecting directly to
Rockwell Supervisory Edition version 3.20/4.0 or FactoryTalk View SE 5.0. The WIN-911
direct connect interface to RSView SE/FactoryTalk View SE facilitates access to alarms
generated by RSView SE/FactoryTalk View SE.
An Area can contain at most one server. Stand-alone Applications consist of a single root
Area with a single server. Distributed Applications support a hierarchy of Areas branching
from the Root Area and allow Areas to be contained within other Areas allowing for
multiple Servers. The important concept to take from this discussion is that an RSView
SE/FactoryTalk View SE Alarm can be uniquely identified by specifying a Tag and its
location within an Area hierarchy.
Many RSView SE/FactoryTalk View SE Alarms can be associated with a single Area.
WIN-911 implements Data Sources so that the Area information needs to be configured
only once. An RSView SE Direct Connect Data Source must specify a location within an
Area hierarchy. WIN-911 defines an Alarm with a Data Source (Area path) and an Item
Name (Data Tag), which uniquely identifies an RSView SE/FactoryTalk View SE Alarm.
Multiple data sources can be configured for RSView SE Direct Connect. Each
Area/Server WIN-911 is monitoring will require its own data source to be configured. The
RSView SE Direct Connect supports the ability to reconnect to any of the configured data
sources if the connection is ever lost.
The WIN-911 configurator has an import facility for RSView SE/FactoryTalk View SE
Alarms that takes as input the Tag and Alarm *.CSV files that are exported with the
RSView SE Tag Import and Export Wizard. These *.CSV files contain information about
Tags and Alarms from a specific Project, but do not specify the Area that contains that
project. When importing Alarms from RSView SE/FactoryTalk View SE, the user must
select the Tag and Alarm *.CSV files and must specify the Area path associated with
those files. The WIN-911 import facility uses the Area path to generate a Data Source and
associates the imported Alarms with that Data Source.
Note: The RSView SE Direct Connection only supports alarm tags. As 411 reports
require data tags, they are not available to RSView SE Direct Connections.
The RSView SE Direct Connect supports watchdog timers. The RSView SE watchdog
timers can be configured in two ways. Since WIN-911 only receives alarm event
information from RSView SE/FactoryTalk View SE and not data tag event information,
WIN-911 must monitor a changing alarm condition opposed to a changing data value. In
this case the watchdog timer would be set to value greater than the reoccurring alarm
condition. You can also use the RSView SE watchdog timer to monitor the connection to
the RSView SE/FactoryTalk View SE area/server. If the connection to the specific
area/server is lost, WIN-911 will create an alarm. Both watchdogs have the ability to
return to normal.
The RSView SE Direct Connect does not support Filter tags. The RSView SE Direct
Connect does however support Dynamic properties. These properties: Tag Sound;
385
WIN-911 V7.14
Description; Analog State Sound; Digital State Sound; Priority; and Units, take text strings
configured in RSView SE/FactoryTalk View SE and use them in WIN-911. These also
have the ability to be disabled allowing the user to configure these properties manually in
WIN-911.
RSView SE/FactoryTalk View SE assigns Severities to Alarms, ranging from 1 (most
severe) to 8 (least severe). WIN-911 uses this information in two ways. First, WIN-911
can filter RSView SE/FactoryTalk View SE Alarms based on the Severity of the Alarm. A
Severity filter is configured with a range of Severities. Any RSView SE/FactoryTalk View
SE Alarms outside this range will be ignored by WIN-911. The default Severity filter range
for WIN-911 is 1-8 so that no Alarms are ignored. The Second use of Severities by WIN911 is to assign Priorities, which are used in determining the order that notifications are
sent. Static Priorities are set during imports where Severities 1-3 map to High Priority, 4-6
map to Medium Priority, and 7-8 map to Low Priority. These Static Priorities are only used
if WIN-911 is not configured for Dynamic Priorities. For Dynamic Priorities, Severities are
mapped to Priorities by spreading the Severities as evenly as possible over the three
WIN-911 Priorities based on the configured Severity filter. For example, if the configured
Severity Filter range is 1-5, then Severities 1-2 map to High Priority, 3-4 map to Medium
Priority, and 5 maps to Low Priority.
RSView SE/FactoryTalk View SE Analog Alarms allow up to 8 Thresholds to be
configured. RSView SE/FactoryTalk View SE Thresholds must be either Increasing or
Decreasing. An Increasing Threshold generates an alarm when the process variable goes
above the Threshold, and a Decreasing Threshold generates an alarm when the process
variable goes below the Threshold. Increasing Threshold alarms are mapped to WIN-911
High alarms and Decreasing Threshold alarms are mapped to WIN-911 Low alarms.
386
FIX Direct Connect
WIN-911 Bridge Service
The RSView SE Direct Connect has a unique service that runs between RSView
SE/FactoryTalk View SE and Scan & Alarm to provide a bidirectional interface. The WIN911 Setup installs the service if it detects the presence of RSView SE/FactoryTalk View
SE on the local computer. After the installation RSView SE/FactoryTalk View SE will have
to be restarted, at which time the RSView SE/FactoryTalk View SE Client will launch the
WIN-911 Bridge Service as part of its startup routine.
When running in distributed mode, RSView SE/FactoryTalk View SE Clients receive
information concerning what services to start based on information provided by its server,
including the command to start the WIN-911 Bridge Service. If you are deploying WIN-911
on a distributed system and require information from a remotely located server, then the
administrator will need to modify the SLHMI-MLHMI Target.xml and SLHMI Target.xml on
the remote machines. This is accomplished through running the XMLRSView.exe tool
(located in WIN-911 V7\Tools) on the remote server machine.
Adding the *.XML initialization files for both client and server machine:
Run the following command line from a command prompt in the folder where the
XMLRSView.exe resides (for remote servers you will have to copy the file to the remote
computer where the server resides):
C:\Program Files\Specter Instruments\WIN-911 V7\Tools\XMLRSView.exe
If WIN-911 and RSView SE/FactoryTalk View SE do not interface properly, refer to
RSView SE Direct Connect Trouble Shooting, at the end of this Help file, for manual
registration procedures.
Note: When a RSView SE/FactoryTalk View SE "Patch" or "Upgrade" is applied to your
Rockwell system, the "*.XML" files are likely to be recreated and hence, lose the WIN-911
Bridge Server commands. You must re-run the XMLRSView.exe on all WIN-911
concerned computers each time you update the Rockwell software .
387
WIN-911 V7.14
Importing Alarms From RSView SE
Import Source
Use the WIN-911 Configurator's File\Import function to import your RSView
SE/FactoryTalk View SE tags. The workflow begins in RSView SE/FactoryTalk View SE
where you will export your RSView SE/FactoryTalk View SE data into *.CSV files. Once
the *.CSV (Tag and Alarm) files are created you may use the WIN-911 Configurator
Import function to browse and selectively import tags and assign them to alarm groups.
RSView Supervisory Edition Import
Generate RSView SE/FactoryTalk View SE Export
•
From the RSView SE/FactoryTalk View SE Studio Tools pull-down menu select
Tag Export and Import Wizard.
•
Select the Operation you would like to perform.
•
Export RSView SE/FactoryTalk View SE tag database to *.CSV files.
•
Choose the RSView SE/FactoryTalk View SE project that contains the tags you
want to export.
•
Project Type: Supervisory Edition
•
Project: C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Documents\RSView
Enterprise\SE\HMI Projects\My App\WWTP App.sed
Note: Choose the proper *.SED file and take note of the path.
•
Specify names for the destination files
•
Check both Tags and Alarms, name the files and take note of the paths so you
can find them during the WIN-911 import.
•
Click Finish to complete the export portion.
Start WIN-911 Import
From the WIN-911 Configurator File pull-down menu select Import/RSView SE.
RSView SE Export Files
Path to RSView SE Tags *.CSV
388
FIX Direct Connect
Use the Browse button to map the location of the “*Tags.CSV” file created by the export.
Path to RSView SE Alarms *.CSV
Use the Browse button to map the location of the “*Alarms.CSV” file created by the
export.
Automatic File Name Filtering
File filtering suppresses all files except ones ending in “-Tags.CSV” for the tag import and
“-Alarms.CSV” for the Alarm import, to make selection of the proper files easy.
RSView SE Project
Area Name
389
WIN-911 V7.14
A screenshot of the explorer pane in FactoryTalk Studio with the area highlighted in blue.
FactoryTalk places HMI tags in areas. You must specify the name of your area here. This
field is case sensitive and the area name must be preceded by a slash, "/." In the above
screenshot of the FactoryTalk Studio explorer pane, the Waste Water Project HMI server,
along with its HMI alarm tags, appear under the Waste Water area. In this example, you
would enter "/Waste Water" in Area Name field to monitor alarms on the Waste Water
Project server.
Stand-alone or local SE applications may not have an area defined. In this case, simple
enter a slash in the Area Name field.
Use Areas for Tag Name Prefixes
This option prepends the area to the tag names during an import. This is an easy way to
keep tags organized when configuring a multi-area Distributed project.
Use Area to generate Access Name
This option makes the Area Name the Access Name. If the Area Name is cryptic then you
may wish to use a different and more meaningful name. The Access Name must be
unique and each Area must have its own Access Name.
WIN-911 Data Source
Access Name
The “Access Name” is a unique user defined string that identifies the RSView SE Direct
Connect conversation. This name is later found in a pull down menu for selection
purposes. You may have as many “Access Names” as needed. Each Access Name
assigns the associated tag name to the RSView SE/FactoryTalk View SE Area.
Click OK to proceed to the tag import.
390
FIX Direct Connect
Importing Alarms
To select a block of tags to import quickly, click on the first tag of the block.
Note: Lite Mode users are prohibited from conducting block imports.
Next, scroll down to the bottom of the block list and shift-click the last tag.
391
WIN-911 V7.14
Once all the tags are selected, press the Add button and the application will fill the
Selected Tags.
If you wish to remove any of the tags from the list before the import is applied, select them
and click the Remove button. Otherwise, click Apply and the WIN-911 database import
will complete.
392
FIX Direct Connect
Global Options
The RSView SE tab of the Global Options allows the user to select the Alarm Severity
Filter and Dynamic Properties for the RSView SE Direct Connect data.
Note: RSView SE Watchdogs do not use Dynamic Properties.
Alarm Severity Filter
The range of alarm severity that WIN-911 will monitor is selected through this pull-down
menu. All alarms falling outside of the selected filter will be ignored. Level one severity is
the most severe.
Dynamic Properties
The RSView SE Direct Connect is designed to allow as much seamless integration
between Rockwell and WIN-911 as possible. This includes receiving as much information
from RSView SE/FactoryTalk View SE as possible dynamically during runtime, thus
preventing the need to redundantly and statically configure information in WIN-911.
However, instances can arise where this is not desired or possible.
All Dynamic Options
Enables all dynamic functions.
Tag Sounds
Dynamic Tag Sounds is the preferred mode of WIN-911 audio annunciation. It uses a two
tiered hierarchy of optional text sources to build the audio message at runtime. The first
choice of a text source for the Tag Sound extraction is the RSView SE/FactoryTalk View
393
WIN-911 V7.14
SE Tag Description. This text will be provided to WIN-911 during runtime as the data is
passed from RSView SE/FactoryTalk View SE. If the RSView SE/FactoryTalk View SE
Tag Description is undefined then WIN-911 will use the WIN-911 Tag Sound which is
statically defined in the WIN-911 configuration file. When both sound text sources are
undefined no sound will be generated.
Description
Dynamic descriptions accept description text from RSView SE/FactoryTalk View SE
during runtime as alarms occur and are passed to WIN-911. When static descriptions are
configured or dynamic text is not available then WIN-911 uses the text defined in the
alarm Base Definition.
Analog State Sounds
Dynamic Analog State Sounds are generated by reading text strings acquired from
RSView SE/FactoryTalk View SE during runtime as the data is passed from RSView
SE/FactoryTalk View SE to WIN-911. This string is called the “Threshold Label.” If the
Threshold Label is not available when the alarm data is passed, then WIN-911 falls back
to the Analog Sound text that is statically defined in the WIN-911 configuration (Analog
Definition, Sounds tab). When the check box is left unchecked then the RSView
SE/FactoryTalk View SE Threshold Label is ignored and only the text in WIN-911 is used.
Note: If both the dynamic and static analog state sounds are undefined WIN-911 will use
a hard coded string of “Threshold X” for alarm state annunciation, where “X” is a variable
of 1 through 8 representing the actual level.
Digital State Sounds
Dynamic Digital State Sounds are generated by reading text strings acquired from
RSView SE/FactoryTalk View SE during runtime as the data is passed from RSView
SE/FactoryTalk View SE to WIN-911. This string is called the “Alarm Label.” If the Alarm
Label is not available when the alarm data is passed, then WIN-911 falls back to the
Digital Sound text that is statically defined in the WIN-911 configuration (Digital Definition,
Sounds tab). When the check box is left unchecked then the RSView SE/FactoryTalk
View SE Alarm Label is ignored and only the text in WIN-911 is used.
Priority
Dynamic priority accepts severity level data from RSView SE/FactoryTalk View SE during
runtime as alarms occur and are passed to WIN-911. When the alarm priority is
configured statically, WIN-911 sets the priority during configuration and it is not modifiable
at runtime.
Units
Dynamically configured units accept unit text from RSView SE/FactoryTalk View SE
during runtime as alarms occur and are passed to WIN-911. When the engineering units
are defined statically they are set in the WIN-911 Configurator during development in the
Analog Alarm Base Definition tab and are not modifiable during runtime.
394
FIX Direct Connect
Data Source Definition
This button is used to setup data communications. Data point addressing can be
monotonous and syntactically rigorous. Rather than being forced into remembering (and
exactly typing) the Direct Connect invocation string for each “Item Name” to be alarmed,
you merely select the appropriate data source type from the selection list. When you
define data points, a selection box will provide you with a list of “Access Names” to
choose from. Simply select “RSView SE Direct Connect“.
Note: The data source definition is automatically configured if the RSView SE database
was imported using WIN-911's RSView SE import utility.
A data source for RSView SE Direct Connect users consists of two fields, the Access
Name and an Area Name. Both must be present to be valid and the user can configure as
many Access Names as needed, as long as they are unique.
Access Name
The Access Name is a tool that can be used to give a cryptic Alarm Area name an alias
name that may be more user friendly than the actual alarm area syntax. This name will
show up in the Digital and Analog definition dialogs to assign the proper area to the tag.
Area Name
395
WIN-911 V7.14
A screenshot of the explorer pane in FactoryTalk Studio with the area highlighted in blue.
FactoryTalk places HMI tags in areas. You must specify the name of your area here. This
field is case sensitive and the area name must be preceded by a slash, "/." In the above
screenshot of the FactoryTalk Studio explorer pane, the Waste Water Project HMI server,
along with its HMI alarm tags, appear under the Waste Water area. In this example, you
would enter "/Waste Water" in Area Name field to monitor alarms on the Waste Water
Project server.
Stand-alone or local SE applications may not have an area defined. In this case, simple
enter a slash in the Area Name field.
Selecting "Edit" or double-clicking on the "Access Name" will bring you back to the
RSView SE Direct Connect Options window. If more than one area needs to be defined
click New. Selecting "New" will bring you back to the Select Data Source Type window.
396
FIX Direct Connect
Digital Definitions
Digital Definition
Click this icon to configure digital alarms. Digital alarms are alarms which are either on or
off, also known as discrete alarms in other applications.
Digital Definition to Edit
Alarms are arranged by Groups. Using the pull down list box, select the Group that the
new or existing alarm/point is assigned. Only the alarms/points associated with the Group
will be listed. You may select the appropriate “Group” by the pull-down list box, or select
“All Groups”.
After selecting the specific Group or selecting "All Groups," you are ready to add or
modify digital alarms.
Selecting New, Edit or double-clicking on the Access Name will bring up the Digital
Definition sheet.
397
WIN-911 V7.14
Base Definition
Tagname
The Tagname is an alias for the RSView SE tag. This allows you to provide a more
human friendly name for your alarm.
Description
The Description field is used to provide a more detailed description of an alarm or point.
One of the time saving features of the RSView SE Direct Connect option is how WIN-911
utilizes the “Description” field as defined within the SCADA package.
Group Name
Alarms are organized by Group. Select the name of the group you wish to assign an
alarm to here.
Bit
This field is disabled for RSView SE alarms.
Access Name
The Access Name refers to the Access Name of your RSView SE Data Source.
Note: If the wrong Access Name is assigned to a Tag or if the Access Name contains a
syntax error in the Area Name it will not function at runtime.
Use Tagname for Item
Select this box to copy the Tagname into the Item Name field. Use this if the name of your
tag in RSView SE is user friendly enough.
Item Name
The Item Name field is used to reference the tag inside of RSView SE. Its syntax must
match RSView SE's tag exactly. It is case sensitive.
398
FIX Direct Connect
Alarm Conditions
Alarm and Normal Text Strings
The Alarm and Normal text strings for RSView SE/FactoryTalk View SE data points are
defined within the RSView SE/FactoryTalk View SE database and do not need to be
redefined here. If nothing is defined in RSView SE/FactoryTalk View SE, WIN-911 will
default back to the text entered here.
Digital Alarm
The “Digital Alarm” state for RSView SE/FactoryTalk View SE data points are defined
within the RSView SE/FactoryTalk View SE database and do not need to be redefined
here. Since this information is accessed directly from Supervisory Edition, this field is
disabled.
Initial Value
The “Initial Value” for RSView SE/FactoryTalk View SE data points are defined within
Supervisory Edition and do not need to be redefined here. Since this information is
accessed directly, this field is disabled.
Priority
Alarm Severity (RSView SE/FactoryTalk View SE) and Alarm Priority (WIN-911)
accomplish much the same thing by sorting alarm message urgency in a way that
ensures the alarm with higher urgency gets priority in the remote notification sequence.
Higher priority/severity alarms will go to the front of the line in the contact sequence while
alarms with the same priority/severity are handled on a first come first serve basis.
Things to note when assigning priorities:
•
Only tags that fall within the globally set Alarm Severity Filter range will be
monitored for remote notification regardless of assigned priority (See Options
RSView SE/FactoryTalk View SE).
•
During the import, WIN-911 will distribute the selected Severity range evenly
through the three tiered WIN-911 Priority Range (High, Medium, and Low).
•
Although the actual Alarm Severity may differ in RSView SE/FactoryTalk View SE
(example tag alarm 1 and tag alarm 2 are configured for severity 1 and 2,
respectively), if the alarms are grouped in the same WIN-911 Alarm Priority
(example High Priority for Severities 1 and 2), they will be called out on a first
come, first serve basis.
Automatic Acknowledgement
Never
399
WIN-911 V7.14
Selecting this radio button will require a manual acknowledgement of the alarm.
On Alarm
Selecting this radio button will cause the alarm to automatically become Acknowledged as
it enters into an alarm condition. This option would allow audio reports of an alarm's
current condition without initiating other reporting options listed in the Group. If this option
is active, the message (going into an alarm condition) will not generate Pop-Up alarm
messages or any of the remote notification options. Because the alarm is automatically
acknowledged, the message coming back to a normal state would indicate that the
condition is in the normal mode.
On Return To Normal
Selecting this radio button will cause the alarm to automatically acknowledge as it returns
to normal. This option removes the requirement that the associated alarm be responded
to by a person in the event that no one has acknowledged the alarm at the time it returns
to a normal condition. Experiment with all three of these options to get the results you
desire.
400
FIX Direct Connect
Sounds
Sounds are essentially a verbalization of the alarm description and the “Alarm” and
“Normal” sound to be used in the audio annunciation. As with any other sounds, the
sounds are selected from a dialog box. The sound and preview buttons are disabled when
Dynamic sounds are selected in the data source's global options.
Tag Sound
The Tag Sound is essentially a verbalization of the Tagname and/or the description to be
used in the audio annunciation. As with any other sounds, the sounds are selected from a
dialog box. This sound is required for any voice connection. See RSView SE Options
concerning dynamic tag sounds.
Alarm & Normal Sound
These sounds are the verbalization of the Alarm and Normal conditions.
Note: If Digital Alarm Prefix sound is defined, under Common Sounds, it will be appended
to the beginning of the Alarm Sound.
Use Is / Was
In some cases, using the “Is / Was” sounds will not make sense. Selecting the check-box
next to “Use Is / Was” will activate its use. Leaving the check-box blank will omit its use.
An example of this sound would be “The Entry Door IS open”.
Preview Announcer
Selecting this button will allow you to review this alarm's audio as it will be heard on the
local announcer for each condition of the alarm. Selecting the Auto Acknowledge option
discussed above will affect whether you can test the State Acknowledged button.
401
WIN-911 V7.14
Changeable
This feature is not supported for RSView SE Direct Connect data sources.
402
FIX Direct Connect
Analog Definitions
Analog Definition
With WIN-911, alarms are classified either as Digital, or Analog data values. Analog
alarms, also known as level alarms, are configured with the Analog Alarm Definition
button.
Special Note to Lite Mode Users: Analog alarms are not permitted in Lite Mode.
Analog Definition to Edit
Alarms are arranged by Groups. Using the pull down list box, select the Group that the
new or existing alarm/point is assigned. Only the alarms/points associated with the Group
will be listed. You may select the appropriate “Group” by the pull-down list box, or select
“All Groups”.
After selecting the specific Group or selecting "All Groups," you are ready to add or
modify analog alarms.
403
WIN-911 V7.14
Selecting New, Edit or double-clicking on the Tagname will bring up the Analog Definition
dialog.
404
FIX Direct Connect
Base Definition
Tagname
RSView SE/FactoryTalk View SE data point tag names tend to be cryptic and otherwise
non-descriptive. The WIN-911 “Tagname” is a symbolic tool that allows the user to assign
names to data points that are better fit for human consumption. It should be kept in mind
that this is WIN-911's name for the data point, and not Rockwell's. The “Item Name” is
Supervisory Edition's name for the data point and is independent of the “Tagname”
(unless “Use Tagname for Item” is selected).
Description
The Description field is used to provide a more detailed description of an alarm or point.
One of the time saving features of the RSView SE Direct Connect option is how WIN-911
utilizes the Description field as defined within the SCADA package.
Group Name
Alarms are organized by Group. Select the name of the group you wish to assign an
alarm to here.
Engineering Units
405
WIN-911 V7.14
The Engineering Units field for RSView SE/FactoryTalk View SE data points are defined
within the Supervisory Edition import and can be redefined by replacing the text located
here.
Note: The text here is used to generate the sound for engineering units.
Access Name
The Access Name is used to select a predefined data conversation from the list defined in
the Data Source Definitions. The RSView SE Direct Connect convention uses this field to
assign both the RSView SE Direct Connect and the Area.
Note: If the wrong Access Name is assigned to a Tag or if the Access Name contains
syntax errors in the Area Name it will not function at runtime.
Use Tagname for Item
Selecting this box will cause the Tagname to be copied directly into the item name. This is
useful when connecting to other tag oriented programs.
Item Name
The Item Name is used to refer to the RSView SE tag. Its syntax must match exactly what
is defined within RSView SE.
406
FIX Direct Connect
Conversion
Conversion Type
Conversion of raw data is not supported for RSView SE connections.
Number of Decimal Places
WIN-911 supports 32 bit signed integers and 32 bit floating point values. A 32 bit integer
is the default data type. For floating point numbers set the number of decimal places to
something other than zero.
407
WIN-911 V7.14
Alarm Limits
RSView SE/FactoryTalk View SE Analog Alarms allow up to 8 Thresholds to be
configured. RSView SE/FactoryTalk View SE Thresholds must be either Increasing or
Decreasing. An Increasing Threshold generates an alarm when the process variable goes
above the Threshold, and a Decreasing Threshold generates an alarm when the process
variable goes below the Threshold. Increasing Threshold alarms are mapped to WIN-911
High alarms and Decreasing Threshold alarms are mapped to WIN-911 Low alarms.
Things to keep in mind when configuring Alarm Limits
Initial Value
The Initial Value function is set within the RSView SE/FactoryTalk View SE and is not a
valid function for WIN-911. This field is disabled for the RSView SE Direct Connect.
Priority
Alarm Severity (RSView SE/FactoryTalk View SE) and Alarm Priority (WIN-911)
accomplish much the same thing by sorting alarm message urgency in a way the ensures
the alarm with higher urgency gets priority in the remote notification sequence. Higher
priority/severity alarms will go to the front of the line in the contact sequence while alarms
with the same priority/urgency are handled on a first come first serve basis.
Things to note when assigning priorities:
•
Only tags that fall within the globally set Alarm Severity Filter will be monitored for
remote notification regardless of assigned priority (See Options RSView SE).
•
During the import, WIN-911 will distribute the selected Severity range evenly
through the three tiered WIN-911 Priority Range (High, Medium, and Low).
•
Although the actual Alarm Severity may differ in RSView SE/FactoryTalk View SE
(example tag alarm 1 and tag alarm 2 are configured for severity 1 and 2,
respectively), if the alarms are grouped in the same WIN-911 Alarm Priority
(example High Priority for Severities 1 and 2), they will be called out on a first
come, first serve basis.
Note: This selection will be disabled when Dynamic Priority is enabled.
Deadband
The “Deadband” function is set within the RSView SE/FactoryTalk View SE and is not a
valid function for WIN-911. This field is disabled for the RSView SE Direct Connect.
Automatic Acknowledgement
Never
408
FIX Direct Connect
Selecting this radio button will require a manual acknowledgement of the alarm.
On Alarm
Selecting this radio button will cause the alarm to automatically become “Acknowledged”
as it enters into an alarm condition. This option would allow audio reports of an alarm's
current condition without initiating other reporting options listed in the “Group”. If this
option is active, the message (going into an alarm condition) will not generate “Pop-Up”
alarm messages or any of the “Dial-Out” options. Because the alarm is automatically
acknowledged, the message coming back to a normal state would indicate that the
condition is in the normal mode. The “Was” message would never be used.
On Return To Normal
Selecting this radio button will cause the alarm to automatically acknowledge as it returns
to normal. This option removes the requirement that the associated alarm be responded
to by a person in the event that no one has acknowledged the alarm at the time it returns
to a normal condition. Experiment with all three of these option boxes to get the results
you desire.
409
WIN-911 V7.14
Sounds
The sound and preview buttons are disabled when Dynamic sounds are selected in the
data source's global options.
Tag Sound
The Tagname Sound is essentially a verbalization of the Tagname and/or the description
to be used in the audio annunciation. As with any other sounds, the sounds are selected
from a dialog box. See RSView SE Options concerning dynamic tag sounds.
Alarm Sounds
A specific sound can be specified for each of the alarm conditions. These sounds are
normally the verbalization of the phrases "above the threshold alarm," "below the
threshold alarm." In addition, there is a return to normal sound which may be the phrase
"in the normal range."
Note: The Common Sounds, RSView SE Only tab defines Alarm State Prefixes that can
be appended to the beginning of the Alarm Sounds.
Is / Was Selection
In some cases, using the "Is/Was" sound will not make sense. Selecting the check-box
next to "Use Is/Was" will activate its use. Leaving the check-box blank will omit its use.
Preview Announcer
Selecting this button will allow you to review this alarm's audio as it will be heard on the
local announcer for each condition of the alarm. Selecting the Auto Acknowledge option
discussed above will affect whether you can test the State Acknowledged button.
410
FIX Direct Connect
Changeable
This feature is not supported for RSView SE/FactoryTalk View SE Direct Connect data
sources.
411
WIN-911 V7.14
Watchdog Timer Definitions
Watchdog Timer Definition
The integrity of mission critical data such as that which WIN-911 is tasked to monitor must
be verifiable. This means that the data servers must have a way to demonstrate their
presence and functionality. WIN-911 provides the user with Watchdog Timers for this very
purpose. This function monitors one or two things (user definable) to ensure data and/or
servers are healthy: 1) observe a changing alarm condition that is guaranteed to cycle at
a specified rate, or 2) a message from RSView SE/FactoryTalk View SE indicating a loss
of alarm information.
Note: Unlike other WIN-911 Watchdog functions, the RSView SE Watchdog monitors a
changing alarm condition rather than a changing value.
To utilize the Watchdog Timer setup a data point that is continuously cycling in and out of
alarm condition. A typical voice message for this condition could be: "WARNING AREA #4
HAS LOST COMMUNICATIONS WITH ALARM LOGGER."
Watchdog Timer Definition to Edit
Alarms are arranged by Groups. Using the pull down list box, select the Group that the
new or existing watchdog alarm is assigned. Only the watchdogs associated with the
Group will be listed. You may select the appropriate Group by the pull-down list box, or
select "All Groups."
After selecting the specific Group or selecting "All Groups," you are ready to add or
modify analog alarms.
412
FIX Direct Connect
Selecting New, Edit or double-clicking on the Tagname will bring up the Watchdog Timer
Definition dialog.
413
WIN-911 V7.14
Base Definition
Tagname
The Tagname is a unique identifier of an alarm/point.
RSView SE/FactoryTalk View SE Watchdog's ignore the severity level defined in RSView
SE/FactoryTalk View SE for the alarm used to monitor an Area. It also ignores the
selected range the user has setup in "Options."
Description
The Description Field is used to provide a more detailed description of a watchdog alarm.
This information is in addition to the Tagname and Group Name. It is best not to include
the Tagname or alarm Group Name in this description, since it is redundant.
Group Name
Alarms are organized by groups for reporting out-of-tolerance conditions. Select the
Group that you wish to assign the Watchdog Timer to here.
Access Name
The Access Name is used to select a predefined RSView SE Direct Connect server from
the list defined in the data sources. This field must be defined.
Tagname for Item
Selecting this box will cause the Tagname to be copied directly into the item name. This is
useful when connecting to other tag oriented programs.
Item Name
The Item Name is the name of the cycling alarm you wish to monitor within RSView SE.
This field is case sensitive.
414
FIX Direct Connect
Alarm Conditions
Alarm and Normal
The Alarm States text identifies the normal and alarm states that appear on the alarm
monitor displays and reports.
Time-out After __ Minutes
The Time-out After __ Minutes field is a count down timer preset. Each time a new alarm
state is reported for the selected item, the counter is reset to the preset value. If the timer
ever counts down to zero, the alarm occurs. This entry is in one-minute increments.
If a value of zero minutes is configured in the field, the Watchdog alarm will be triggered
by a loss of communication with the data source, or to be more specific, a loss of
communication with the configured area. Since, the RSView SE Direct Connect data
source can re-establish communication with WIN-911, these Watchdogs can return to
normal.
Priority
For each alarm, you may select three levels of Priority: High, Medium, and Low. For each
Group, a higher priority alarm will bump a lower priority alarm down the queue to call out,
even if the lower priority alarm was first in line.
Automatic Acknowledgement
Never
Selecting this radio button will require a manual acknowledgement of the alarm.
On Alarm
Selecting this radio button will cause the alarm to automatically become Acknowledged as
it enters into an alarm condition. This option would allow audio reports of an alarm's
current condition without initiating other reporting options listed in the Group. If this option
is active, the alarm will not generate Pop-Up alarm messages or any of the Dial-Out
options.
On Return To Normal
Selecting this radio button will cause the alarm to automatically acknowledge as it returns
to normal. This option removes the requirement that the associated alarm be responded
to by a person in the event that no one has acknowledged the alarm at the time it returns
to a normal condition. Experiment with all three of these options to get the results you
desire.
415
WIN-911 V7.14
Sounds
Tag, Alarm, and Normal Sounds
Like other WIN-911 alarms, the “Sounds” are essentially a verbalization of the description,
and the Alarm and Normal text to be used in the audio annunciation. As with any other
sounds, the sounds are selected from a dialog box. Unlike Digital and Analog Tags,
Watchdog sounds are not dynamic.
Is/Was Selection
In some cases, using the “Is / Was” audio will not make sense. Selecting the check-box
next to “Use Is / Was” will activate its use. Leaving the check-box blank will omit its use.
Preview Announcer
Selecting this button will allow you to review this alarm's entire audio as it will be heard on
the local announcer, for each condition of the alarm.
416
FIX Direct Connect
Troubleshooting
If WIN-911 and RSView SE/FactoryTalk View SE do not properly interface then check the
following troubleshooting steps to resolve issue.
WIN-911 Bridge Server
The RSView SE Direct Connect has a unique service that runs between RSView
SE/FactoryTalk View SE and Scan & Alarm to provide a bidirectional interface. The WIN911 Setup installs the service if it detects the presence of RSView SE/FactoryTalk View
SE on the local computer. After the installation RSView SE/FactoryTalk View SE will have
to be restarted, at which time the RSView SE/FactoryTalk View SE Client will launch the
WIN-911 Bridge Service as part of its startup routine.
When running in distributed mode, RSView Clients receive information concerning what
services to start based on information provided by server(s), including the command to
start the WIN-911 Bridge Service. If you are deploying WIN-911 on a distributed system
and require information from a remotely located server, then the administrator will need to
modify the SLHMI-MLHMI Target.xml and SLHMI Target.xml on the remote machines.
This is accomplished through running the XMLRSView.exe tool (located in WIN-911
V7\Tools) on the remote server machine.
Adding the *.XML initialization files for both client and server machine:
Run the following command line from a command prompt in the folder where the
XMLRSView.exe resides (for remote servers you will have to copy the file to the remote
computer where the server resides):
C:\Program Files\Specter Instruments\WIN-911 V7\Tools\XMLRSView.exe
If WIN-911 and RSView SE/FactoryTalk View SE do not interface properly refer to
Chapter 14, RSView Direct Connect Trouble Shooting Discussion, WIN-911 Bridge
Service, for manual registration procedures.
Note: When a RSView SE/FactoryTalk View SE “Update” or “Upgrade” is applied to your
Rockwell system, the “*.XML” files are likely to be recreated and hence, lose the WIN-911
Bridge Server commands. It is good practice to re-run the XMLRSView executable on all
WIN-911 concerned computers each time you update the Rockwell software .
The following procedures contain three independent and self-contained steps. At the
completion of each step WIN-911 and RSView SE/FactoryTalk View SE should be tested
for proper interface. If the test is successful then there is no need to proceed to the next
step.
Step One: Register Service with XMLRSView.exe
To manually run the XMLRSView.exe from the command prompt within the WIN-911
Tools folder and execute the program with the following command line:
C:\Program Files\Specter Instruments\WIN-911 V7\Tools\XMLRSView.exe
Retest WIN-911 and RSView.
417
WIN-911 V7.14
Step Two: Manually Register Service with Notepad
There are two XML files located in Rockwell Software\Rockwell Enterprise folder that
need to list the WIN-911 Bridge Service: SLHMI-MLHMI Target.xml and SLHMI
Target.xml.
To locate them quickly use Explorer to navigate the Rockwell Software (most likely
located in Program Files)\|Rockwell Enterprise folder. Sort the files by Type and reverse
the order so the XML files are on top.
Begin with the SLHMI-MLHMI Target.xml. Open the file with Notepad and look for the
</HMISERVICES> section terminator. Add a line above the section terminator with the
following text:
<HMISERVICE Name=“WIN911 Bridge Service” ServiceID=“{8545C8E4-06E3-4DC8BB4B-CA454418EF73}” Client=“RsHmi.Win911BridgeService.1” TestRun=“0” Style=“0”
Managed=“1”/>
Note: In order to avoid syntax errors Specter Instruments has placed a file in the WIN-911
Tools folder with the proper data. Open the WIN-911 Target.xml file with Notepad and
Copy the “<HMISERVICE…” command line, then Paste it in the proper location.
Repeat the above procedure for the SLHMI Target.xml file.
Retest WIN-911 and RSView SE/FactoryTalk View SE.
Step Three: Manually register Service using the Command Prompt
To manually register the service from the command prompt use the following command
including the double quote (“) characters surrounding the service name:
FactoryTalk View SE 6.0 and up:
"C:\Program Files\Specter Instruments\WIN-911 V7\Tools\6xx\WIN911 Bridge
Service.exe" /RegServer
Previous versions:
"C:\Program Files\Specter Instruments\WIN-911 V7\Tools\WIN911 Bridge
Service.exe" /RegServer
Note: Technically you do not have to go to the System32 folder to register the service but
the path was included to show the location.
Retest WIN-911 and RSView SE/FactoryTalk View SE.
Should the need arise, you can manually unregister the service use the following
command line:
FactoryTalk View SE 6.0 and up:
"C:\Program Files\Specter Instruments\WIN-911 V7\Tools\6xx\WIN911 Bridge
Service.exe" /UnregServer
418
FIX Direct Connect
Previous versions:
"C:\Program Files\Specter Instruments\WIN-911 V7\Tools\WIN911 Bridge
Service.exe" /UnregServer
419
FIX Direct Connect
FIX Direct Connect Setup (Required)
The FIX Remote Alarm relies on a UserQ (choose from AlmUserQ.exe, WUSERQ1.exe,
WUSERQ2.exe) to receive data as well as alarm information. This UserQ can be set to
launch during the iFIX startup by using the Task Configuration tool located in the System
Configuration Utility (SCU).
1. Before you begin the AlmUserQ.exe will need to be moved from the WIN-911
folder to the Proficy iFIX folder. The AlmUserQ.exe is located by default in
C:\Program Files\Specter Instruments\WIN911 V7\Tools\. Copy the file to
C:\Program Files\GE Fanuc\Proficy iFIX\. (If using iFIX 3.5 or earlier copy the file
to C:\Dynamics)
2. Select Start | Programs | Proficy HMI SCADA - iFIX | System Configuration.
3. From the Configure pull-down menu, select Tasks... to launch the Task
Configuration dialog window.
4. Use the Filename: selection field to include AlmUserQ.exe (or WUSERQ1.exe, or
WUSERQ2.exe) in the Configured Tasks: list. The path by default will be
C:\Program Files\GE Fanuc\Proficy iFIX\ AlmUserQ.EXE. This task can be run in
the background by selecting Background under Start Up Mode.
5. Next you will need to include a command line argument. First you must give the
AlmUserQ a name. This name is defined in the WIN-911 Configurator under the
FIX tab in Global Options. By default the name is TeleDAC. The command line
argument should read /nTeleDAC
A queue size can also be configured in the command line. To specify the number
of events the queue can hold, add a space followed by a /sXXXX, where X is the
421
WIN-911 V7.14
number of events. For example, a queue size limit of 6000 events is /s6000.
6. Click Add to place the AlmUserQexe /nTeleDAC /s6000 in the Task Configuration
list. If you are using the Task Configuration tool to start WIN-911, make sure
TeleDAC.exe is placed after the UserQ
7. Select OK and Save the configuration. Restart iFIX.
422
InTouch Direct Connect
FIX Direct Connect Demonstration
In order to gain a quick and thorough understanding of the capabilities of the FIX Direct
Connect, Specter presents the FIXDEMO. Located in the C:\Program Files\Specter
Instruments\WIN-911 V7\Tools folder are all the components necessary to run a
complete interactive WIN-911 - FIX demonstration. (This demo requires iFIX or FIX32 to
be resident on your host node!) With this demo you will be able to monitor and control
predefined data points. From the iFIX (or FIX32) View screen you will be able to vary
analog tank levels and toggle digital switches, sending data points in and out of alarm.
You may also change values via WIN-411, as well as query reports of current operating
conditions. The FIXDEMO is designed to provide you with a comprehensive illustration of
the functionality of the WIN-911 - iFIX (or FIX32) ensemble.
1. Using Windows Explorer, open the FIXDEMO folder located in the C:\Program
Files\Specter Instruments\WIN-911 V7\Tools\FixDemo\Dynamics (or FIX32)
directory where you will find the applicable PDB and .GRF .ODF files. Copy the
Dynamics.pdb or Fixdemo.pdb into the iFIX Pdb folder and the .GRF or ODF files
into the iFIX Pic folder. Next, copy the AlarmAreas.aad into the iFIX Pdb and the
FIX Local folders.
2. Using the iFIX System Configuration utility, double-click on the PDB and select
Dynamics for the database name. For FIX32 select Fixdemo.pdb.
3. In the iFIX or FIX32 System Configuration utility, select Task Configuration and
ensure that AlmUserQ.exe (or WUSERQ1.exe for FIX32) is included in the
Configured Tasks window. See the above section, "iFIX Startup Modifications
(Required)."
4. From the iFIX or FIX32 Program Folder select Startup. After the startup sequence
is complete, go back to the iFIX Program Folder and launch the View program.
From the View Menu Bar, select File, Open, Fixmenu.grf or Fixmenu.odf. This will
bring you to the Welcome screen:
This is the main menu of the Dynamics. From here you can toggle between the Plastic
Molding, City Water, and Building Security demos. You may also review the requirements
423
WIN-911 V7.14
for running this demo or exit the View program altogether. Let us start by launching the
WIN-911 runtime module with the “FIX Remote Alarm DEMO” configuration.
1. Launch the WIN-911 Configurator and select File, Open, FIX Direct Connect
DEMO.mdb. This will set the current configuration pointer to run this configuration
the next time TeleDAC.exe is started.
2. Start TeleDAC.exe and observe the “Status” of the runtime module during the
launch sequence to ensure all components start successfully.
3. Returning to the FIXMENU, select the Plastic Molding button.
Located in this View screen are digital toggle switches: Load Conveyor, Flow Switch,
analog Hoppers #1, #2, and #3 and an analog keyboard entry field for the Vacuum
Sensor. Also located in the “Plastic Molding/Raw Material Hopper Levels” view screens
are WIN911/411 Details that define the alarm limits that have been configured for each
data point. The Return to Menu button returns the user to the FIXMENU; and at the
bottom of the screen is the alarm message window, which details the status of current
alarms.
Let's experiment with the Plastic Molding demo:
1. Select the Load Conveyor button at the top right of the Plastic Molding window.
This will change the color of the conduit to green, representing the flow of raw
materials.
2. Click the Flow Switch button, which will invoke a push button entry to appear.
Select Close and OK, causing the Flow Sensor to close, simulating the indication
of material flow stoppage. This will cause an alarm message field and a Box to
424
InTouch Direct Connect
appear over the view screen.
3. Acknowledge this alarm from WIN-911 by clicking on the Acknowledge button
located in the lower center of the pop-up box. Notice that the pop-up box
disappears and a check appears to the left of the alarm message window,
indicating the current alarm had been acknowledged.
4. Click on the Flow Switch button a second time to reopen the flow. The raw
materials flow will be restored and the alarm message will turn green and
disappear, indicating the data point returned to its normal state.
5. Now click on WIN911 Details and note the low limit for the Vacuum Sensor:
6. Next, highlight the Vacuum Sensor value box located at the top center, just below
the analog gauge. Using your keypad, enter 2 and hit return. This will send the
value below the low limit, causing another pop-up box to appear on top of the view
screen.
Please continue to experiment with the WIN-911 - FIX32 ensemble using WIN911/411
Details to cue you in on the system alarm limits. The Pneumatic Conveyor, City Water,
and Building Security operate in the same general manner, although each varies slightly
to illustrate the different ways WIN-911 can be configured to process data. Modification to
the FIX Direct Connect.mdb to include pager and voice connections will give a more
comprehensive demonstration of WIN-911 capabilities.
425
WIN-911 V7.14
Note: When changing from one demo to another, it is best to acknowledge and clear all
items of the current demo. Otherwise, alarm messages pertaining to the current demo
may show up in a later demo and cause confusion.
426
InTouch Direct Connect
FIX Block Types
WIN-911's FIX Remote Alarm option supports nine Fix block types for local node
monitoring:
1. Analog Input (AI) - Read/Write
2. Analog Output (AO) - Read/Write
3. Analog Alarm (AA) - Read/Write
4. Analog Register (AR) - Read/Write
5. Digital Input (DI) - Read/Write
6. Digital Output (DO) - Read/Write
7. Digital Alarm (DA) - Read/Write
8. Digital Register (DR) - Read/Write
9. Multiple Digital Input (MDI)
Support has been added for Rate of Change and Deviation alarms.
Special Block Types have been added for Bailey DSC:
1. Block Device Driver (BDD)
2. Block Digital Input (BDI)
3. Remote Control Memory (RCM)
4. Block Multistate Device Driver (BMD)
5. Remote Motor Control Block (RMC)
6. Remote Manual Set Constant (RMS)
7. Block Analog Input (BAI)
8. Block Station (BST)
9. Data Acquisition Analog (DAA)
Special Block Types have been added for Texas Instruments. Refer to TI for details.
1. AAO Data (AAO)
2. BMS Data (BMS)
3. DAO Data (DAO)
Special Block Type has been added for GE Infrastructure sensing. Refer to GE
Infrastructure Sensing for details.
427
WIN-911 V7.14
Kaye Analog Alarm (KAA)
Special Block Type has been added for GxP Automation. Refer to GxP Automation for
details.
Analog Alarm Modified (AAM) - Read/Write
428
InTouch Direct Connect
Import Source
Use the WIN-911 Configurator's File\Import function to save time and energy as well as
ensure data-point syntax accuracy. This easy to use function will scan the FIX database
for all data-points that WIN-911 can monitor and present them in a list of data-point import
candidates. From that list you select the needed data singularly by clicking individual
points or in mass by clicking the first in a series and shift-clicking on the last.
Note: The only tags that will appear for import are block types that WIN-911 can monitor
(AA, AI, AO, AR, DA, DI, DO, DR, MDI, BDD, BDI, RCM, BMD, RMC, RMS, BAI, BST,
DAA, AAO, BMS, DAO, KAA, AAM), all other tags will not show up for selection.
Warning: It is possible to manually define tags in WIN-911 for unsupported block types;
however, at runtime those alarms will not function.
There are two methods of importing to choose from: 1) FIX Dynamic EDA and 2) FIX
*.GDB. The Dynamic EDA is the easier and preferred method. The only drawback is that
the FIX must be running to perform this kind of import.
FIX Dynamic EDA Database Select
Prior to importing FIX data dynamically you must have FIX running. The FIX Dynamic
EDA import works for all versions of Fix: FIX32 or iFIX. The Dynamic EDA Import can be
used without interrupting the FIX; it is definitely less time consuming than the GDB import,
and supports the same block types as the GDB import. The first step in doing the FIX
Dynamic import is to select a node name.
429
WIN-911 V7.14
WIN-911 communicates with the running FIX32 or iFIX and gives you a list of node ns
from which to choose. If the FIX is a stand alone system WIN-911 will show you all of the
names associated with this particular node such as its physical, logical and backup
names. When FIX is networked WIN-911 will show you all node names this particular
node is aware of plus all of its variations. Once a Node name is selected from the drop
down list, you will be presented the FIX Tag Select dialog box.
Redundant Applications
When importing tags from a redundant FIX Node the user wants to select the local logical
node name from the Available Nodes: list. This will import the tags into WIN-911 with the
proper node prefix for representing both physical nodes in the redundant pair.
FIX *.GDB Database Select
From the iFIX Database Manager select Database\Export\*.GDB to generate a “*.GDB”
file from the master “*.PDB” file.
From the File pull-down menu in the WIN-911 Configurator select Import\iFIX and FIX32.
Select the appropriate “*.GDB” file by browsing the appropriate folder.
430
InTouch Direct Connect
Importing Tags
To select a block of tags to import quickly, click on the first tag of the block.
431
WIN-911 V7.14
Next, scroll down to the bottom of the block list and shift-click the last tag.
Once all the tags are selected, press the Add button and the application will fill the
Selected Tags from the entire “*.PDB” database.
If you wish to deselect any of the tags from the list before the import macro is run, select
them from the Selected Tags using the Remove button. Otherwise, select Apply and the
WIN-911 database import will execute.
432
InTouch Direct Connect
Global Options
FIX Program Path
Use of the Direct Connect option with GE's FIX will require providing WIN-911 with the
location of the HMI package. The field provided allows the user a choice between
manually entering the path, or using the Browse button to invoke the Select FIX Directory
dialog box to define the path.
Alarm Queue
WUSERQ1, WUSERQ2, or AlmUserQ can be selected to pass data to WIN-911 by
choosing the appropriate radio button.
AlmUserQ Name must be declared by WIN-911 and when the AlmUserQ radio button is
selected this text box is enabled. The default name is "TeleDAC" (case sensitive), but the
user may name it anything up to sixteen characters.
Note: Specter Instruments recommends iFIX Dynamics users only use AlmUserQ rather
than either of the WuserQ's.
Special Note for AlmUserQ: The following command line must be entered in the Configure
Tasks list in the SCU: "/nTeleDAC"
Security
Enable Security checkbox configures WIN-911 for iFIX security features. Text boxes are
provided for the iFIX security Login Name and Password.
Note: Be sure that the user login entered here can write to all alarm groups WIN-911 is
monitoring, or acknowledgements originating from WIN-911 will not be honored by iFIX.
Alarm on any communications failure
Select this check box to allow alarm notifications in the event of a communications failure.
433
WIN-911 V7.14
Data Source Definition
This button is used to setup data communications. Data point addressing can be
monotonous and syntactically rigorous. Rather than being forced into remembering (and
exactly typing) the Direct Connect invocation string for each “Item Name” to be alarmed,
you merely select the appropriate data source type from the selection list. When you
define data points, a selection box will provide you with a list of “Access Names” to
choose from. Simply select “FIX Remote Alarm“.
Note: The data source definition is automatically configured if the FIX database was
imported using one of WIN-911's FIX import utilities.
Here the FIX Program Path is defined. You may use the Browse button to locate the path.
Click OK.
Selecting "Edit" or double-clicking on the "Access Name" will bring you back to the FIX
Program Path window.
434
InTouch Direct Connect
Digital Definitions
Digital Definition
This button is used to define all digital points. With both WIN-911 and WIN-411, alarms or
monitored points are classified as either a Digital “1” or “0”, or “bit picked” Analog data
values. Digital alarms/points are configured within this button.
Special Note: Lite Mode users are limited to a total of 24 digital tags and unlimited
watchdog alarms. Analog tags are not supported in Lite Mode.
Digital Definition to Edit
Alarms are organized by Group. Using the pull down list box, select the Group that the
new or existing alarm/point is assigned. Only the alarms/points associated with the Group
will be listed. You may select the appropriate Group by the pull-down list box, or select All
Groups.
After selecting the specific Group or selecting All Groups, you are ready to add or modify
digital alarms.
Selecting New, Edit or double-clicking on the Access Name will bring up the Digital
Definition dialog.
435
WIN-911 V7.14
Base Definition
Tagname
The tagname is an alias of the FIX alarm name. This is only a user friendly name for the
alarm. It is not used to address the alarm within FIX.
Description
The Description field is used to provide a more detailed description of an alarm or point.
One of the time saving features of the FIX Remote Alarm option is how WIN-911 utilizes
the Description field as defined within the SCADA package. This field is active when the
tag is imported; if it is manually created, then the field is disabled.
Group Name
Alarms are organized by Group. Assign the alarm Group using the drop down menu here.
Bit
If you are using the FIX Remote Alarm option, this field will be disabled, as Remote Alarm
is the only valid selection.
Access Name
The Access Name is used to refer to your FIX Data Source Definition.
Use Tagname for Item
Check this box to copy the Tagname into the Item Name field.
Item Name
The Item Name is used to identify the particular item to monitor from the FIX. The actual
name entered here must conform exactly to the FIX's data point nomenclature. In the
case of the FIX Remote Alarm option for FIX, the Item Name must be entered as such:
Node:Tag Name
This field is case sensitive and must be defined.
Note: The Terms "Node” and “Tag Name” are terms specific to the FIX. FIX Tag Names
do not include filters. Please refer to FIX documentation for details. You can also use the
FIX's SCU and Database Builder to determine proper input for both. Care should be taken
not to confuse WIN-911's “Tagname” and the FIX's “Tag Name”.
436
InTouch Direct Connect
Alarm Conditions
Alarm and Normal Text Strings
The Alarm and Normal Text Strings for FIX data points are defined within the FIX SCADA
package and do not need to be redefined here. Since this information is accessed directly
from the FIX, these fields are disabled.
Digital Alarm
The Digital Alarm state for FIX data points are defined within the FIX SCADA package
and do not need to be redefined here. Since this information is accessed directly from the
FIX, this field is disabled.
Initial Value
The Initial Value for FIX data points are defined within the FIX SCADA package and do
not need to be redefined here. Since this information is accessed directly from the FIX,
this field is disabled.
Priority
The Priority for FIX data points are defined within the FIX SCADA package and do not
need to be redefined here. Since this information is accessed directly from the FIX, this
field is disabled. Within a Group, a higher priority alarm will bump a lower priority alarm
down the queue to call out, even if the lower priority alarm was first in line. Alarm priority
is originally defined when a point is imported.
Note: iFIX 4.0 uses a seven layered priority structure that maps to WIN-911's three
layered structure as follows: Critical, HIHI, and HIGH iFIX priorities are translated to WIN911's High Priority. Medium iFIX priorities map to WIN-911's Medium Priority, and LOW,
LOLO, and INFO iFIX priorities translate to WIN-911's Low Priority.
Automatic Acknowledgement
Never
Selecting this radio button will require a manual acknowledgement of the alarm.
On Alarm
Selecting this radio button will cause the alarm to automatically become Acknowledged as
it enters into an alarm condition. This option would allow audio reports of an alarm's
current condition without initiating other reporting options listed in the Group. If this option
is active, the message (going into an alarm condition) will not generate Pop-Up alarm
messages or any of the Dial-Out options. Because the alarm is automatically
acknowledged, the message coming back to a normal state would indicate that the
condition is in the normal mode. The Was message would never be used.
437
WIN-911 V7.14
On Return To Normal
Selecting this radio button will cause the alarm to automatically acknowledge as it returns
to normal. This option removes the requirement that the associated alarm be responded
to by a person in the event that no one has acknowledged the alarm at the time it returns
to a normal condition. Experiment with all three of these options to get the results you
desire.
438
InTouch Direct Connect
Sounds
Tag Sound
The Tag Sound text is used to synthesize audio for the name of your alarm. If you are
using the Wave Files Only option, you may select your wave file here.
Alarm & Normal Sound
The text here is used to announce the normal and alarm states of you alarm.
Use Is / Was
In some cases, using the Is/Was sounds will not make sense. Selecting the check-box
next to Use Is/Was will activate its use. Leaving the check box blank will omit its use. An
example of this sound would be “The Entry Door IS open”.
Preview Announcer
Selecting this button will allow you to review this alarm's audio ... AS IT WILL BE HEARD
IN THE LOCAL ANNOUNCER ... for each condition of the alarm. Selecting the “Auto
Acknowledge” option discussed above will affect whether you can test the “State
Acknowledged” button.
439
WIN-911 V7.14
Changeable
The last tab selection is for WIN-411 applications only. If you have chosen the WIN-411
option, a user may call-in to the computer to inquire on digital values, not just alarm
conditions. If configured, the user may even change the value from a touch-tone
telephone. If the developer elects to allow the user to make changes, each alarm, or data
point must be configured to permit changes.
Enable Changes by Operator
This check box will allow changes to this alarm or status point. If this check box is left
unchecked, changes will not be allowed.
Note: Digital Block types that are writable are FIX version dependent.
440
InTouch Direct Connect
Analog Definitions
Analog Definition
Click this icon to edit Analog Alarms, otherwise known as level alarms.
Special Note to Lite Mode Users: Analog alarms are not permitted in Lite Mode.
Analog Definition to Edit
Alarms/Points are arranged by Groups. Using the pull down list box, select the Group that
the new or existing alarm/point is assigned. Only the alarms/points associated with the
Group will be listed. You may select the appropriate Group from , or select All Groups.
After selecting the specific Group or selecting All Groups, you are ready to add or modify
analog alarms.
Selecting New, Edit or double-clicking on the Tagname will bring up the Analog Definition
sheet.
441
WIN-911 V7.14
Base Definition
Tagname
The tagname is an alias of the FIX alarm name. This is only a user friendly name for the
alarm. It is not used to address the alarm within FIX.
Description
The Description field is used to provide a more detailed description of an alarm or point.
One of the time saving features of the FIX Remote Alarm option is how WIN-911 utilizes
the Description field as defined within the SCADA package. This field is enabled when the
tag is imported, if it is manually created, then the field is disabled.
Group Name
Alarms are organized by Group. Assign the alarm Group using the drop down menu here.
Engineering Units
The Engineering Units field for a FIX data point is defined within the FIX SCADA package
import and can be redefined.
Access Name
The Access Name is used to refer to your FIX Data Source Definition.
Use Tagname for Item
Check this box to copy the Tagname into the Item Name field.
Item Name
The Item Name is used to identify the particular item to monitor from the FIX. The actual
name entered here must conform exactly to the FIX's data point nomenclature. In the
case of the FIX Remote Alarm option for FIX, the Item Name must be entered as such:
Node:Tag Name
This field is case sensitive and must be defined.
Note: The Terms “Node” and “Tag Name” are terms specific to the FIX. FIX Tag Names
do not include the filter. Please refer to FIX documentation for details. You can also use
the FIX's SCU and Database Builder to determine proper input for both. Care should be
taken not to confuse WIN-911's “Tagname” and FIX's “Tag Name”.
442
InTouch Direct Connect
Conversion
Conversion Type
The FIX Direct Connect does not support conversion of raw data values.
Number of Decimal Places
WIN-911 supports 32 bit signed integers and 32 bit floating point values. A 32 bit integer
is the default data type. For floating point numbers set the number of decimal places to
something other than zero.
443
WIN-911 V7.14
Alarm Limits
The four Alarm Limits are used to determine when alarm conditions occur. The value
must be above the high limits for the high alarms and below the low limits for the low
alarms. If the value is scaled, the limits must be within the scaled range. With the FIX
Remote Alarm option, the Alarm Limits are set within the FIX; hence, the “Alarm Limit”
input fields are disabled.
Notice that you do not have user defined visual alarm messages with Analog alarms. The
visual messages are fixed: High, HiHi, Low, and LoLo.
The alarm selection boxes are used to select the desired alarm states to be monitored. In
WIN-411 applications, you may occasionally have a data point which you want to monitor,
but not alarm. In such cases, do not select any of the Alarm States check boxes.
Initial Value
The Initial Value function is set within the FIX and is not a valid function for WIN-911. This
field is disabled for the FIX Remote Alarm.
Priority
The Priority for FIX data points are defined within the FIX SCADA package and do not
need to be redefined here. Since this information is accessed directly from the FIX, this
field is disabled. Within a Group, a higher priority alarm will bump a lower priority alarm
444
InTouch Direct Connect
down the queue to call out, even if the lower priority alarm was first in line. Alarm priority
is originally defined when a point is imported.
Note: iFIX 4.0 uses a seven layered priority structure that maps to WIN-911's three
layered structure as follows: Critical, HIHI, and HIGH iFIX Priorities are translated to WIN911's High Priority. Medium iFIX priorities map to WIN-911's Medium Priority, and LOW,
LOLO, and INFO iFIX priorities translate to WIN-911's Low Priority.
Deadband
The Deadband function is set within the FIX and is not a valid function for WIN-911. This
field is disabled for the FIX Remote Alarm.
Automatic Acknowledgement
Never
Selecting this radio button will require a manual acknowledgement of the alarm.
On Alarm
Selecting this radio button will cause the alarm to automatically become Acknowledged as
it enters into an alarm condition. This option would allow audio reports of an alarm's
current condition without initiating other reporting options listed in the Group. If this option
is active, the message (going into an alarm condition) will not generate Pop-Up alarm
messages or any of the Dial-Out options. Because the alarm is automatically
acknowledged, the message coming back to a normal state would indicate that the
condition is in the normal mode. The Was message would never be used.
On Return To Normal
Selecting this radio button will cause the alarm to automatically acknowledge as it returns
to normal. This option removes the requirement that the associated alarm be responded
to by a person in the event that no one has acknowledged the alarm at the time it returns
to a normal condition. Experiment with all three of these option boxes to get the results
you desire.
445
WIN-911 V7.14
Sounds
Tag Sound
The Tag Sound text is used to synthesize audio for the name of your alarm. If you are
using the Wave Files Only option, you may select your wave file here.
Alarm Sounds
A specific sound can be specified for each of the alarm conditions. These sounds are
normally the verbalization of the phrases "above the high limit,", "above the HiHi limit,",
"below the low limit,", and "below the LoLo limit." In addition, there is a return to normal
sound which may be the phrase "now normal."
Engineering Unit Sound
The Engineering Units field is an optional sound which identifies the engineering units a
value represents. Analog values may be scaled and displayed as real world units of
measure. Typical units are DEGF and GPM.
Is / Was Selection
Check this box to use the Is and Was sounds.
Preview Announcer
Selecting this button will allow you to review this alarm's audio ... AS IT WILL BE HEARD
IN THE LOCAL ANNOUNCER... for each condition of the alarm. Selecting the “Auto
Acknowledge” option discussed above will affect whether you can test the “State
Acknowledged” button.
446
InTouch Direct Connect
Changeable
The last tab selection is for WIN-411 applications only. If you have chosen the WIN-411
option, a user may call in to the computer to inquire on data values, not just alarm
conditions. If configured, the user may even change a value from a touch-tone telephone.
If the developer elects to allow the user to make changes, each alarm or data point must
be configured to permit changes.
Changeable by Operator
This check box will allow changes to this alarm or data point. If this check box is left
unchecked, changes will not be allowed.
Minimum and Maximum Values
Changes will be allowed only within the minimum and maximum values.
You must assign the range allowed for a change.
Minimum Value: Integer....................................-32768
Minimum Value: FP without round-off error ...-9999999
Maximum Value: Integer.................................. +65535
Maximum Value: FP without round-off error ...+9999999
447
WIN-911 V7.14
Watchdog Timer Definitions
Watchdog Timer Definition
Most applications for WIN-911 and WIN-411 are industrial alarming or monitoring
requirements that are being fed factory floor data from a FIX Remote Alarm Server.
Should trouble exist in either the server, cabling, or the actual control device, WIN911/411 will stop receiving new data from the source. For this reason, WIN-911's alarm
reporting chores would be restricted, or totally shutdown. Therefore, the Watchdog Timer
Alarms have been implemented. This method will also detect when a PLC has been shut
down for maintenance or program changes. The Watchdog Timer option in WIN-911 will
alert you if FIX Direct Connect activity from specific devices becomes inactive. Watchdog
Timers are arranged by Groups just like other alarms/points. Using the pull down list box,
select the Group that the new or existing alarm/point is assigned. Only the Watchdog
Timers associated with the Group will be listed.
To utilize the Watchdog Timer, you must choose a changing integer data value in each
device to be monitored. A good example of such a data value would be a "continuous
changing counter value" programmed into the PLC that you are monitoring. The
Watchdog Timer would monitor this data value. If the value does not change over a preselected time period, an Alarm Message would be generated. If you are not receiving
data, you cannot alarm it. A typical voice message for this condition could be:
“WARNING, PLC#4, HAS LOST COMMUNICATIONS WITH ALARM LOGGER."
Watchdog Timer Definition to Edit
Alarms/Points are arranged by Groups. Using the pull down list box, select the Group that
the new or existing watchdog alarm is assigned. Only the watchdogs associated with the
Group will be listed. You may select the appropriate Group by the pull-down list box, or
select "All Groups."
After selecting the specific Group or selecting "All Groups," you are ready to add or
modify analog alarms.
448
InTouch Direct Connect
Selecting New, Edit or double-clicking on the Tagname will bring up the Watchdog Timer
Definition sheet.
449
WIN-911 V7.14
Base Definition
Tagname
Tagname is a unique identifier of an alarm/point.
Description
The Description field is used to display more information about a particular alarm.
Group Name
Alarms are organized by groups for reporting out-of-tolerance conditions.
You have by now created a unique Watchdog alarm. You must choose a predefined
Group to specify the reporting actions for this alarm. (Remember, you have already
selected a group name, specifying the reporting options and an optional sound for this
group.) A review of the Group button is not a bad idea here. To select another Group,
click on the drop-down arrow with the cursor and choose.
You may change the Group assignment simply by selecting another defined Group from
the drop down list box.
Access Name
The Access Name is used to select a predefined FIX Remote Alarm server from the list
defined in the data sources. This field must be defined.
Tagname for Item
Selecting this box will cause the Tagname to be copied directly into the item name. This is
useful when connecting to other tag oriented programs.
Item Name
The “Item Name” is used to identify the particular item to monitor via FIX Direct Connect.
The actual name entered will vary from server to server. Consult the server
documentation for additional information. This field is case sensitive and must be defined.
450
InTouch Direct Connect
Alarm Conditions
Alarm and Normal
The “Alarm States” text identifies the normal and alarm states that appear on the alarm
monitor displays and reports.
Time-out After __ Minutes
The “Time-out After __ Minutes” field is a count down timer preset. Each time a new value
is read into the selected item, the counter is reset to the preset value. If the timer ever
counts down to zero, the alarm occurs. This entry is in one-minute increments. If you have
a very slow changing server, a selection of 10 minutes might be appropriate. A faster
application might require a time-out setting of 1 minute.
If a value of “0” minutes is configured in the field, the Watchdog behaves like a one-shot
alarm that does not care if the value ever changes. The alarm for a “0” minute Watchdog
will be triggered by a loss of communication with the data source. Since the FIX Remote
Alarm cannot reestablish communication with WIN-911, these Watchdogs can never
return to normal.
Priority
For each alarm, you may select three levels of “Priority”: High, Medium, and Low. For
each “Group”, a higher priority alarm will bump a lower priority alarm down the queue to
call out, even if the lower priority alarm was first in line.
Automatic Acknowledgement
Never
Selecting this radio button will require a manual acknowledgement of the alarm.
On Alarm
Selecting this radio button will cause the alarm to automatically become “Acknowledged”
as it enters into an alarm condition. This option would allow audio reports of an alarm's
current condition without initiating other reporting options listed in the “Group”. If this
option is active, the message (going into an alarm condition) will not generate “Pop-Up”
alarm messages or any of the “Dial-Out” options. Because the alarm is automatically
acknowledged, the message coming back to a normal state would indicate that the
condition is in the normal mode. The “Was” message would never be used.
On Return To Normal
Selecting this radio button will cause the alarm to automatically acknowledge as it returns
to normal. This option removes the requirement that the associated alarm be responded
to by a person in the event that no one has acknowledged the alarm at the time it returns
451
WIN-911 V7.14
to a normal condition. Experiment with all three of these options to get the results you
desire.
452
InTouch Direct Connect
Sounds
Tag, Alarm, and Normal Sounds
Like other WIN-911 alarms, the Sounds are essentially a verbalization of the description,
and the Alarm and Normal text to be used in the audio annunciation. As with other
sounds, the sounds are selected from a dialog box.
Is / Was Selection
In some cases, using the Is/Was audio will not make sense. Selecting the check-box next
to Use Is/Was will activate its use. Leaving the check-box blank will omit its use.
Preview Announcer
Selecting this button will allow you to review this alarm's entire audio ... AS IT WILL BE
HEARD IN THE LOCAL ANNOUNCER... for each condition of the alarm.
453
WIN-911 V7.14
FIX Data Integrity Errors
There are three basic error conditions that are monitored regarding I/O connection health
and data security. These are as follows:
Error
Definition
I/O Failure
A failure between the driver and device
Communication
Failure
A failure between the SCADA and driver
No Data Yet
E1212: No data available, ???
Exceeded the
deviation setpoint
This alarm occurs when the current value of the
block varies from the Target Value field by an
amount greater than the deviation alarm's value
Exceeded the rate of
change setpoint
Value exceeds rate of change setting
Please refer to FIX documentation for information regarding these messages.
INI Settings for Communication Alarms
The WIN-911.ini file stores configuration settings relating to communication failure alarms.
If you would like to change the way WIN-911 handles these alarms, the file may be edited
with a text editor. Find the [FIX Remote Alarm] heading and add the settings you wish to
use to the bottom.
StaticDescriptions
Type StaticDescriptions=1 and WIN-911 will use the description defined in WIN-911 for
the alarm, instead of the FIX comment field.
CommErrorIgnore
Type CommErrorIgnore=1 and all comm error events will be ignored.
454
InTouch Direct Connect
Overview
The InTouch Direct Connect option provides a means of bypassing Windows DDE/OPC
and connecting directly to Wonderware's database. Unlike the DDE and OPC options
(which are generic data exchange mediums), the InTouch Direct Connect is a custom
data source developed with the use of Wonderware's IDEA toolkit. InTouch users will find
this option time saving during configuration because WIN-911 does not require the reentry of redundant information. Instead, WIN-911 references much of the information
required for a configuration directly from InTouch. More importantly, the InTouch user will
find this mode of operation delivers superior performance in the following areas: 1) Speed
of connection and data point updates, 2) Data security and integrity.
A configuration can be run in the Direct Connect mode exclusively, or simultaneously with
DDE and OPC connections. It is important to note, however, that some of the terms
(Application, Topic, and Item names) are components of Microsoft's DDE/OPC address
nomenclature. Although these definition fields are still part of the configuration, they take
on different meanings and are governed by different constraints.
Only a single data source can be configured for the InTouch Direct Connect. This is
because only a single data source is needed to connect to the InTouch database.
InTouch must be running before WIN-911 can establish a connection. If at any time WIN911 loses its connection to InTouch, WIN-911 must be restarted to establish the
connection.
The WIN-911 configurator has an import utility for InTouch. The InTouch database must
be exported to a *.CSV file before you can import the tags into WIN-911.
The InTouch Direct Connect supports data tags or tags with alarming disabled. Data tags
can be used in 411 Reports to monitor or manipulate values. Data tags cannot be used
for alarming. The InTouch Direct Connect does not support Filter Tags.
The InTouch Direct Connect does support watchdog timers. The InTouch Direct
Connect's watchdog timers can be configured in two ways. WIN-911 can monitor a tag's
changing value by setting the timeout value greater than the time it takes the tag's value
to change. You can also define the watchdog timer with a "0". A watchdog timer set to "0"
strictly monitors the connection to InTouch. A watchdog timer set to "0" will only report an
alarm if WIN-911 loses its connection to InTouch. Once the connection is lost WIN-911
must be restarted to reestablish connection with InTouch. Only the watchdog monitoring
the changing value has the ability to return to normal.
455
WIN-911 V7.14
InTouch Direct Connect Demonstration
In order to gain a quick and thorough understanding of the capabilities of the InTouch
Direct Connect, Specter presents the WWDEMO. Located in the "Program Files\Specter
Instruments\WIN-911 V7\Tools" folder are all the components necessary to run a
complete interactive WIN-911 - InTouch demonstration. (This demo requires InTouch to
be resident on your host node!) With this demo you will be able to monitor and control
predefined data points. From the Factory Suite 2000 InTouch "WindowViewer" you vary
analog tank levels and toggle digital switches, sending data points in and out of alarm.
You may also change values via WIN-411, as well as query reports of current operating
conditions. The WWDEMO is designed to provide you with a comprehensive illustration of
the functionality of the WIN-911 - Factory Suite 2000 ensemble.
1. Launch InTouch.
2. From the main InTouch menu go to Tools | Find Application. Then browse to
C:\Program Files\Specter Instruments\WIN-911 V7\Tools\WWDEMO. Select
"OK."
(If asked to convert the WWDEMO because it was created with an older version of
InTouch, click Yes)
3. Launch WindowViewer and open the WWMENU window:
This is the main menu of the WWDEMO. From here you can toggle between the Plastic
Molding, City Water, and Building Security demos. You may also review the requirements
for running this demo or exit the WindowViewer program altogether. Let's start by
launching the WIN-911 runtime with the InTouch Direct Connect DEMO configuration.
1. Launch the WIN-911 Configurator and select File | Open | InTouch Direct Connect
DEMO.mdb. This will set the current configuration pointer to run this configuration
the next time Scan and Alarm is started.
2. Start Scan and Alarm and observe the Status Window during the startup to ensure
all components start successfully.
3. Returning to the WWMENU, select the Plastic Molding button.
456
OPC
Located in this window are digital toggle switches (Load Conveyor, FLOW, VACUUM),
analog slider bars (HOPPER #1, #2, and #3), and an analog keyboard entry field
(VACUUM SENSOR). Also located in the Plastic Molding/Raw Material Hopper Levels
window are WIN911/411 Details that display the alarm limits that have been configured
for each data point. The Return to Menu button returns the user to the WWMENU, and at
the bottom left of the screen is the alarm message window, which details the status of
current alarms. At the bottom right is an Ack button that can acknowledge a WIN-911
alarm from InTouch.
Let's experiment with the Plastic Molding demo:
1. Select the Load Conveyor button at the top right of the Plastic Molding window. A
green inner-core will fill the conduit, representing the flow of raw materials.
2. Click the FLOW button, causing the Flow Valve to close, blocking the flow of raw
materials. This will cause an alarm message field and a pop-up box to appear over
the view screen.
457
WIN-911 V7.14
3. Acknowledge this alarm from WIN-911 by clicking on the Acknowledge button
located in the lower center of the pop-up box. Notice that the pop-up box
disappears and the text in the alarm message window changes colors from red to
white, indicating the current alarm had been acknowledged.
4. Click on the FLOW button a second time. The raw materials flow will be restored
and the alarm message will disappear, indicating the data point returned to its
normal state.
5. Now click on “WIN911 Details” and note the low limit for the Vacuum Sensor.
6. Next, highlight the Vacuum Sensor located at the top center, just above the analog
gauge. Using your keypad, enter two and press return. This will send the value
below the low limit, causing another pop-up box to appear on top of the view
screen.
Please continue to experiment with the WIN-911 - InTouch ensemble using WIN911/411
Details to cue you in on the system alarm limits. The Pneumatic Conveyor, City Water,
and Building Security operate in the same general manner, although each varies slightly
to illustrate the different ways WIN-911 can be configured to process data. Modification to
the InTouch Direct Connect.mdb to include pager and voice connections will give a more
comprehensive demonstration of WIN-911 capabilities.
Note: When changing from one demo to another, it is best to acknowledge and clear all
items of the current demo. Otherwise, alarm messages pertaining to the current demo
may show up in a later demo and cause confusion.
458
OPC
Import Source
Use the WIN-911 Configurator's File\Import function to save time and energy as well as
ensure data-point syntax accuracy. This easy to use function will scan the InTouch
database for all data-points that WIN-911 can monitor and present them in a list of datapoint import candidates. From that list you select the needed data singularly by clicking
individual points or in mass by clicking the first in a series and shift clicking on the last.
From the InTouch - Application Manager select DBDump -> CSV File to Dump To: \Name
of CSV Dump files:\*.CSV to generate a *.CSV file from the master Tagname Dictionary.
From the File pull-down menu in the WIN-911 Configurator select Import -> Wonderware
InTouch.
Select the appropriate “*.CSV” file by browsing the appropriate folder.
459
WIN-911 V7.14
Import Database Tags
To select a block of tags to import quickly, click on the first tag of the block. Note: Lite
Mode users are prohibited from conducting block imports.
460
OPC
Next, scroll down to the bottom of the block list and shift-click the last tag.
Once all the tags are selected, press the Add button and the application will fill the
Selected Tags with the entire tagname dictionary.
If you wish to deselect any of the tags from the list before the import is applied, select
them from the Selected Tags using the Remove button. Otherwise, select Apply and the
WIN-911 database import will execute.
461
WIN-911 V7.14
Global Options
Wonderware InTouch Program Path
WIN-911 requires that the installation path of Wonderware's InTouch be provided so that
it may access several dll's in order to function. Use the browse button to browse for the
installation path or type it in manually. Be sure that you do not specify the location of
your InTouch project.
462
OPC
Data Source Definition
This button is used to setup data communications. Data point addressing can be
monotonous and syntactically rigorous. Rather than being forced into remembering (and
exactly typing) the Direct Connect invocation string for each Item Name to be alarmed,
you merely select the appropriate data source type from the selection list. When you
define data points, a selection box will provide you with a list of Access Names from which
to choose. Simply select InTouch Direct Connect.
Note: The data source definition is automatically configured if the InTouch database was
imported using WIN-911's InTouch import utility.
Here the InTouch Program Path is defined. Use the browse button to select the correct
path. Select the installation location of InTouch, not your application's path. Click OK.
Selecting Edit or double-clicking on the Access Name will bring you back to the InTouch
Program Path window.
463
WIN-911 V7.14
464
OPC
Digital Definitions
Digital Definition
This button is used to define all digital points. With both WIN-911 and WIN-411, alarms or
monitored points are classified as either a digital true or false. Digital alarms/points are
configured within this button.
Special Note: Lite Mode users are limited to a total of 24 digital tags. Analog tags are not
supported in Lite Mode.
Digital Definition to Edit
Alarms are organized by Group. Select the appropriate group using the drop down menu,
or by selecting "All Groups."
After selecting the specific Group or selecting "All Groups," you are ready to add or
modify digital alarms.
Click New or Edit to create or edit a Digital Alarm.
465
WIN-911 V7.14
Base Definition
Tagname
The name of an actual data point within InTouch may be too cryptic or unreadable for
some purposes, therefore WIN-911 provides a Tagname field which serves as an alias of
an InTouch tag. The Tagname does not actually reference your data point within InTouch.
It simply serves as a friendlier name.
Description
The Description field provides more information about an alarm. When an alarm is sent
from InTouch to WIN-911, the InTouch Comment field is used as the description
regardless of what may be entered in WIN-911. The Description field in WIN-911 is only
used when the Comment in InTouch is blank.
When an InTouch alarm is imported, WIN-911 retrieves the Comment field and places it in
the Description. If there is no InTouch Comment, then the Tagname is used.
Group Name
Alarms are organized by Group. Select the Group to which the current alarm should be
assigned here.
Bit
The InTouch Direct Connect relies on Wonderware to determine the state of an alarm,
however some applications require WIN-911 to monitor an individual bit within a 16 or 32
bit word. This single word can then be used to create up to 32 individual alarms. If this is
the case, select the correct bit using the drop down menu, otherwise select Remote
Alarm.
Access Name
The Access Name references the InTouch Direct Connect Data Source within your Data
Source Definitions.
Use Tagname for Item
Check this box to copy the Tagname into the Item field. If your InTouch tag has a
descriptive and friendly enough name, there may be no need to have the Tagname and
Item Name vary.
Item Name
The Item Name references the tagname within InTouch. Its syntax must match exactly to
what is present within the InTouch tagname dictionary.
466
OPC
Alarm Conditions
Alarm and Normal Text Strings
The text strings that identify the Alarm and Normal states, which will appear on the alarm
history displays, reports and pages, are identified here. Examples may be "On/Off,"
"Open/Closed," "Normal/Alarm," or "Red/Green." These strings are imported from
InTouch.
Digital Alarm
The Digital Alarm state for InTouch alarming data points are defined within the HMI
package and do not need to be redefined here. The alarm condition is imported. Digital
data points that are simply being monitored (WIN-411) require an entry of None. The
Alarm condition is imported.
Initial Value
The Initial Value for InTouch data points are defined by InTouch, as a result, this field is
disabled.
Priority
For each alarm, you may select three levels of Priority: High, Medium, and Low. Within a
Group, higher priority alarms will bump lower priority alarms down the queue for call out,
even if the lower priority alarm was first in line. The tag's priority is provided by InTouch at
runtime. 1 - 333 is mapped to high. 333 - 666 is mapped to medium and 667 to 999 is
mapped to low.
Automatic Acknowledgement
Never
Selecting this radio button will require a manual acknowledgement of the alarm.
On Alarm
Selecting this radio button will cause the alarm to automatically become “Acknowledged”
as it enters into an alarm condition. This option would allow audio reports of an alarm's
current condition without initiating other reporting options listed in the “Group”. If this
option is active, the message (going into an alarm condition) will not generate “Pop-Up”
alarm messages or any of the remote notification options. Because the alarm is
automatically acknowledged, the message coming back to a normal state would indicate
that the condition is in the normal mode. The “Was” message would never be used.
On Return To Normal
467
WIN-911 V7.14
Selecting this radio button will cause the alarm to automatically acknowledge as it returns
to normal. This option removes the requirement that the associated alarm be responded
to by a person in the event that no one has acknowledged the alarm at the time it returns
to a normal condition. Experiment with all three of these options to get the results you
desire.
468
OPC
Sounds
Tag Sound
The text entered here is used for synthesizing the name of the alarm, when using speech
synthesis. If you are using the Wave Files Only option, you may select a wave file here.
Alarm & Normal Sound
The text here announces the alarm and normal states of the alarm.
Use Is / Was
Check this box to have WIN-911 insert the word "is" or "was" between the Tag and Alarm
or Normal sound when announcing the alarm.
Preview Announcer
Selecting this button will allow you to review this alarm's entire audio as it will be heard on
the local announcer for each condition of the alarm. Selecting the Auto Acknowledge
option discussed above will affect whether you can test the State Acknowledged button. If
sounds are not defined the Preview Announcer button will be disabled.
469
WIN-911 V7.14
Changeable
The last tab selection is for WIN-411 applications only. If you have chosen the WIN-411
Option, a user may call-in to the computer to inquire on digital values, not just alarm
conditions. If configured, the user may even change the value from a touch-tone
telephone. If the developer elects to allow the user to make changes, each data point
must be configured to permit changes.
Enable Changes by Operator
This check box will allow changes to this alarm or status point. If this check box is left
unchecked, changes will not be allowed.
Note: Tags imported as read-only will deliver a warning if set to changeable.
470
OPC
Analog Definitions
Analog Definition
With both WIN-911 and WIN-411, alarms (or monitored points) are classified either as
Digital “1”, “0”, Analog, or Watchdog data values. Analog alarms are configured with the
Analog Alarm Definition button.
Special Note to Lite Mode Users: Analog alarms are not permitted in Lite Mode.
Analog Definition to Edit
Alarms are organized by Group. Select the appropriate group using the drop down menu,
or by selecting "All Groups."
After selecting the specific Group or selecting "All Groups," you are ready to add or
modify digital alarms.
Click New or Edit to create or edit an Analog Alarm.
471
WIN-911 V7.14
Base Definition
Tagname
The name of an actual data point within InTouch may be too cryptic or unreadable for
some purposes, therefore WIN-911 provides a Tagname field which serves as an alias of
an InTouch tag. The Tagname does not actually reference your data point within InTouch.
It simply serves as a friendlier name.
Description
The Description field provides more information about an alarm. When an alarm is sent
from InTouch to WIN-911, the InTouch Comment field is used as the description
regardless of what may be entered in WIN-911. The Description field in WIN-911 is only
used when the Comment in InTouch is blank.
When an InTouch alarm is imported, WIN-911 retrieves the Comment field and places it in
the Description. If there is no InTouch Comment, then the Tagname is used.
Group Name
Alarms are organized by Group. Select the Group to which the current alarm should be
assigned here.
Engineering Units
The Engineering Units field is optional. It provides text that identifies the engineering units
of the current data point. Typical units are DEGF and GPM. Engineering units are
imported from InTouch.
Access Name
The Access Name references the InTouch Direct Connect Data Source within your Data
Source Definitions.
Use Tagname for Item
Check this box to copy the Tagname into the Item field. If your InTouch tag has a
descriptive and friendly enough name, there may be no need to have the Tagname and
Item Name vary.
Item Name
The Item Name references the tagname within InTouch. Its syntax must match exactly to
what is present within the InTouch tagname dictionary.
472
OPC
Conversion
Conversion Type
Conversion Type defines what filter is applied to the raw data. Being a 32-bit application,
analog data is treated as a 32-bit integer. Selection of Floating-Point is not defined here
(see below: “Number of Decimal Places” for Floating Point definitions).
If a data point is monitored for alarming, the selection of Remote Alarming will leave all
alarm scaling to be set within the HMI. If a data point is monitored for reporting purposes
(WIN-411) or you wish WIN-911 to alarm independent of the Wonderware's alarming
package, then further scaling may be applied.
The incoming values can be processed in four ways. The first and simplest is that the
value is not scaled; numbers appear exactly as they are brought in. The next is linear
scaling; raw values in the specified range are converted to the engineering units' range.
The third conversion is square root scaling where the square root of the raw value is
taken and then the value is converted to the engineering units' range. Square root
conversions are commonly used in flow calculations. The final conversion is Bit Mask; a
selection of the number of bits to use in displaying data or calculating scaling factors.
None
Selection of None will make data be available in its raw or native form.
Linear
Selection of “Linear” will enable linear scaling. If this is selected, minimum and maximum
values must be entered.
Square Root
Selection of “Square Root” will first apply the square root of the raw data and then make
the scaling selections available.
Bit Mask
Selection of “Bit Mask” will strip the 32 bit native form to match the data coming from a
field device. For example, if the A/D converter is 12 bits, you could select “Bit Mask” and
then a resolution of 12 bits. These selections would then strip the excess data from the
raw 32-bit form and present it as 12 bit data. Scaling selections would then be available if
needed.
Remote Alarming
473
WIN-911 V7.14
“Remote Alarming” is the only valid conversion type that can be applied to a data value
that is being monitored for alarming via the “InTouch Direct Connect”. With this selection,
the only active input field is Number of Decimal Places. The other fields are dynamically
defined within the HMI.
Raw Resolution
(See the above discussion on “Bit Mask”.)
Raw Signed
A selection of this check box will convert a 32 bit unsigned integer into a 32 bit signed
integer.
Raw Minimum/Maximum
The raw engineering units' values are used to create a multiplier for converting values.
Scaled Minimum/Maximum
The scaled engineering units' values are used to create a multiplier for converting values.
You should enter the minimum and maximum values in engineering units, which
correspond, to the minimum and maximum raw data values. The software will
automatically scale the incoming (or in the case of WIN-411, outgoing) data to the correct
values for WIN-911 alarm comparison or WIN-411 reporting. Note that the Min and Max
engineering units are used to clamp the converted value. The value will not exceed the
Min and Max span.
Number of Decimal Places
WIN-911 supports 32 bit signed integers and 32 bit floating point values. A 32 bit integer
is the default data type. For floating point numbers set the number of decimal places to
something other than zero.
474
OPC
Alarm Limits
The four alarm limits are used to determine when alarm conditions occur. The value must
be above the high limits for the high alarms and below the low limits for the low alarms. If
the value is scaled, the limits must be within the scaled range. With the Remote Alarming
conversion, the Alarm Limits are set within the HMI; hence, the Alarm Limit input fields are
disabled.
Notice that you do not have user defined visual alarm messages with Analog alarms. The
visual messages are fixed: High, HiHi, Low, and LoLo.
In WIN-411 applications, you may occasionally have a data point which you want to
monitor, but not alarm. In such cases, do not select any of the Alarm States check boxes.
Initial Value
The “Initial Value” field is set within the HMI and is not a valid function for WIN-911. This
field is disabled for the InTouch Direct Connect. Initial values are imported from InTouch.
Priority
For each alarm, you may select three levels of Priority: High, Medium, and Low. For that
“Group”, a higher priority alarm will bump a lower priority alarm down the queue to call
out, even if the lower priority alarm was first in line. The tag's priority is provided by
InTouch at runtime. 1 - 333 is mapped to high. 333 - 666 is mapped to medium and 667 to
999 is mapped to low.
Deadband
The “Deadband” function is set within the HMI and is not a valid function for WIN-911.
This function is disabled for the InTouch Direct Connect. Deadband is imported and
translated from InTouch.
Automatic Acknowledgement
Never
Selecting this radio button will require a manual acknowledgement of the alarm.
On Alarm
Selecting this radio button will cause the alarm to automatically become “Acknowledged”
as it enters into an alarm condition. This option would allow audio reports of an alarm's
current condition without initiating other reporting options listed in the “Group”. If this
option is active, the message (going into an alarm condition) will not generate “Pop-Up”
alarm messages or any of the “Dial-Out” options. Because the alarm is automatically
acknowledged, the message coming back to a normal state would indicate that the
condition is in the normal mode. The “Was” message would never be used.
475
WIN-911 V7.14
On Return To Normal
Selecting this radio button will cause the alarm to automatically acknowledge as it returns
to normal. This option removes the requirement that the associated alarm be responded
to by a person in the event that no one has acknowledged the alarm at the time it returns
to a normal condition. Experiment with all three of these option boxes to get the results
you desire.
476
OPC
Sounds
Tag Sound
The text entered here is used for synthesizing the name of the alarm, when using speech
synthesis. If you are using the Wave Files Only option, you may select a wave file here.
Alarm Sounds
A specific sound can be specified for each of the alarm conditions. These sounds are
normally the verbalization of the phrases "above the high limit," "above the hihi limit,"
"below the low limit," and "below the lolo limit." In addition, there is a return to normal
sound, which may be the phrase "now normal."
Engineering Unit Sound
The Engineering Units sound is an optional sound which identifies the engineering units a
value represents. Analog values may be scaled and displayed as real world units of
measure. Typical units are DEGF and GPM.
Is / Was Selection
Check this box and WIN-911 will insert the word "is" or "was" between the Tag sound and
the alarm limit sound.
Preview Announcer
Selecting this button will allow you to review this alarm's audio as it will be heard on the
local announcer for each condition of the alarm. Selecting the Auto Acknowledge option
discussed above will affect whether you can test the State Acknowledged button. If
sounds are not defined the Preview Announcer button will be disabled.
477
WIN-911 V7.14
Changeable
The last tab selection is for WIN-411 applications only. If you have chosen the WIN-411
Option, a user may call in to the computer to inquire on data values, not just alarm
conditions. If configured, the user may even change a value from a touch-tone telephone.
If the developer elects to allow the user to make changes, each alarm or data point must
be configured to permit changes.
Changeable by Operator
This check box will allow changes to this alarm or data point. If this check box is left
unchecked, changes will not be allowed.
Minimum and Maximum Values
Changes will be allowed only within the minimum and maximum values.
You must assign the range allowed for a change.
Minimum Value: Integer...-999999999
Minimum Value: FP without round-off error ...-9999999
Maximum Value: Integer... +999999999
Maximum Value: FP without round-off error ...+9999999
478
OPC
Watchdog Timer Definitions
Watchdog Timer Definition
Most applications for WIN-911 and WIN-411 are industrial alarming or monitoring
requirements that are being fed factory floor data from an InTouch Direct Connect Server.
Should trouble exist in either the server, cabling, or the actual control device, WIN-911 will
stop receiving new data from the source. For this reason, WIN-911's alarm reporting
chores would be restricted, or totally shutdown. Therefore, the Watchdog Timer Alarms
have been implemented. This method will also detect when a PLC has been shut down
for maintenance or program changes. The Watchdog Timer option in WIN-911/411 will
alert you if InTouch Direct Connect activity from specific devices becomes inactive.
Watchdog Timers are arranged by Groups just like other alarms/points. Using the pull
down list box, select the Group that the new or existing alarm/point is assigned. Only the
Watchdog Timers associated with the Group will be listed.
To utilize the Watchdog Timer, you must choose a changing integer data value in each
device to be monitored. A good example of such a data value would be a "continuous
changing counter value" programmed into the PLC that you are monitoring. The
Watchdog Timer would monitor this data value. If the value does not change over a preselected time period, an Alarm Message would be generated. If you are not receiving
data, you cannot alarm it. A typical voice message for this condition could be:
"WARNING, PLC#4, HAS LOST COMMUNICATIONS WITH ALARM LOGGER."
Watchdog Timer Definition to Edit
Alarms are organized by Group. Select the appropriate group using the drop down menu,
or by selecting "All Groups."
After selecting the specific Group or selecting "All Groups," you are ready to add or
modify digital alarms.
479
WIN-911 V7.14
Click New or Edit to create or edit a Watchdog Timer.
480
OPC
Base Definition
Tagname
Tagname is a unique identifier of an alarm/point.
Description (Optional)
The Description Field is used to provide a more detailed description of an alarm point.
This information is in addition to the Tagname and Group Name. It is best not to include
the Tagname or alarm Group Name in this description, since it is redundant.
Group Name
Alarms are organized by groups for reporting out-of-tolerance conditions. You must
choose a predefined Group to specify the reporting actions for this Watchdog alarm.
(Remember that you have already selected a group name, specifying the reporting
options and an optional sound clip for this group.) To select another Group, click on the
drop-down arrow with the cursor and choose.
You may change the Group assignment simply by selecting another defined Group from
the drop down list box.
Access Name
The Access Name references the InTouch Direct Connect Data Source within your Data
Source Definitions.
Tagname for Item
Check this box to copy the Tagname into the Item field. If your InTouch tag has a
descriptive and friendly enough name, there may be no need to have the Tagname and
Item Name vary.
Item Name
The Item Name references the tagname within InTouch. Its syntax must match exactly to
what is present within the InTouch tagname dictionary.
481
WIN-911 V7.14
Alarm Conditions
Normal
The Alarm States text identifies the normal and alarm states that appear on the alarm
history displays and reports.
Time-out After _ Minutes
Watchdog Timers monitor a changing value within InTouch. If WIN-911 does not see that
value change after a certain period of time, it will place the Watchdog Timer into its alarm
state. This is the length of the timer. If an update from the point being monitored is
received after the alarm has been triggered, then the Watchdog Timer will return to its
normal state.
If this field is set to zero, the Watchdog Timer will alarm when connectivity to InTouch is
lost.
Priority
For each alarm, you may select three levels of Priority: High, Medium, and Low. For each
Group, a higher priority alarm will bump a lower priority alarm down the queue to call out,
even if the lower priority alarm was first in line. The tag's priority is provided by InTouch at
runtime. 1 - 333 is mapped to high. 333 - 666 is mapped to medium and 667 to 999 is
mapped to low.
Automatic Acknowledgement
Never
Selecting this radio button will require a manual acknowledgement of the alarm.
On Alarm
Selecting this radio button will cause the alarm to automatically become “Acknowledged”
as it enters into an alarm condition. This option would allow audio reports of an alarm's
current condition without initiating other reporting options listed in the “Group”. If this
option is active, the message (going into an alarm condition) will not generate “Pop-Up”
alarm messages or any of the remote notification options. Because the alarm is
automatically acknowledged, the message coming back to a normal state would indicate
that the condition is in the normal mode. The “Was” message would never be used.
On Return To Normal
Selecting this radio button will cause the alarm to automatically acknowledge as it returns
to normal. This option removes the requirement that the associated alarm be responded
to by a person in the event that no one has acknowledged the alarm at the time it returns
482
OPC
to a normal condition. Experiment with all three of these option boxes to get the results
you desire.
483
WIN-911 V7.14
Sounds
Tag, Alarm, and Normal Sounds
The text entered here is used to synthesize the name of the alarm as well as its alarm and
normal states. If the option to use Wave Files Only is selected, then you may select a
wave file here.
Is / Was Selection
Check this box and WIN-911 will insert the word "is" or "was" between the tag sound and
the alarm or normal sound.
Preview Announcer
Selecting this button will allow you to review this alarm's audio as it will be heard on the
local announcer for each condition of the alarm. If sounds are not defined the Preview
Announcer button will be disabled.
484
OPC
WIN-411 and the InTouch Direct Connect
When developing a WIN-411 report using Intouch Direct Connect with digital data that is
to be reported only and not monitored for any alarm condition, ensure that the Bit: field is
not set for Remote Alarming.
485
OPC
Overview
The “OPC” data connection allows WIN-911 to connect to a wide variety of HMI/SCADA
systems by using a generic data exchange medium, OPCDA server. WIN-911 serves as a
generic OPCDA client. WIN-911 only supports Data Access (DA) servers not Alarm and
Event (A&E) servers. Unlike the DDE option WIN-911 is capable of browsing tags in an
OPCDA server and importing them into the WIN-911 configuration. The browse function
can be limited by the OPC server.
A configuration can be run with a single OPC connection or can be run simultaneously
with any of our other data connections (DDE, OPC, or Direct Connects). It is important to
note, however, that some of the terms (Application, Topic, Item Name, OPC Machine
Name, and OPC Server Name) are components of Microsoft's DDE/OPC address
nomenclature. Although these definition fields are still part of the configuration, they take
on different meanings and are governed by different constraints.
Typically, the OPC server must be running before WIN-911 can establish a connection. If
at any time WIN-911 loses its connection to the OPC server, WIN-911 must be restarted
to establish the connection again.
Like a DDE connection the data source is passing raw values to WIN-911. This means
WIN-911 must be configured to alarm on appropriate set-points, therefore owning the
alarms. The OPC connection supports data tags or tags without alarm set points
configured. Data tags can be used in 411 Reports to monitor or manipulate values. The
OPC connection does not support Dynamic Tags nor does it support dynamic features.
The OPC connection also supports watchdog timers. The OPC's watchdog timers can be
configured in two ways. WIN-911 can monitor a tag's changing value by setting the
timeout value greater than the time it takes the tag's value to change. You can also define
the watchdog timer with a "0". A watchdog timer set to "0" strictly monitors the connection
to the OPC server. A watchdog timer set to "0" will only report an alarm when WIN-911
loses its connection to server and the server reports that the connection was broken.
Once the connection is lost, WIN-911 must be restarted in order to reconnect.
487
WIN-911 V7.14
What is OPC?
In 1994 a group of vendors representing a broad spectrum of disciplines in the industrial
segment formed what is now known as the OPC Foundation. The OPC Foundation put
forth the goal of developing a single client/server specification that would allow any
vendor to develop software and applications that could share data in a fast, robust
fashion, and do it in a way that would eliminate the proprietary schemes that forced these
same vendors to duplicate development efforts. The OPC Foundation developed the
specification called Data Access Specification 1.0a which was released in early 1996.
Using this specification, vendors were able to quickly develop client server software.
OPC (OLE for Process Control) builds on the strengths of OLE (Object Linking and
Embedding) to provide a complete data sharing medium that meets the rugged demands
of industry. It allows a client to browse all OPC servers for data both on the local node as
well as networks and provides a filtering mechanism to help narrow the scope. Data can
then be imported and linked to the source for data sharing and manipulation. The
communication process is faster than DDE and provides for a much greater amount of
data sharing while maintaining integrity and security.
Based on Microsoft's OLE (now ActiveX), COM (component object model), and DCOM
(distributed component object model) technologies, OPC consists of a set of standard
interfaces, properties, and methods for use in process-control and manufacturingautomation applications. The ActiveX/COM technologies define how individual software
components can interact and share data. Backed by Microsoft's NT technology, OPC
provides a common interface for communicating with diverse process-control devices,
regardless of the controlling software or devices in the process.
Glossary of Terms:
What is RPC?
Remote Procedure Call (RPC) is a client/server infrastructure that increases the
interoperability, portability, and flexibility of an application by allowing the application to be
distributed over multiple heterogeneous platforms. It reduces the complexity of developing
applications that span multiple operating systems and network protocols by insulating the
application developer from the details of the various operating system and network
interfaces; function calls are the programmer's interface when using RPC.
What is COM?
The Component Object Model provides standard interfaces and inter-component
communications. Through COM, an application may use features of any other application
object or operating system, or allow for software component upgrades without affecting
the operation of the overall solution. COM can be used by developers and system
integrators to create customized solutions. A binary standard, COM is generic and is the
core of DCOM, ActiveX, and OLE technology.
What is DCOM?
488
DDE
The Distributed Component Object Model extends COM to networks (remote objects). It is
a highly optimized protocol, where remote components appear to be local. DCOM was
first released for Windows NT 4.0 in August 1996. Microsoft Java and VB Script support
DCOM and ActiveX development. Other companies are developing versions of DCOM
and ActiveX for non-Microsoft platforms.
What is OLE?
Object Linking and Embedding is used to provide integration among applications,
enabling a high degree of application compatibility, even among diverse types of
information. OLE technology is based on COM, and allows for the development of
reusable, plug-and-play objects that are interoperable across multiple applications. It also
provides for reusable, component-based software development, where software
components can be written in any language, supplied by any software vendor.
What is ActiveX?
ActiveX is an umbrella term of a broad range of technologies that used to be known as
OLE Controls, all of which rely on COM. A renaming and restructuring of the OLE
Controls technology has made it object-based rather than object-oriented. ActiveX is an
open, integrated platform that lets developers and Web producers create portable
applications and interactive content for the World Wide Web. It is open, cross platform,
and is supported on Mac, Windows, and Unix systems.
489
WIN-911 V7.14
The OPC Conversation
There are three parts to an OPC Address: OPC Machine Name or IP Address, OPC
Server Name, and the Item Name. The OPC Machine Name specifies the network node
that the data resides on, the OPC Server Name specifies the server that contains the
data, and the Item name is the specific data point within the server.
490
DDE
Preparing Your Computer and Network for OPC
This step is performed automatically by the WIN-911 install as an OPC client during setup
for the WIN-911 computer. However, a remote network server may not be configured with
the required components. If the WIN-911 Configurator cannot browse a remote node for
OPC servers and tags, perform the following steps on that computer.
Install the OPC Redistibutable Package
OPC30030.exe . This can be found on your WIN-911 Version 7.09.00 CD within the
Support folder or on our website at www.specterinstruments.com | Download Center |
Support.
Setup DCOM
Note: The following step is only necessary if the default installation does not result in an
OPC enabled system. Configure DCOM on both the server and client machine.
Run the DCOM configuration utility by selecting Run from your Windows Start menu.
Type dcomcnfg in the field provided and click on OK. Highlight Component Services, then
Computers, then My Computer. Select the Default Properties tab and check Enable
Distributed COM on this computer. In addition, make sure that the Default Authorization
Level shows Connect and the Default Impersonation Level is set to Identify. Uncheck the
additional security for reference tracking box (match the settings below). Set default
security right by selecting the Default Security tab.
491
WIN-911 V7.14
Configure Access Permissions for the computer's DCOM via the Default COM Security
tab. On the Access Permission window you can add individual users and groups to grant
access to this particular computer on the DCOM level.
Make sure you select the correct domain or workgroup user list from the pull-down menu.
Here you select your computer's domain or workgroup. For initial test purposes include
Everyone in the Grant Access list.
492
DDE
Setup the User and Group Manager on remote computer (Optional)
Users on the remote computers require sufficient rights to browse, read, and if necessary,
write the server/application.
With Windows XP, Server 2003, and 2000, access the Control Panel and start Users and
Passwords. Ensure that Everyone or a specific user is included in the computer's User
Account list with sufficient rights to read and, if necessary, write to the target application.
493
WIN-911 V7.14
Import Source
Use the WIN-911 Configurator's File\Import function to save time and energy as well as
ensure data-point syntax accuracy. This easy to use function will scan the desired OPC
database, locally or on a remote node, for all data-points that WIN-911 can monitor and
present them in a list of data-point import candidates. From that list you select the needed
data singularly by clicking individual points or in mass by clicking the "Select All" button.
OPC Machines and Servers
The "OPC Machines and Servers" window allows the user to setup their OPC tag import.
Here the machine name and server are selected along with the option to configure
database filters and tag name prefixes.
.
Available Machines
The "Available Machines" drop-down box allows the user to browse the network for
available machines. The user also has the ability to manually type in the machine name or
IP address. Manually typing in the machine name may work better than browsing the
network since there can be hundreds of machines on a given network (and WIN-911 may
take several minutes to obtain all the machine names).
Available Servers
494
DDE
The "Available Servers" list box will show all available OPC Data Access servers (and
their types) that are registered on the selected machine name or IP address.
Machine prefix for Tags
The "Machine prefix for Tags" checkbox will append the machine name to the beginning
of every tag found on the selected server.
Server prefix for Tags
The "Server prefix for Tags" checkbox will append the server name to the beginning of
every tag found on the selected server.
Selected OPC Source
The "Selected OPC Source" text box defaults to a concatenated string comprised of the
selected machine name followed by the ">" symbol and the OPC Server name. This text
box also allows the user to manually configure any unique user defined Access name.
OPC Server Database Filter
The "OPC Server Database Filter" is used to filter tags before the list is given to WIN-911.
This filter MUST be supported by the OPC Server and is specific to each OPC Server.
495
WIN-911 V7.14
Importing Tags
The OPC Server Items window allows the user to select desired tags from the OPC
Server tag list, configure tagname filters to help in the tag name selection, and select or
create tag's desired group.
To select a block of tags to import quickly, click on the first tag of the block.
496
DDE
Next, scroll down to the bottom of the block list and shift-click the last tag.
497
WIN-911 V7.14
Once all the tags are selected, press the Add button and the application will fill the
Selected Tags from the entire OPC Server tag list.
If you wish to deselect any of the tags from the list before the import macro is run, select
them from the Selected Tags using the Remove button. Otherwise, select Apply and the
WIN-911 database import will execute.
498
DDE
Data Source Definition
This button is used to setup data communications. Data point addressing can be
monotonous and syntactically rigorous. Rather than being forced into remembering (and
exactly typing) the OPC Server invocation string for each "Item Name" to be alarmed, you
merely select the appropriate data source type from the selection list. When you define
data points, a selection box will provide you with a list of "Access Names" to choose from.
Simply select "OPC Data Server".
Note: The data source definition is automatically configured if the OPC Server database
was imported using the OPC Server import utility.
The OPC Data Server Access Name, Machine Name, and Server Name are defined here.
The "Access Name" is a user defined name used to represent this particular data source.
The "OPC Machine Name" is the machine name where the OPC Server resides. This can
be either a WINS hostname, IP address, or the text "(Local Machine)," to refer to the
machine you are currently on. The "OPC Server Name" is the actual name of the OPC
Server. Click OK.
499
WIN-911 V7.14
Selecting "Edit" or double-clicking on the "Access Name" will bring you back to the OPC
Data Server Options window.
Select "Ignore Bad Quality Updates" and WIN-911 will disregard OPC updates when the
item quality is bad.
500
DDE
Demo of WIN-911 Capabilities
The following OPC demonstration provides a basic understanding and working example
of the WIN-911 system. These examples are self-contained and require no additional
software other than what is included on the WIN-911 installation CD. If voice telephony is
desired for the demo, then you will need a TAPI modem or Intel Dialogic card and a
phone line. If you wish to demonstrate paging you will need a standard Hayes®
compatible modem and phone line with a pager service provider and if you wish to
demonstrate email you will need a LAN connection and email servers. Both demos will
run with full functionality for 30 days.
501
WIN-911 V7.14
Creating a Demo OPC Server
Included in the WIN-911 software package is a “Promotional” copy of TOP Server and an
OPC Project (WIN-911 OPC DEMO.opf) which will offer the feel of “real-world” events.
These events will trigger alarm conditions and initiate responses in the Monitor.
Note: TOP Server is not required to run WIN-911; it merely offers easy access to “user
defined” OPC values, and provides an OPC Server.
The demo mode of WIN-911 will fully support all alarming options. To demonstrate the
pager option, you must have a data modem installed (either internal or serial port) or a
local paging system. The demo mode is unlimited with respect to Tagnames, Groups and
phone book telephone/pager entries, but will time out in 30 days.
Installing TOP Server & OPC Demo
From the Support Folder of the WIN-911 install CD open the OPC Server Demo subfolder and double-click on the topserverdemo.exe to run the setup. Step through the setup
dialog to complete the software installation.
502
DDE
Setting up the OPC Demo
To run the OPC demo developed by Specter, you must copy the WIN-911 OPC Demo
project from the C:\Program Files\Specter Instruments\WIN-911 V7\Tools folder. Copy
the WIN-911 OPC DEMO.opf file to C:\Program Files\Software Toolbox\TOP
Server\Projects folder.
Start TOP Server by clicking Start, Programs, Software Toolbox, TOP Server (sub folder),
TOP Server (program).
After the TOP Server launches, open the WIN-911 OPC DEMO.opf from the file pull-down
menu.
In the Freshwater Tank tree highlight GateValve. This will display the AlarmOpen1 tag in
the Tag Name list that makes up the demo. The Tag name is designed to describe the
condition of the alarm which is “open” or “1”. All the tags in this demo are labeled in
similar fashion. To manipulate these values you will need to start the OPC Quick Client by
clicking the last button on the right of the TOP Server toolbar.
You are now ready to manipulate data in the TOP Server. This is done by highlighting the
tag of interest and right-clicking to select Synchronous Write. For example, highlight the
SCADA.FreshWaterTank.GateValve.AlarmOpen1.
503
WIN-911 V7.14
Right-click the highlighted tag and select Synchronous Write. In the Write Value text box
enter the new digital value of 1. Then click Apply to execute the write. The value will be
updated in the TOP Server. All value manipulations are handled in a similar fashion.
Now we are ready to bring WIN-911 online running the OPC DEMO (or LITE DEMO).
Note the OPC address for the data values. The OPC Machine Name is “(Local Machine)”,
the OPC Server Name is “SWToolbox.TOPServer” and the Item Name syntax is
“SCADA.GroupName.AlarmCondition”.
504
DDE
Exploring the WIN-911 Configurator
The WIN-911 Configurator may be launched from your Windows Start Menu. If this is your
first time to launch the Configurator, you will be asked to start a new configuration or to
open an existing configuration. Open an existing configuration. Select the OPC
DEMO.MDB or LITE DEMO.MDB" from the Open window, click Open. If you want to save
the demo file as another name, from the Menu Bar select “Save As.”
Click File, then Save to set this configuration file as your active configuration. For a
complete review of the configurator and its functions, see the WIN-911 Configurator chm
located in your installation directory.
505
WIN-911 V7.14
506
DDE
Running the OPC Demo
Start the Scan & Alarm from the “Start Program” button. This program will automatically
start any modules needed to run the application. The demo application includes WIN911
Alarm Monitor and WIN911 Announcer. Size and position the Alarm Monitor window, TOP
Server window, and OPC Quick Client window so that all windows can be seen at the
same time.
From the OPC Quick Client, select SCADA.FreshWaterTank.GateValve and highlight
SCADA.FreshWaterTank.GateValve.AlarmOpen1 in the right column. Then, right-click the
highlighted tag and select Synchronous Write. In the Write Value text box enter the new
digital value of “1” and click Apply. This simulates an alarm. You should now be
experiencing multimedia alarming. The WIN-911 Alarm Monitor should be displaying an
alarm and the sound card should be announcing the audio version of the same alarm.
You may acknowledge the alarm in one of two ways: a) by positioning the cursor over the
alarm in the Alarm Monitor and double-clicking, or b) clicking on the Acknowledge button
will “Ack” all alarms.
Exit the WIN-911 by clicking on the SCAN 911-411 tray icon with the right button. It is
located in the Windows Tray Icon area. Then select “Exit WIN-911”.
If you have an alphanumeric pager, you may also try the pager option. You will first need
to install a data modem. The following configuration changes are needed:
1. Select the correct Com Port for the modem by clicking on the “Pager” button and
selecting the “Ports” tab.
2. From the Phone Book, double-click on “Tom Jones”, and then on the connection.
Modify the connection from “None” to “Alpha Pager” and enter appropriate phone
number and pager PIN number.
3. From the “Group” button, modify the groups to include Tom Jones on the group's
Contact List.
4. Save and exit the configuration, and restart Scan & Alarm.
Note: If at any time you do not have a WIN-911 manual handy, just select the HELP
button on the Configurator (it is an exact duplicate of the manual), or utilize the context
sensitive help buttons or click on the Help Library icon to direct you to the exact reference
in the manual.
Continue with the manual and try out some of the options as you read. WIN-911 was
designed to meet the alarm reporting needs of most industrial applications.
507
WIN-911 V7.14
Note: Refer to the last two sections of this chapter: “Typical Example of WIN-911 Voice
Dial-Out” and “Typical Example of WIN-411 Inquiry” for a continuation of these demos.
508
DDE
Typical Example of WIN-911 Voice Dialout
Overview
The following is an example of what can be expected using the WIN-911 Dial-Out Option.
Note that the Dialogic and TAPI options vary slightly at the beginning of the message.
With the Dialogic option, connection detect circuitry recognizes a human voice on the line
and automatically knows when the phone has been answered. The TAPI option simply
loops a salutation until the recipient enters their access code, which indicates to WIN-911
that the phone has been answered. Afterwards the two voice modules function the same.
Upon an alarm (which was configured for a Voice connection), WIN-911 examines the
phone book to determine if the first listed person is "on duty" (at this day and time).
Assume Tom Jones was selected and he was scheduled to be "on call".
The phone rings at Tom Jones' home, and reports: “This is the Water District Monitoring
System, with a call for Mr. Jones.... Please enter your access code followed by the pound
key.”
The access code is entered via the push button tone keypad on the telephone, followed
by the # key. If the code is validated, all unacknowledged alarm messages that Mr. Jones
needs to know about are reported for that alarm group, followed by: "Press star to repeat
message, any other key to continue...". Assume Mr. Jones wished to continue. At this
time another message is transmitted: "Enter you alarm acknowledgement code followed
by the pound key."
If Mr. Jones wanted to acknowledge the announced alarms, he would then enter his
acknowledgement code. If it was validated, he would then hear: "Alarms acknowledged..."
and "...Thank you...good-bye".
Now, assume that Mr. Jones was not home when WIN-911 tried to call, and the baby
sitter answered. In this scenario, after Mr. Jones' baby sitter answered the phone (and did
not know the access code), the second name (or phone number) on the list would be
called. Contact was made and the alarms were acknowledged. Upon returning home, Mr.
Jones was informed of the call. He now decides to call to see if everything is going
smoothly at the water department.
After dialing WIN-911's phone number, he would hear: "This is the Water District
Monitoring System.... Please enter your access code followed by the pound key". Mr.
Jones enters his code. The response would be: "There are no Unacknowledged Alarms to
report at this time...". Mr. Jones can now have a good night's rest.
WIN-911 Demonstration
The demonstration outlined here assumes that you have successfully completed the WIN911 demonstration. Use any of the “DEMO” files furnished and installed with the WIN-911
software.
With the WIN-911 Configurator, modify the Phone Book to include a phone number,
access and acknowledgement codes, and select “Voice” from the list box. Be sure the day
of the week and times are selected so that a number will be called.
509
WIN-911 V7.14
Also, from the “Group” button, select the name to be called. Next, be sure that the
individual alarms listed are not selected for either “Auto Acknowledge”, or “Acknowledge
on Return”, as the Voice/Dial-out will only report an unacknowledged alarm.
After the above modifications are made, save the configuration, launch Scan and Alarm.
510
DDE
Typical Example of WIN-411 Inquiry
Overview
The demonstration outlined here, featuring the power of WIN-411, assumes that you have
successfully completed the WIN-911 demonstration above. Review the configuration of
the 411 Reports, taking careful notice of the access numbers, voice report number,
change authorization codes, and each data index number.
Demonstration
Make sure there are no points which are within an alarm range in your OPC server.
Launch the Monitor.
User dials the computer.
Computer answers: “Hello, this is the computer .... Please enter your access code
followed by the pound key.”
User enters his access code on the touch-tone phone and presses the # key...(911 & #).
Computer responds: “There are no unacknowledged alarms to report at this time. Select
the desired report number followed by the pound key.”
User enters the report number (22 & #).
Computer responds: “You have selected Lift Station number 22. Press the pound key to
accept.”
User confirms (#).
Computer: “Lift Station Number 22... the wastewater level is [value] feet.”
“Lift Station Number 22... The pump is [on/off].”
" ... Press star to repeat message, any other key to continue.”
User selects 5 (any number).
Computer: “Please enter your authorization code followed by the pound key.”
User enters his authorization code for changes (411 & #).
Computer: “Select the point to change.”
User enters the data change index number (10 & #).
Computer: “You have selected the .. pump ... Press the pound key to accept.”
User confirms (#).
Computer: “Enter new value.”
User enters a “1”(or “0”) & #.
511
WIN-911 V7.14
Computer: ““Lift Station Number 22... the pump...the new value will be set to .. [On/Off].
Press the pound key to accept.”
User confirms (#).
Computer: “Select the point to change.”
User presses pound sign (#).
Computer: “Select the desired report number.”
User presses pound sign (#).
Computer: “Thank you, Goodbye.”
User disconnects.
512
DDE
For More Details
Defined information about detailed configuration for OPC or DDE can be found in the
main WIN911 Configurator help file located in the WIN-911 Help Library.
513
DDE
Overview
The DDE data connection allows WIN-911 to connect to a wide variety of HMI/SCADA
systems by using a generic data exchange medium, DDE. WIN-911 serves as a generic
DDE client. Since there is no means of browsing or importing, all tags must be manually
configured in WIN-911.
A configuration can be run with a single DDE connection or can be run simultaneously
with any of our other data connections (DDE, OPC, or Direct Connects). It is important to
note, however, that some of the terms (Application, Topic, Item Name, OPC Machine
Name, and OPC Server Name) are components of Microsoft's DDE/OPC address
nomenclature. Although these definition fields are still part of the configuration, they take
on different meanings and are governed by different constraints.
The data source must be running and DDE must be functioning before WIN-911 can
establish a connection. If WIN-911 is connecting to a data source across the network
using NETDDE, DDE Shares must be configured and the NETDDE must be functioning
before WIN-911 can establish a connection. If at any time WIN-911 loses its connection to
the data source, WIN-911 must be restarted to establish the connection again.
Like an OPC connection, the data source is passing raw values to WIN-911. This means
WIN-911 must be configured to alarm on appropriate set-points, therefore owning the
alarms. The DDE connection supports data tags or tags without alarm set points
configured. Data tags can be used in 411 Reports to monitor or manipulate values. The
DDE connection does not support Filter Tags; nor does it support dynamic features.
The DDE connection also supports watchdog timers. The DDE's watchdog timers can be
configured in two ways. WIN-911 can monitor a tag's changing value by setting the
timeout value greater than the time it takes the tag's value to change. You can also define
the watchdog timer with a "0". A watchdog timer set to "0" strictly monitors the connection
to the DDE server. A watchdog timer set to "0" will only report an alarm when WIN-911
loses its connection to the server and the server reports that the connection was broken.
Once the connection is lost WIN-911 must be restarted to reestablish connection with
server. Only the watchdog monitoring the changing value has the ability to return to
normal.
515
WIN-911 V7.14
What is DDE?
DDE stands for “Dynamic Data Exchange.” DDE is a complete communication protocol
designed by Microsoft to allow applications in the Windows environment to send/receive
data and instructions to/from each other. It implements a client-server relationship
between two concurrently running applications. The server application provides the data
and accepts requests from any other application interested in its data.
To obtain data from another application, the client program opens a channel to the server
application by specifying three things: the server Application name, the Topic name, and
the Item name. For example, in the case of Excel, the application name is “Excel”, the
topic name is the name of the specific spreadsheet that contains the data, and the item
name is the specific cell on the spreadsheet.
When a client application sets up a link to another DDE program, it requests the server
application to advise the client whenever a specific item's value changes. These data
links will remain active until either the client or server program terminates the link or the
conversation. They are a very efficient means of exchanging data. Once the link has been
established, no communication occurs until the specified data value changes. WIN-911
uses DDE to communicate with other DDE application programs.
WIN-911 has a recommended limit of 1,500 DDE data points. Proceeding beyond this
limit may cause the installation to not function properly due to Windows resource
limitations (number of data handles available) or otherwise exhibit impaired performance.
This limit will vary with each installation and is dependent on hardware configuration,
networking requirements, and other Windows programs running at the same time.
Specter does not extend telephone support for WIN-911 systems with over 1,500 DDE
data points.
516
viewLinc Direct Connect
The DDE Conversation
The DDE protocol identifies an element of data by using a three-part address. The three
parts of a DDE address are: Application, Topic, and Item.
The syntax is:
Application | Topic ! Item
Application refers to the name of the Windows program (server) which knows how to
access the data element. Note that if NetDDE is used to acquire data over a network, the
Application includes a network node name.
Topic is an application-specific sub-group of data elements. The user creates meaningful
names (or uses the DDE Server default topic) for the PLCs and other devices, and uses
these names as the topic names for DDE references; i.e., PLC-102.
Item indicates a specific data element within the specified topic. For many PLC servers,
an item is an individual register, or I/O point in a PLC or other device.
A typical DDE address of a data value coming from an Excel server would be:
Application = Excel
Topic = Sheet1.xls
Item = R1C3
NetDDE is a standard feature of Microsoft Windows Operating Systems. It allows DDE
data to be shared between computers. The standard DDE address is appended to the
machine name. The syntax is:
\\ Machine Name \ Application | Topic ! Item
Consult your Microsoft Windows manual for more information on networking and NetDDE.
517
WIN-911 V7.14
WIN-911 and Multiple DDE Servers
WIN-911 has the capability to communicate with more than one DDE Server
simultaneously if the application requires. If a DDE I/O Server is monitored by an
HMI/SCADA package and WIN-911 needs to monitor the same data, the developer has
two choices to make the connection. Each method has unique advantages over the other.
1. Configure WIN-911 to use the DDE I/O Server directly (just like the HMI/SCADA
package). This is the preferred choice when the DDE Server resides on the same
computer as WIN-911. It has the advantage of being more efficient and offers
higher performance.
2. Use the HMI/SCADA DDE Server to collect all the data from across the network
and serve it to WIN-911 using indirect DDE items (another set of Topics and
Items). This has the advantage in networking applications. If other Servers on the
network are lost, no re-initialization for WIN-911 is required to continue
monitoring active DDE items.
518
viewLinc Direct Connect
Quick Reference to SCADA DDE
SCADA
Application
Topic
Item
Wonderware
View
Tagname
<user
defined>
iFIX
Dmdde
Data
<user
defined>
RSView32
Rtdata
<folder
name>
<user
defined>
Micronet DDE
Micronet
Micronet
<user
defined>
Citect
Citect
Variable
<user
defined>
Lookout
Lookout
<folder
name>
<user
defined>
Excel
Excel
<spreadsheet
name>
<user
defined>
519
WIN-911 V7.14
DDE Connections with Wonderware's Drivers
Overview
If you are using Wonderware's InTouch, or one of the Wonderware DDE I/O drivers, the
following will show you how to provide WIN-911 access to the DDE data.
Identifying the Actual InTouch DDE Address:
From the InTouch Tag Name Dictionary, you can select and inquire any Tag Name. Note
that the InTouch Tag Name may not be the same as the actual DDE Item Name. After
locating the Tag Name of interest, look at the bottom of the dialog box and record the
actual DDE Item Name. This is the name required in WIN-911/411.
Note: If the Access Name button reveals a server other than View and a topic other than
Tagname, InTouch is a DDE client. You may attach WIN-911 directly to the server or
indirectly via the InTouch Tagname.
To complete a DDE address, you must have two pieces of additional information: a) the
Application Name, and b) the Topic Name. These are found in InTouch by selecting the
Access name button:
520
viewLinc Direct Connect
In the WIN-911 Configurator, select the button entitled Data Source Definition. Click New.
Select DDE Server and click OK.
This is very similar to InTouch; the Access Name is user defined. However, the
Application Name and the Topic Name must match exactly as configured in InTouch.
Note: InTouch Direct Connect is the Direct Connect's invocation string and is not a valid
Access Name for a DDE connection.
The last step is to identify the Item Name for the alarm/point you are interested in. Again,
this must be the exact name as found at the bottom of the InTouch Tag Name Dictionary.
521
WIN-911 V7.14
DDE Connections with GE's FIX Drivers
Overview
The following information will help in setting up WIN-911 to use with GE's FIX DDE Server
for both local and NetDDE to access DDE Items within the FIX database.
Identifying the FIX DDE Address
Two Possible DDE Application Names:
In the FIX Database Manger, you can view any tag defined in the database(s). For data
tags, you can also determine the register Type field and Data field being used for the tag.
You can see the elements defined for historical trending tags. The “Database Manager”
will not show you the FIX data format filter or the DDE application and DDE topic. If you
are configuring WIN-911 for tags on a FIX node locally, the Application will always be
“DMDDE” with two possible topics. If you are configuring for tags on a FIX node across a
network (NetDDE), the Application will always be "NDDE$" with two possible topics.
In the WIN-911 Configurator, select the button entitled Data Source Definition, click New,
then select "DDE Server."
Local or Networked Node DDE Server and Topic Names:
The local DDE Server name for the FIX is "DMDDE." The FIX DDE Server must be
running with a valid database before Scan & Alarm is started. If Scan & Alarm is started
first, there will be no DDE links established. The server provides two DDE topic names.
These two topics have two different functions. The DDE topic named "DATA" is used to
access live data values, and the DDE topic named "HTR" is used to access assorted
elements of historical trending. For WIN-911, only live data would be monitored with
alarms. Enter "DMDDE" in the Application/Sever Name field and "DATA" in the Topic
Name field when configuring the WIN-911 Data Source Definition.
522
viewLinc Direct Connect
Note: “FIX Remote Alarming” is the Direct Connect invocation string and is not a valid
Access Name for a DDE connection.
Finding the DDE Item Name:
Only tags defined in the active FIX database(s) will work with WIN-911. The Database
Manager will show you the FIX node name, tag name, and block type for all tags
contained within a database. You can also find the absolute maximum value range and
whether or not outputs are enabled. The FIX default Digital block type labels (OPEN=0,
CLOSE=1) for digital tags must match the "Alarm States" defined for a "Text Match" type
digital tag in WIN-911.
Note: You may also set up the digital alarms to “Bit Pick” digital alarms from 32 bit analog
values.
If an ASCII tag is going to be used to poke the alarms for a WIN-911 alarm group back to
a text (TX) type block tag in the FIX data base, be sure the text tag has a higher I/O
address than all other types. The maximum character string defined must be long enough
for the longest alarm string that could be produced (including date and time stamps!).
The DDE Item names used by FIX tend to be lengthy and contain more information than
the typical DDE Server uses to establish a DDE link. However, there is no way to shorten
or simplify the item name. The first part of a FIX data tag name is the FIX node name. Be
523
WIN-911 V7.14
aware that a single PC on a network used for a FIX DDE Server (SCADA node), when
seen from somewhere else on the network, has two names associated with it which are
both required to configure a NetDDE link. One name is the computer's name, the other is
the FIX node name. The computer's name is used as a delimited prefix for the DDE
Application, the FIX node name is used as a delimited prefix for the DDE data item. The
first element of the FIX DDE item name is the node name followed by a colon “:” with no
spaces. Then the FIX tag name (case sensitive) is followed by a period “.” with no spaces.
The final element of a FIX DDE Item name is a data format suffix (filter) for the tag value,
usually “F_CV”, “A_CV”, or “A_##” for all data tags. The following are FIX DDE Item
examples:
CONTROL:METER.F_CV Node named “CONTROL”, tag named “METER”, tag block type
Analog, Floating point, current value
STATUS:MESSAGES.A_CV Node named “STATUS”, tag named “MESSAGES”, tag
block type Text, ASCII, current value
Note: An extension “.F_CV” is a read only tag to WIN-911. Extensions of “.A_##”, and
“.A_CV” are read-write tags and can be used by WIN-411 to change a data value.
FIX DDE Item Name for Historical Tags:
The DDE Item names used by FIX for trending do not contain FIX node name prefixes.
Instead, they begin with a “Pen Group” followed by a period “.” with no spaces, a “Time
Group” followed by a period “.” with no spaces, followed by four “Y” or “N” (yes or no)
characters followed by periods “.” with no spaces, and the sample number. The DDE item
name configured in WIN-911/411 for a historical tag must match the complete character
string including all delimiters. Only an analog floating point type should be selected to
define historical alarm/points in WIN-911. See the examples below:
GROUP1.TIME1.Y.Y.N.N.10 Pen group “GROUP1”, time group “TIME1”, show node,
show tag, do not show date, do not show time, 10 samples.
Using FIX Workspace to Reference DDE Item Information:
The easiest way to get the complete tag information in the FIX is through the drawing
program. To cruise through the information about a tag that is already built into a view
window, simply double click on the linked graphic. Cancel your way back out after you get
what you need. To get information about a tag that is in the database, but is not part of
the current view window, select “Tools”, then “Link”. Only tags that have a data format
filter defined can be configured for WIN-911. For values used with WIN-911 alarming that
are also used on a View screen, it is important to use the same data filter and value
range. The following shows “Link” selecting a tag. The FIX node name prefix is the first
column, the tag name is the second, and the data filter is the third. In the WIN-911
configuration, the DDE item would be defined as “FIX:INT001.F_CV“.
524
viewLinc Direct Connect
Additional information about a FIX tag can be found within the Data Link definition
screens. Most important for configuration of WIN-911 are the portions that involve value
range.
Another important user defined FIX data value range that you need to know about is the
number of digits and if the format of the value is transferred using a decimal place. Within
WIN-911, if the tag is not a Digital or Text block type, select “Floating Point“ for the data
type when defining any analog alarm/point.
525
WIN-911 V7.14
Starting WIN-911 with Task Manager
Using FIX “Task Manager” to start WIN-911 requires that you place the DDE Server
before the TeleDAC.EXE in the list.
526
viewLinc Direct Connect
Using NetDDE
NetDDE is a standard feature of Microsoft Windows Products. It allows DDE data to be
shared between computers. The standard DDE address is appended with the machine
name. The syntax is:
\\ Machine Name \ Application | Topic ! Item.
Consult your Microsoft Windows manual for more information on networking and NetDDE.
Be sure all DDE Servers are “Shared” for NetDDE.
In completing the DDE Name Definition, use the “\\Machine Name\Application” as a single
entry for the DDE Application\Server Name.
527
WIN-911 V7.14
Setting DDE Shares for NetDDE
Use of NetDDE requires the proper settings of DDE Shares on all nodes that Scan and
Alarm will be interfacing. In this example we will setup a DDE Share for an Excel
spreadsheet running on a remote node.
On the remote node setup the DDE Share as follows:
1. Run the DDE Share program by clicking Start, Run, and typing DDESHARE in the
text box. After clicking OK the operating system will start the NetDDE Service.
2. From the DDE Share menu, select Shares, DDE Shares…, and the DDE Shares
sheet appears.
3. Click on the Add a Share… button.
4. Enter the application name followed by a "|*" in the Share Name text box. In this
case "Excel|*"
5. In the Old Style Application Name text box enter "Excel" and in the Old Style Topic
Name text box enter "*". New Style and Static text boxes are to remain undefined.
The Allow start Application and its service check boxes are left unchecked.
6. In the Item Security section, select the grant access to all items radio button.
7. Next, select the Permissions… button. The DDE Share Name Permissions sheet
appears
8. Highlight Everyone in the Name box, and in the Type of Access pull-down menu
select Full Control. Click OK to return to the DDE Share Properties sheet, and
then OK again to get back to the main DDE Shares list where you should now see
Excel|* listed.
9. Highlight Excel|* by single clicking on it and then click the Trust Share… button to
bring up the Trusted Shares Properties sheet.
10. Select the Start Application Enable and Initiate to Application Enable check boxes
and click OK.
11. At this time you should be able to access the spreadsheet from across the network
using NetDDE.
528
viewLinc Direct Connect
Data Source Definition
This button is used to setup data communications. Data point addressing can be
monotonous and syntactically rigorous. Rather than being forced into remembering (and
exactly typing) the DDE Server invocation string for each "Item Name" to be alarmed, you
merely select the appropriate data source type from the selection list. When you define
data points, a selection box will provide you with a list of "Access Names" from which to
choose. Simply select "DDE Server."
The DDE Server Access Name, Application/ Server Name, and Topic Name are defined
here. The "Access Name" is a user defined name used to represent this particular data
source. The "Application/ Server Name" is the application where the DDE Server resides.
The "Topic Name" is the DDE Topic for this particular DDE Server/ Application. Click Ok.
Selecting "Edit" or double-clicking on the "Access Name" will bring you back to the DDE
Server Definition window.
529
WIN-911 V7.14
530
viewLinc Direct Connect
Demo of WIN-911 Capabilities
The following DDE demonstration provides a basic understanding and working example
of the WIN-911 system. These examples are self-contained and do not require additional
software not included in the WIN-911 install or on the install CD (Top Server). If voice
telephony is desired for the demo, then you will need a TAPI modem or Intel Dialogic card
and a phone line. If you wish to demonstrate paging you will need a standard Hayes®
compatible modem and phone line with a pager service provider and if you wish to
demonstrate email you will need a LAN connection and email servers. Both demos will
run with WIN-911 in Demo mode (for 30 days).
531
WIN-911 V7.14
Creating a Demo DDE Server
Launch Microsoft Excel through the "Start" button -> "All Programs"; (or, if you are using
the Excel Promotional software found in the "C:\Program Files\Specter Instruments\WIN911 V7\Tools" directory, use Explorer). Use the “/File/Open” command to open the "WIN911 V7\Tools" directory and select the 911DEMO.XLS file. This is a spreadsheet
designed to offer WIN-911 active DDE data. Notice that the spreadsheet has three
separate demos, referenced as: Plastic Molding DEMO.MDB, City Water Department
DEMO.MDB, and Building Security DEMO.MDB. Select the demo of your choice and
resize the window so that it looks like the illustration below:
These Demos are designed for a simple understanding of WIN-911, and provide an
example of how it interfaces with a data source. The digital alarms should be entered as a
"0" or "1". The analog values are "Free Form".
The spreadsheet is protected and cannot be changed with the exception of the data field
row entitled "Variable" and "Text String".
Note the DDE address for the data values. The Application is "EXCEL", the Topic is
"911DEMO.XLS" and the Item Name is the row and column number of each variable data
cell.
Take a moment to look at the spreadsheet. Each demo is named and has a
corresponding WIN-911 configuration file found in the WIN-911 V7\Configuration Files
folder. Each demo is similar in format:
1. The first line following the demo name is the WIN-911 Group names.
2. The following two lines list the WIN-911 Tagnames.
3. The next line describes the alarm condition: i.e., “Low < 7.2” indicates that the
alarm is a floating point analog value with a low alarm setting of 7.2. A digital
alarm might be listed as “1=Off”, indicating a value of “1” as the alarm state and
corresponds to a condition of “Off”. A “0” value would be the normal state for that
alarm.
532
viewLinc Direct Connect
4. The next line (titled Variable) will allow you to enter values for the analog and
digital alarms. Notice that the default values are all set to non-alarm conditions.
5. The next two lines apply to the WIN-411 “Inquiry” Option. The first line lists the
WIN-411 name and number, and the next line indicates which alarm point may be
changed.
6. The last two lines in each demo demonstrates the DDE ASCII POKE option which
is used to allow HMI/SCADA software to be aware of WIN-911 alarms, and to
allow the user to Acknowledge the alarms through simple scripting in the
HMI/SCADA software. Upon an alarm in the Group, the alarm text message is
sent to the HMI/SCADA software. If the string “Ack” is poked back to that DDE tag,
WIN-911 will acknowledge the alarm condition.
533
WIN-911 V7.14
Exploring the WIN-911 Configurator
Start the WIN-911 Configurator from the "Start" button -> "All Programs" -> "WIN-911 V7"
-> "WIN-911 Configurator". You will then need to open an existing configuration file. If this
is not the first time the WIN-911 Configurator has been run, you will need to click "File" ->
"Open" in the Configurator's menu.
Select one of the three demos: Plastic Molding DEMO.MDB, City Water DEMO.MDB, and
Building Security DEMO.MDB. This tutorial will use the City Water DEMO.
Look behind all the various buttons, but do not change the configuration. Notice how the
Group, Alarms, DDE Item names and the WIN-411 Reports correspond to the Excel
spreadsheet. Reduce the program to icon size.
534
viewLinc Direct Connect
Running the DDE Demo
Start Scan & Alarm from the "Start" button -> All Programs -> "WIN-911 V7" -> "Scan and
Alarm". Size and position the Alarm Monitor window (and the Excel Window) so that both
windows can be seen at the same time.
From the Excel spreadsheet, change the value in a cell in the "Variable" row to an alarm
condition. This simulates an alarm. You should now be experiencing multimedia alarming.
The monitor should be displaying an alarm and the sound card should be announcing the
audio version of the same alarm.
You may acknowledge the alarm in one of three ways: a) by positioning the cursor over a
red alarm banner in the Alarm Monitor and double-clicking, b) click on the Acknowledge
button will “Ack” all alarms, or c) notice the “HMI/SCADA Acknowledgment” text on the
last two rows of the Excel Demo. This is an example of how you can remotely
acknowledge alarms from the data source. You will notice that the alarm message is
presented as a Text String. Type the string Ack in this cell and hit return (it is Case
sensitive.). Notice that this will acknowledge all outstanding alarms in the Alarm Monitor
for that Group.
If you are running the “Plastic Molding DEMO”, and let it run for at least two minutes, you
received a “Watchdog” alarm, and it will repeat every 5 minutes until it is acknowledged.
The purpose of a Watchdog alarm is to monitor the condition of the DDE Server and
associated data. The Watchdog alarm was purposefully configured to look at an invalid
data point. Watchdogs are highly recommended to validate healthy DDE data.
Exit the Scan & Alarm by right-clicking on the Scan 911-411 icon located in the system
tray of your operating system, by the clock. Then select "Exit WIN-911."
If you have an alphanumeric pager, you may also try the pager option. You will first need
to install a data modem. The following configuration changes are needed:
1. Select the correct COM Port for the modem by clicking on the “Pager” button and
selecting the “Ports” tab.
2. From the Phone Book, double-click on “Tom Jones,” and then on the connection.
Modify the connection from “None” to “Alpha Pager” and enter appropriate phone
number and pager PIN number.
3. From the “Group” button, modify the groups to include Tom Jones on the group's
Contact List.
4. Save and exit the configuration, and restart Scan & Alarm.
If at any time you do not have a WIN-911 manual handy, just select the HELP button on
the Configurator (it is an exact duplicate of the manual), utilize the contact sensitive help
buttons, or click on the WIN-911 Digital Document to direct you to the exact reference in
the manual.
535
WIN-911 V7.14
Continue with the manual and try out some of the options as you read. WIN-911 was
designed to meet the alarm reporting needs of most industrial applications.
536
viewLinc Direct Connect
Typical Example of WIN-911 Voice Dial-Out
Overview
The following is an example of what can be expected using the WIN-911 Dial-Out Option.
Note that the Dialogic and TAPI options vary slightly at the beginning of the message.
With the Dialogic option, connection detect circuitry recognizes a human voice on the line
and automatically knows when the phone has been answered. With most TAPI modems,
simply loops a salutation until the recipient enters their access code, which indicates to
WIN-911 that the phone has been answered. Afterwards the two voice modules function
the same.
Upon an alarm (which was configured for a Voice connection), WIN-911 examines the
phone book to determine if the first listed person is "on duty" (at this day and time).
Assume Tom Jones was selected and he was scheduled to be "on call".
The phone rings at Tom Jones' home, and reports: “This is the Water District Monitoring
System, with a call for Mr. Jones.... Please enter your access code followed by the pound
key.”
The access code is entered via the push button tone keypad on the telephone, followed
by the # key. If the code is validated, all unacknowledged alarm messages that Mr. Jones
needs to know about are reported for that alarm group, followed by: "Press star to repeat
message, any other key to continue...". Assume Mr. Jones wished to continue. At this
time another message is transmitted: "Enter you alarm acknowledgement code followed
by the pound key."
If Mr. Jones wanted to acknowledge the announced alarms, he would then enter his
acknowledgement code. If it was validated, he would then hear: "Alarms acknowledged..."
and "...Thank you...good-bye".
Now, assume that Mr. Jones was not home when WIN-911 tried to call, and the baby
sitter answered. In this scenario, after Mr. Jones' baby sitter answered the phone (and did
not know the access code), the second name (or phone number) on the list would be
called. Contact was made and the alarms were acknowledged. Upon returning home, Mr.
Jones was informed of the call. He now decides to call to see if everything is going
smoothly at the water department.
After dialing WIN-911's phone number, he would hear: "This is the Water District
Monitoring System.... Please enter your access code followed by the pound key". Mr.
Jones enters his code number. The response would be: "There are no Unacknowledged
Alarms to report at this time...". Mr. Jones can now have a good night's rest.
WIN-911 Demonstration
The demonstration outlined here assumes that you have successfully completed the WIN911 demonstration. Use any of the “DEMO” files furnished and installed with the WIN-911
software.
537
WIN-911 V7.14
With the WIN-911 Configurator, modify the Phone Book to include a phone number,
access and acknowledgement codes, and select “Voice” from the list box. Be sure the day
of the week and times are selected so that a number will be called.
Also, from the “Group” button, select the name to be called. Next, be sure that the
individual alarms listed are not selected for either “Auto Acknowledge”, or “Acknowledge
on Return”, as the Voice/Dial-out will only report an unacknowledged alarm.
After the above modifications are made, save the configuration, launch Scan & Alarm.
538
viewLinc Direct Connect
Typical Example of WIN-411 Inquiry
Overview
The demonstration outlined here featuring the power of WIN-411 assumes that you have
successfully completed the WIN-911 demonstration above. Use any of the three DDE
"DEMO" files furnished and installed with the WIN-911 software. Review the configuration
of the 411 Reports, taking careful notice of the access numbers, voice report number,
change authorization codes, and each data index number.
Demonstration
Check the EXCEL spreadsheet and be sure no points are in alarm. Launch the Monitor.
User dials the computer.
Computer answers: “Hello, this is the computer .... Please enter your access code
followed by the pound key.”
User enters his access code on the touch-tone phone and presses the # key...(911 & #).
Computer responds: “There are no unacknowledged alarms to report at this time. Select
the desired report number followed by the pound key.”
User enters the report number (22 & #).
Computer responds: “You have selected Lift Station number 22. Press the pound key to
accept.”
User confirms (#).
Computer: “Lift Station Number 22... the wastewater level is [value] feet.”
“Lift Station Number 22... The pump is [on/off].”
“ ... Press star to repeat message, any other key to continue.”
User selects 5 (any number).
Computer: “Please enter your authorization code followed by the pound key.”
User enters his authorization code for changes (411 & #).
Computer: “Select the point to change.”
User enters the data change index number (10 & #).
Computer: “You have selected the .. pump ... Press the pound key to accept.”
User confirms (#).
Computer: “Enter new value.”
User enters a “1”(or “0”) & #.
539
WIN-911 V7.14
Computer: ““Lift Station Number 22... the pump...the new value will be set to .. [On/Off].
Press the pound key to accept.”
User confirms (#).
Computer: “Select the point to change.”
User presses pound sign (#).
Computer: “Select the desired report number.”
User presses pound sign (#).
Computer: “Thank you, Goodbye.”
User disconnects.
540
viewLinc Direct Connect
For More Details
More information regarding the configuration of DDE data sources can be found in the
main WIN911 Configurator help file located in the WIN-911 Help Library.
541
viewLinc Direct Connect
Getting Started with viewLinc
Overview
WIN-911's viewLinc Direct Connection is designed to interface with a viewLinc server in a
networked environment in order to receive and acknowledge alarms. This manual
discusses the setup required for WIN-911 and viewLinc communications. See the
Configurator Manual for instructions on configuring specific types of alarm notifications.
Step-by-step Configuration
Three components need to be configured in order to receive and acknowledge alarms
from viewLinc: a viewLinc Data Source, an Alarm Filter and an Alarm Group. The first
step is to configure the Data Source connection. The Data Source defines the basic
information required to connect to your viewLinc server, mainly the server name and the
viewLinc user account that WIN-911 should log into the system with.
Create a Data Source by clicking Configure > Data Source Definitions > New. Select
"viewLinc Direct Connect."
543
WIN-911 V7.14
All fields in this dialog are required. A detailed explanation of each setting can be found in
the Data Source Definition topic.
The next step is to create an Alarm Group. Alarm Groups associate specific alarms with a
list of users to notify for alarm events. Create a Group by clicking Configure > Group
Definitions > New. The only required field is the Name field. Groups are discussed
thoroughly in the WIN-911 Configurator manual.
Finally, an Alarm Filter must be defined. Click Configure > Alarm Filters > New.
Filters determine which alarms will be monitored by WIN-911. Think of them as a search
query. All viewLinc alarms which match your query will be monitored by WIN-911. Alarm
Filters also associate those alarms with an Alarm Group. The Tagname field is used to
name the Filter. The actual query is defined by clicking the "Edit Filter" button. The default
filter is simply an asterisk, or wildcard character, which will match all alarms in your
viewLinc system. A more detailed explanation of Alarm Filters is given later in this
manual.
Bypass and data pokes are not supported for viewLinc Direct Connections
544
viewLinc Direct Connect
Data Source
Data Source Definition
Access Name
This is the name of your Data Source. It is used internally by WIN-911 to refer to your
viewLinc connection and does not reference anything in your viewLinc connection. The
access name is left solely to your discretion.
Server
The server field refers to the name or address of your viewLinc host. It may be a Fully
Qualified Domain Name, hostname or IP address.
Port
This is the TCP port that your viewLinc server hosts it website through. This is port 80 by
default.
viewLinc User Account
545
WIN-911 V7.14
WIN-911 requires a viewLinc user account in order to receive and acknowledge alarms
from viewLinc. This account must have "view" and "acknowledge alarms" permission in
viewLinc.
The viewLinc user account specified here is global to all viewLinc Data Sources in your
WIN-911 configuration. This means, if you're connecting to multiple viewLinc servers, the
same user account must be present on all viewLinc servers.
546
viewLinc Direct Connect
Options
Color Severity Mapping
WIN-911 has three severity levels. Alarms with higher severity take precedence over
other alarms for alarm notification. Match your viewLinc alarm color to the corresponding
WIN-911 severity level here.
Dynamic Options
Dynamic options are settings that can be retrieved directly from viewLinc and used for
alarm notification. These include alarm descriptions, priorities and sounds. These settings
are passed to WIN-911 as an alarm occurs. This centralizes your alarm configuration
within viewLinc and allows you to tweak alarm descriptions, sounds and priorities without
restarting WIN-911.
Description
When dynamic descriptions are enabled, WIN-911 will use the same alarm description
displayed by viewLinc's active alarm page.
Priority
As previously mentioned, WIN-911 may map viewLinc's colors to WIN-911's own priority
scheme. Check this box to enable this feature.
Sounds
All of the sounds for individual alarms can be pulled directly from viewLinc when an alarm
occurs. This will be a combination of the channel, logger, hostname and alarm description
in viewLinc. An example alarm announcement may read as: "'Channel1' on logger
'logger1' on host 'server1' threshold channel value greater than 88 F."
547
WIN-911 V7.14
Include Hostname
Select this check box to include the server's hostname in the voice and local auto
annunciation of alarms associated with this data source. The default setting is
unchecked.
548
viewLinc Direct Connect
Alarm Filters
What is an Alarm Filter?
An Alarm Filter is a set of parameters that define which alarms should be monitored by
WIN-911, much like a search query. This eliminates the need to maintain a list of each
alarm in WIN-911. One can simply define a Filter that matches every alarm in a viewLinc
system and never have to bother with manually defining or importing alarm tags in WIN911.
viewLinc alarms may be filtered on zone, logger description, channel description, color
and type. These parameters may be combined to create complex filters. Each parameter
is combined logically with an "and statement." This makes it possible to create Filters with
some specificity. If you want WIN-911 to monitor alarms in a specific zone that are also
red, specify the zone description in your Filter and select the color red.
Alarm Filters also associate matching alarms to Alarm Groups. Alarm Groups manage
which contacts are notified about specific alarms. Every alarm that matches an Alarm
Filter will be sent to that Filter's Group. If you want one set of people to be notified about
alarms in one zone and another set of people to hear about alarms in another zone, you
need to create a Filter for each zone. You then need to assign each Filter to a different
Group. The groups then specify who will be notified about the alarm.
549
WIN-911 V7.14
Base Definition
Tagname
The Tagname specifies the name of the filter. It has no bearing on the actual tags defined
within viewLinc. It is a user defined name within WIN-911, used to refer to a Filter
definition in the same way that an Access Name refers to a particular Data Source.
Filter
The filter specifies the parameters used in the Filter's query.
Group Name
Every filter must belong to a Group. Groups provide Contact Lists, which specify who gets
alarm notifications and the order. All alarms matched by your Filter will be a member of
the Group you specify here and will be sent to the Group's Contact List for notification.
Alarm Type
Options for this setting include: "Analog," "Digital," and "Any Alarm." Select "Analog" if you
want this filter to match only threshold or level alarms. Select "Digital" for any binary or
discrete alarm. "Any Alarm" will allow either type of alarm to pass through the filter.
Data Source
550
viewLinc Direct Connect
A Filter must be associated with a particular viewLinc server. This association is made by
the Access Name of the viewLinc server.
Automatic Acknowledgment
Alarms that match a particular Filter can be acknowledged when they are received or
when they return to normal. Acknowledging an alarm when it is received by WIN-911 will
prevent all alarm notification. Acknowledging an alarm when it returns to normal, will only
prevent notification when an alarm returns to normal.
551
WIN-911 V7.14
Filter Syntax
Alarm filters determine which alarms will be monitored by WIN-911. A filter consists of
several parameters, any of which may be combined with a logical "and statement." An
alarm matches a filter if it matches all of the parameters specified.
Use Type to Filter
Select threshold, logger, or host to monitor alarms associated with either threshold
alarms, logger communication alarms or host alarms.
Filter on Zones
Enter a string here to filter alarms by zone name. You may enter in literal text or the
wildcard characters "*," and "?." An asterisk will match any character any number of
times. A question mark will match any one character once.
Filter on Logger Description
You may also filter based on the logger description. Wildcard characters may be used
here as well.
Filter on Channel Description
552
viewLinc Direct Connect
You may also filter based on channel description.
Filter on Color Severity
Alarms may be assigned colors within viewLinc. Check any color you wish to monitor
here.
553
WIN-911 V7.14
Setup
Alarm Setpoints and Priorities
Use the check boxes to enable or disable high or low threshold alarms. You may also
assign a priority to all high or low threshold alarms with the drop down boxes. Priorities
are assigned dynamically by default. See your viewLinc Data Source Definition Options to
change this setting.
Number of Decimal Places
WIN-911 will truncate any digital after the decimal place by default. Select the number of
decimal places you wish WIN-911 to display here.
Engineering Units
You can append engineering units to the values of your viewLinc alarms, e.g. "meters,
Celsius."
554
viewLinc Direct Connect
Sounds
The sounds defined here will be used to announce alarms that match this filter. These
options will be greyed out by default. Filters can match multiple alarms, so in most
applications it does not make sense to define a tag sounds in the filter. Sounds are
generated dynamically by default, meaning that the tagname and alarm state sounds, as
defined by viewLinc, are used to synthesize audio. If you wish to specify your sounds
within WIN-911, disable dynamic sounds in your viewLinc Data Source definition's options
menu.
555
WIN-911 V7.14
Watchdog Timers
Editing Watchdogs
Overview
Watchdog alarms provide a way to notify users that WIN-911 has lost its connection to
your viewLinc server. During this time, you may miss critical alarms. Avoid this dangerous
scenario by using a Watchdog alarm.
viewLinc Watchdogs work a bit differently, than watchdogs defined for our other Data
Sources. Typically, WIN-911 monitors a changing alarm or data value, which serves as a
heartbeat. As long as WIN-911 receives the heartbeat updates, the Watchdog alarm will
remain normal. Should the watchdog time-out before a heartbeat is heard from the server,
an alarm is triggered.
Watchdogs for viewLinc do not require a heartbeat. WIN-911 will alarm on a Watchdog as
soon as the connection to viewLinc is lost. This saves you from taking the extra step of
creating a data point on your viewLinc server for WIN-911 to monitor.
Step-by-step
Select Configure > Watchdogs from the Configurator to view a list of configured
Watchdogs.
Click New to create a new Watchdog.
There are a few fields in the Watchdog definition that are required: the tagname, item
name, access name, group name and time-out period. Everything else is optional, but
recommended. Each of these settings is discussed in the following topics.
In order to receive a notification when WIN-911 loses connection to viewLinc, you must
assign the watchdog to a group with contacts in the contact list. If you haven't created
your group, you must do so before creating a watchdog. Watchdog alarms will be notified
in the same way other alarms are. Watchdogs return to normal when viewLinc and WIN911 are reconnected.
556
viewLinc Direct Connect
Base Definitions
Tagname
This is the name of your watchdog alarm. It must be unique.
Description
Enter a description here to provide your users with more context than the tagname
provides. It is a good idea to be as descriptive as possible, as the description may be
used in notifications.
Group Name
Watchdogs, like other alarms, must belong to a group. Groups provide Contact Lists,
which specify who gets alarm notifications and the order.
Access Name
Alarms must be associated with a particular viewLinc server. Select the Access Name of
the viewLinc server you wish the Watchdog to monitor.
Item Name
Normally, the Item Name field would specify a particular tag on a SCADA package to
monitor for updates, much like a heartbeat. However, viewLinc watchdogs do not require
a server side heartbeat to monitor connectivity. Enter any text here, or check the "Use
Tagname for Item" box to copy the tagname into this field.
557
WIN-911 V7.14
Alarm Conditions
Alarm
The text entered here is used to display the alarm when in failure mode, that is, when
WIN-911 is disconnected from viewLinc.
Normal
This text is used when WIN-911 is normal, or connected to viewLinc.
Time-out After
The time-out period for viewLinc watchdogs must always be zero.
Priority
WIN-911 has three priority settings: high, medium and low. Alarms with higher priority will
be notified before alarms with lower priority.
Automatic Acknowledgment
Watchdog alarms can be acknowledged when they are received or when they return to
normal. Acknowledging an alarm when it is received by WIN-911 will prevent all alarm
notification. Acknowledging an alarm when it returns to normal, will only prevent
notification when an alarm returns to normal.
558
viewLinc Direct Connect
Sounds
In the above example, the watchdog alarm would be announced as, "viewLinc Watchdog
is Disconnected."
Tag
This is the sound used to represent the tagname of your watchdog.
Alarm
This represents the alarm or failure mode.
Normal
This represents the normal mode.
559
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement